From a6eb34d7fec8170a8715f9e53ca2f96452dd30dd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Thomas E. Dickey" Date: Sun, 20 Dec 2020 01:12:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH] ncurses 6.2 - patch 20201219 + suppress hyphenation in generated html for manpages, to address regression in upgrade of groff 1.22.2 to 1.22.3. + fix inconsistent sort-order in see-also sections of manpages (report by Chris Bennett). --- NEWS | 8 +- VERSION | 2 +- dist.mk | 6 +- doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html | 2 +- doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html | 21 +- doc/html/man/clear.1.html | 41 +- doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html | 76 +- doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html | 137 +- doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html | 14 +- doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html | 28 +- doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html | 12 +- doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html | 14 +- doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html | 10 +- doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html | 16 +- doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html | 6 +- doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html | 23 +- doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html | 12 +- doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html | 12 +- doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html | 16 +- doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html | 19 +- doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html | 10 +- doc/html/man/curs_scanw.3x.html | 20 +- doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html | 25 +- doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html | 48 +- doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/form.3x.html | 16 +- doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html | 28 +- doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html | 12 +- doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html | 18 +- doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html | 16 +- doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html | 28 +- doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html | 24 +- doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html | 20 +- doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html | 291 ++-- doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html | 9 +- doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu.3x.html | 41 +- doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html | 12 +- doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html | 22 +- doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html | 10 +- doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html | 11 +- doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html | 20 +- doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html | 8 +- doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html | 4 +- doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html | 670 ++++----- doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html | 10 +- doc/html/man/new_pair.3x.html | 52 +- doc/html/man/panel.3x.html | 44 +- doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html | 22 +- doc/html/man/scr_dump.5.html | 85 +- doc/html/man/tabs.1.html | 113 +- doc/html/man/term.5.html | 258 ++-- doc/html/man/term.7.html | 127 +- doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html | 1490 ++++++++++---------- doc/html/man/tic.1m.html | 241 ++-- doc/html/man/toe.1m.html | 50 +- doc/html/man/tput.1.html | 188 +-- doc/html/man/tset.1.html | 189 +-- doc/html/man/user_caps.5.html | 138 +- man/curs_add_wchstr.3x | 6 +- man/curs_addchstr.3x | 6 +- man/curs_getch.3x | 4 +- man/curs_termcap.3x | 6 +- man/curs_util.3x | 3 +- man/default_colors.3x | 6 +- man/form_driver.3x | 4 +- man/infotocap.1m | 6 +- man/menu_driver.3x | 6 +- man/tabs.1 | 4 +- man/terminfo.tail | 6 +- man/tic.1m | 4 +- man/toe.1m | 6 +- man/tput.1 | 6 +- man/user_caps.5 | 6 +- package/debian-mingw/changelog | 4 +- package/debian-mingw64/changelog | 4 +- package/debian/changelog | 4 +- package/mingw-ncurses.nsi | 4 +- package/mingw-ncurses.spec | 2 +- package/ncurses.spec | 2 +- package/ncursest.spec | 2 +- test/README | 16 +- 123 files changed, 2604 insertions(+), 2574 deletions(-) diff --git a/NEWS b/NEWS index 599e9354..d58c2c1c 100644 --- a/NEWS +++ b/NEWS @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ -- sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written -- -- authorization. -- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --- $Id: NEWS,v 1.3605 2020/12/12 20:00:21 tom Exp $ +-- $Id: NEWS,v 1.3608 2020/12/19 23:57:59 tom Exp $ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This is a log of changes that ncurses has gone through since Zeyd started @@ -46,6 +46,12 @@ See the AUTHORS file for the corresponding full names. Changes through 1.9.9e did not credit all contributions; it is not possible to add this information. +20201219 + + suppress hyphenation in generated html for manpages, to address + regression in upgrade of groff 1.22.2 to 1.22.3. + + fix inconsistent sort-order in see-also sections of manpages (report + by Chris Bennett). + 20201212 + improve manual pages for form field-types. diff --git a/VERSION b/VERSION index e9f053ae..0eb92632 100644 --- a/VERSION +++ b/VERSION @@ -1 +1 @@ -5:0:10 6.2 20201212 +5:0:10 6.2 20201219 diff --git a/dist.mk b/dist.mk index ff87add3..9503a8b6 100644 --- a/dist.mk +++ b/dist.mk @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ # use or other dealings in this Software without prior written # # authorization. # ############################################################################## -# $Id: dist.mk,v 1.1389 2020/12/12 11:43:33 tom Exp $ +# $Id: dist.mk,v 1.1391 2020/12/19 23:48:33 tom Exp $ # Makefile for creating ncurses distributions. # # This only needs to be used directly as a makefile by developers, but @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ SHELL = /bin/sh # These define the major/minor/patch versions of ncurses. NCURSES_MAJOR = 6 NCURSES_MINOR = 2 -NCURSES_PATCH = 20201212 +NCURSES_PATCH = 20201219 # We don't append the patch to the version, since this only applies to releases VERSION = $(NCURSES_MAJOR).$(NCURSES_MINOR) @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ doc/hackguide.doc: doc/html/hackguide.html # If that conflicts with the --without-manpage-renames, you can install those # in a different location using the --with-install-prefix option of the # configure script. -MANPROG = tbl | nroff -mandoc -rLL=78n -rLT=78n -Tascii +MANPROG = tbl | nroff -mandoc -rHY=0 -rLL=78n -rLT=78n -Tascii manhtml: @for f in doc/html/man/*.html; do \ diff --git a/doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html b/doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html index 946f00c4..b92ece9a 100644 --- a/doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html +++ b/doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html b/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html
index f5b9b1b1..95490a8d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html
@@ -57,15 +57,15 @@

DESCRIPTION

        captoinfo  looks in each given text file for termcap descriptions.  For
-       each one found, an equivalent terminfo description is written to  stan-
-       dard  output.   Termcap tc capabilities are translated directly to ter-
-       minfo use capabilities.
+       each one found,  an  equivalent  terminfo  description  is  written  to
+       standard  output.   Termcap  tc capabilities are translated directly to
+       terminfo use capabilities.
 
        If no file is given, then the environment variable TERMCAP is used  for
        the  filename  or entry.  If TERMCAP is a full pathname to a file, only
        the terminal whose name is specified in the environment  variable  TERM
        is  extracted  from  that file.  If the environment variable TERMCAP is
-       not set, then the file /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo is read.
+       not set, then the file /usr/share/terminfo is read.
 
        -v   print out tracing information on standard  error  as  the  program
             runs.
@@ -81,8 +81,7 @@

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo
-                           Compiled terminal description database.
+       /usr/share/terminfo Compiled terminal description database.

TRANSLATIONS FROM NONSTANDARD CAPABILITIES

@@ -112,8 +111,8 @@
        PD       kN     XENIX   key_npage
        PN       po     XENIX   prtr_off
        PS       pf     XENIX   prtr_on
-
        PU       kP     XENIX   key_ppage
+
        RT       @8     XENIX   kent
        UP       ku     XENIX   kcuu1
        KA       k;     Tek     key_f10
@@ -156,9 +155,9 @@
        Gc    intersection
        GG    acs magic cookie count
 
-       If  the single-line capabilities occur in an entry, they will automati-
-       cally be composed into an acsc string.   The  double-line  capabilities
-       and GG are discarded with a warning message.
+       If   the   single-line  capabilities  occur  in  an  entry,  they  will
+       automatically  be  composed  into  an  acsc  string.   The  double-line
+       capabilities and GG are discarded with a warning message.
 
        IBM's  AIX  has  a  terminfo  facility descended from SVr1 terminfo but
        incompatible with the SVr4 format.  The following  AIX  extensions  are
@@ -200,7 +199,7 @@

SEE ALSO

        infocmp(1m), curses(3x), terminfo(5)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).

AUTHOR

diff --git a/doc/html/man/clear.1.html b/doc/html/man/clear.1.html
index 5b4bfd35..d2d85441 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/clear.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/clear.1.html
@@ -71,10 +71,10 @@

OPTIONS

        -T type
-            indicates the type of terminal.  Normally this option is  unneces-
-            sary,  because  the default is taken from the environment variable
-            TERM.  If -T is specified, then the shell variables LINES and COL-
-            UMNS will also be ignored.
+            indicates  the  type  of  terminal.   Normally  this   option   is
+            unnecessary,  because  the  default  is taken from the environment
+            variable TERM.  If -T is specified, then the shell variables LINES
+            and COLUMNS will also be ignored.
 
        -V   reports the version of ncurses which was used in this program, and
             exits.  The options are as follows:
@@ -94,20 +94,21 @@
            /usr/bin/tput ${1:+-T$1} clear 2> /dev/null
            exit
 
-       In 1989, when Keith Bostic revised the BSD tput command to make it sim-
-       ilar to the AT&T tput, he added a shell script for the clear command:
+       In 1989, when Keith Bostic revised the BSD  tput  command  to  make  it
+       similar  to  the  AT&T  tput,  he  added  a  shell script for the clear
+       command:
 
            exec tput clear
 
        The remainder of the script in each case is a copyright notice.
 
-       The  ncurses  clear  command began in 1995 by adapting the original BSD
+       The ncurses clear command began in 1995 by adapting  the  original  BSD
        clear command (with terminfo, of course).
 
        The E3 extension came later:
 
-       o   In June 1999, xterm provided an extension to the  standard  control
-           sequence  for  clearing  the screen.  Rather than clearing just the
+       o   In  June  1999, xterm provided an extension to the standard control
+           sequence for clearing the screen.  Rather than  clearing  just  the
            visible part of the screen using
 
                printf '\033[2J'
@@ -116,24 +117,24 @@
 
                printf '\033[3J'
 
-           This is documented in XTerm Control Sequences as a  feature  origi-
-           nating with xterm.
+           This  is  documented  in  XTerm  Control  Sequences  as  a  feature
+           originating with xterm.
 
        o   A few other terminal developers adopted the feature, e.g., PuTTY in
            2006.
 
-       o   In April 2011, a Red Hat developer submitted a patch to  the  Linux
-           kernel,  modifying  its  console  driver to do the same thing.  The
-           Linux change, part of the  3.0  release,  did  not  mention  xterm,
+       o   In  April  2011, a Red Hat developer submitted a patch to the Linux
+           kernel, modifying its console driver to do  the  same  thing.   The
+           Linux  change,  part  of  the  3.0  release, did not mention xterm,
            although it was cited in the Red Hat bug report (#683733) which led
            to the change.
 
-       o   Again, a few other terminal developers adopted  the  feature.   But
+       o   Again,  a  few  other terminal developers adopted the feature.  But
            the next relevant step was a change to the clear program in 2013 to
            incorporate this extension.
 
-       o   In 2013, the E3 extension was overlooked in tput with  the  "clear"
-           parameter.   That  was  addressed  in  2016 by reorganizing tput to
+       o   In  2013,  the E3 extension was overlooked in tput with the "clear"
+           parameter.  That was addressed in  2016  by  reorganizing  tput  to
            share its logic with clear and tset.
 
 
@@ -141,15 +142,15 @@
        Neither IEEE Std 1003.1/The Open  Group  Base  Specifications  Issue  7
        (POSIX.1-2008) nor X/Open Curses Issue 7 documents tset or reset.
 
-       The  latter documents tput, which could be used to replace this utility
-       either via a shell script or by an alias (such as a symbolic  link)  to
+       The latter documents tput, which could be used to replace this  utility
+       either  via  a shell script or by an alias (such as a symbolic link) to
        run tput as clear.

SEE ALSO

        tput(1), terminfo(5)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html
index e1cbff48..2aa59200 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html
@@ -67,20 +67,20 @@

DESCRIPTION

add_wch

-       The add_wch, wadd_wch, mvadd_wch, and mvwadd_wch functions put the com-
-       plex character wch into the given window at its current position, which
-       is then advanced.  These functions perform wrapping and special-charac-
-       ter processing as follows:
+       The  add_wch,  wadd_wch,  mvadd_wch,  and  mvwadd_wch functions put the
+       complex character wch into the given window at  its  current  position,
+       which  is then advanced.  These functions perform wrapping and special-
+       character processing as follows:
 
        o   If wch refers to a spacing character, then any  previous  character
            at  that  location is removed.  A new character specified by wch is
-           placed at that location with rendition specified by wch.  The  cur-
-           sor then advances to the next spacing character on the screen.
+           placed at that location  with  rendition  specified  by  wch.   The
+           cursor then advances to the next spacing character on the screen.
 
        o   If  wch  refers to a non-spacing character, all previous characters
            at that location are preserved.  The non-spacing characters of  wch
-           are added to the spacing complex character, and the rendition spec-
-           ified by wch is ignored.
+           are  added  to  the  spacing  complex  character, and the rendition
+           specified by wch is ignored.
 
        o   If the character part of wch is a tab, newline, backspace or  other
            control character, the window is updated and the cursor moves as if
@@ -89,18 +89,18 @@

echo_wchar

        The echo_wchar function is functionally equivalent to a call to add_wch
-       followed by a call to refresh(3x).  Similarly, the wecho_wchar is func-
-       tionally equivalent to a call to wadd_wch followed by a  call  to  wre-
-       fresh.   The  knowledge that only a single character is being output is
-       taken into consideration and, for non-control characters,  a  consider-
-       able  performance  gain  might  be  seen  by using the *echo* functions
-       instead of their equivalents.
+       followed  by  a  call  to  refresh(3x).   Similarly, the wecho_wchar is
+       functionally equivalent to a call to wadd_wch followed  by  a  call  to
+       wrefresh.   The  knowledge that only a single character is being output
+       is  taken  into  consideration  and,  for  non-control  characters,   a
+       considerable  performance  gain  might  be  seen  by  using  the *echo*
+       functions instead of their equivalents.

Line Graphics

        Like addch(3x), addch_wch accepts symbols which make it simple to  draw
-       lines and other frequently used special characters.  These symbols cor-
-       respond to the same VT100 line-drawing set as addch(3x).
+       lines  and  other  frequently  used  special characters.  These symbols
+       correspond to the same VT100 line-drawing set as addch(3x).
 
        ACS               Unicode    ASCII     acsc    Glyph
        Name              Default    Default   char    Name
@@ -227,27 +227,27 @@
        o   NetBSD curses defines the symbols as a wchar_t within a cchar_t.
 
        o   HPUX curses equates some of the ACS_ symbols to the analogous WACS_
-           symbols as if the ACS_ symbols were wide  characters.   The  misde-
-           fined  symbols  are the arrows and other symbols which are not used
-           for line-drawing.
+           symbols  as  if  the  ACS_  symbols  were  wide  characters.    The
+           misdefined  symbols  are the arrows and other symbols which are not
+           used for line-drawing.
 
        X/Open Curses does not define symbols for thick- or double-lines.  SVr4
        curses  implementations  defined their line-drawing symbols in terms of
-       intermediate symbols.  This implementation extends those symbols,  pro-
-       viding new definitions which are not in the SVr4 implementations.
+       intermediate  symbols.   This  implementation  extends  those  symbols,
+       providing new definitions which are not in the SVr4 implementations.
 
        Not  all  Unicode-capable  terminals  provide  support  for VT100-style
-       alternate character sets (i.e., the acsc capability), with their corre-
-       sponding  line-drawing  characters.   X/Open Curses did not address the
-       aspect of integrating Unicode with line-drawing  characters.   Existing
-       implementations  of  Unix curses (AIX, HPUX, Solaris) use only the acsc
-       character-mapping to provide this feature.  As a result,  those  imple-
-       mentations  can  only use single-byte line-drawing characters.  Ncurses
-       5.3 (2002) provided a table of Unicode values to solve these  problems.
-       NetBSD curses incorporated that table in 2010.
-
-       In this implementation, the Unicode values are used instead of the ter-
-       minal description's acsc mapping as discussed in  ncurses(3x)  for  the
+       alternate character  sets  (i.e.,  the  acsc  capability),  with  their
+       corresponding  line-drawing  characters.  X/Open Curses did not address
+       the  aspect  of  integrating  Unicode  with  line-drawing   characters.
+       Existing  implementations  of Unix curses (AIX, HPUX, Solaris) use only
+       the acsc character-mapping to provide this feature.  As a result, those
+       implementations  can  only  use  single-byte  line-drawing  characters.
+       Ncurses 5.3 (2002) provided a table of Unicode values  to  solve  these
+       problems.  NetBSD curses incorporated that table in 2010.
+
+       In  this  implementation,  the  Unicode  values are used instead of the
+       terminal description's acsc mapping as discussed in ncurses(3x) for the
        environment  variable  NCURSES_NO_UTF8_ACS.   In contrast, for the same
        cases, the line-drawing characters described in curs_addch(3x) will use
        only the ASCII default values.
@@ -278,15 +278,15 @@
            terminal, no one can tell what the image represents.  Unicode calls
            it a snowman.
 
-           Others  have suggested these alternatives: S U+00A7 (section mark),
-           O U+0398 (theta), O U+03A6 (phi), d U+03B4 (delta),  U+2327 (x in a
-           rectangle),   U+256C  (forms  double  vertical and horizontal), and
-           U+2612 (ballot box with x).
+           Others have suggested these alternatives: <section> U+00A7 (section
+           mark), <Theta> U+0398 (theta), <Phi> U+03A6 (phi),  <delta>  U+03B4
+           (delta),  U+2327 (x in a rectangle),  U+256C (forms double vertical
+           and horizontal), and  U+2612 (ballot box with x).

SEE ALSO

-       curses(3x), curs_addch(3x), curs_attr(3x), curs_clear(3x), curs_out-
-       opts(3x), curs_refresh(3x), putwc(3)
+       curses(3x), curs_addch(3x), curs_attr(3x), curs_clear(3x),
+       curs_outopts(3x), curs_refresh(3x), putwc(3)
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html
index b9957121..ea650692 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: curs_add_wchstr.3x,v 1.14 2020/10/17 23:11:38 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: curs_add_wchstr.3x,v 1.15 2020/12/19 21:39:06 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@

SEE ALSO

-       curs_addwstr(3x), curses(3x).
+       curses(3x), curs_addwstr(3x).
 
        Comparable  functions in the narrow-character (ncurses) library are de-
        scribed in curs_addchstr(3x).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html
index 89de806d..ba13e2a7 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html
@@ -104,26 +104,27 @@
        Video attributes can be combined with a character  argument  passed  to
        addch  or  related  functions by logical-ORing them into the character.
        (Thus, text, including attributes, can be  copied  from  one  place  to
-       another using inch(3x) and addch.)  See the curs_attr(3x) page for val-
-       ues of predefined video attribute constants that can be usefully  OR'ed
-       into characters.
+       another  using  inch(3x)  and  addch.)   See the curs_attr(3x) page for
+       values of predefined video attribute constants  that  can  be  usefully
+       OR'ed into characters.

Echoing characters

        The  echochar  and wechochar routines are equivalent to a call to addch
        followed by a call to refresh(3x), or a call to waddch  followed  by  a
        call  to wrefresh.  The knowledge that only a single character is being
-       output is used and, for non-control characters, a considerable  perfor-
-       mance gain may be seen by using these routines instead of their equiva-
-       lents.
+       output  is  used  and,  for  non-control  characters,  a   considerable
+       performance  gain  may be seen by using these routines instead of their
+       equivalents.

Line Graphics

        The following variables may be used to add line drawing  characters  to
        the  screen  with  routines of the addch family.  The default character
        listed below is used if the acsc capability does not define a terminal-
-       specific  replacement  for it, or if the terminal and locale configura-
-       tion requires Unicode but the library is unable to use Unicode.
+       specific   replacement   for   it,   or  if  the  terminal  and  locale
+       configuration requires  Unicode  but  the  library  is  unable  to  use
+       Unicode.
 
        The names are taken from VT100 nomenclature.
 
@@ -166,23 +167,23 @@

RETURN VALUE

        All routines return the integer ERR upon failure and OK on success (the
-       SVr4  manuals specify only "an integer value other than ERR") upon suc-
-       cessful completion, unless otherwise noted  in  the  preceding  routine
+       SVr4 manuals specify only "an  integer  value  other  than  ERR")  upon
+       successful  completion, unless otherwise noted in the preceding routine
        descriptions.
 
-       Functions  with  a  "mv"  prefix  first perform a cursor movement using
+       Functions with a "mv" prefix first  perform  a  cursor  movement  using
        wmove, and return an error if the position is outside the window, or if
        the window pointer is null.
 
-       If  it  is  not  possible  to  add  a  complete  character, an error is
+       If it is not  possible  to  add  a  complete  character,  an  error  is
        returned:
 
-       o   If scrollok is not enabled, writing a character at the lower  right
-           margin  succeeds.   However, an error is returned because it is not
+       o   If  scrollok is not enabled, writing a character at the lower right
+           margin succeeds.  However, an error is returned because it  is  not
            possible to wrap to a new line
 
-       o   If an error is detected when converting a multibyte character to  a
-           sequence  of  bytes,  or  if  it  is not possible to add all of the
+       o   If  an error is detected when converting a multibyte character to a
+           sequence of bytes, or if it is not  possible  to  add  all  of  the
            resulting bytes in the window, an error is returned.
 
 
@@ -191,108 +192,108 @@

PORTABILITY

-       All these functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue  4.
-       The  defaults specified for forms-drawing characters apply in the POSIX
+       All  these functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
+       The defaults specified for forms-drawing characters apply in the  POSIX
        locale.

ACS Symbols

        X/Open Curses states that the ACS_ definitions are char constants.  For
-       the  wide-character implementation (see curs_add_wch), there are analo-
-       gous WACS_ definitions which are cchar_t constants.   Some  implementa-
-       tions are problematic:
+       the  wide-character  implementation  (see  curs_add_wch),   there   are
+       analogous   WACS_   definitions  which  are  cchar_t  constants.   Some
+       implementations are problematic:
 
-       o   Some  implementations define the ACS symbols to a constant (such as
+       o   Some implementations define the ACS symbols to a constant (such  as
            Solaris), while others define those to entries in an array.
 
-           This implementation uses an array acs_map, as done in SVr4  curses.
+           This  implementation uses an array acs_map, as done in SVr4 curses.
            NetBSD also uses an array, actually named _acs_char, with a #define
            for compatibility.
 
        o   HPUX curses equates some of the ACS_ symbols to the analogous WACS_
-           symbols  as  if  the ACS_ symbols were wide characters.  The misde-
-           fined symbols are the arrows and other symbols which are  not  used
-           for line-drawing.
+           symbols  as  if  the  ACS_  symbols  were  wide  characters.    The
+           misdefined  symbols  are the arrows and other symbols which are not
+           used for line-drawing.
 
-       o   X/Open  Curses  (issues  2 through 7) has a typographical error for
-           the ACS_LANTERN symbol, equating its "VT100+ Character" to I (capi-
-           tal  I),  while  the  header  files for SVr4 curses and the various
+       o   X/Open Curses (issues 2 through 7) has a  typographical  error  for
+           the  ACS_LANTERN  symbol,  equating  its  "VT100+  Character"  to I
+           (capital I), while the header files for SVr4 curses and the various
            implementations use i (lowercase).
 
-           None of the terminal descriptions on Unix platforms use  uppercase-
-           I,  except for Solaris (i.e., screen's terminal description, appar-
-           ently based on the X/Open documentation around 1995).  On the other
-           hand,  the terminal description gs6300 (AT&T PC6300 with EMOTS Ter-
-           minal Emulator) uses lowercase-i.
-
-       Some ACS  symbols  (ACS_S3,  ACS_S7,  ACS_LEQUAL,  ACS_GEQUAL,  ACS_PI,
-       ACS_NEQUAL,  ACS_STERLING) were not documented in any publicly released
-       System V.  However, many  publicly  available  terminfos  include  acsc
-       strings  in  which  their  key characters (pryz{|}) are embedded, and a
-       second-hand list of their character descriptions  has  come  to  light.
+           None  of the terminal descriptions on Unix platforms use uppercase-
+           I,  except  for  Solaris  (i.e.,  screen's  terminal   description,
+           apparently  based on the X/Open documentation around 1995).  On the
+           other hand, the terminal description gs6300 (AT&T PC6300 with EMOTS
+           Terminal Emulator) uses lowercase-i.
+
+       Some  ACS  symbols  (ACS_S3,  ACS_S7,  ACS_LEQUAL,  ACS_GEQUAL, ACS_PI,
+       ACS_NEQUAL, ACS_STERLING) were not documented in any publicly  released
+       System  V.   However,  many  publicly  available terminfos include acsc
+       strings in which their key characters (pryz{|})  are  embedded,  and  a
+       second-hand  list  of  their  character descriptions has come to light.
        The ACS-prefixed names for them were invented for ncurses(3x).
 
        The displayed values for the ACS_ and WACS_ constants depend on
 
        o   the library configuration, i.e., ncurses versus ncursesw, where the
-           latter is capable of displaying Unicode while the  former  is  not,
+           latter  is  capable  of displaying Unicode while the former is not,
            and
 
        o   whether the locale uses UTF-8 encoding.
 
-       In  certain cases, the terminal is unable to display line-drawing char-
-       acters except by using UTF-8 (see the discussion of NCURSES_NO_UTF8_ACS
-       in ncurses(3x)).
+       In certain cases,  the  terminal  is  unable  to  display  line-drawing
+       characters   except   by   using   UTF-8   (see   the   discussion   of
+       NCURSES_NO_UTF8_ACS in ncurses(3x)).

Character Set

-       X/Open  Curses  assumes  that the parameter passed to waddch contains a
-       single character.  As discussed in curs_attr(3x),  that  character  may
-       have  been  more than eight bits in an SVr3 or SVr4 implementation, but
-       in the X/Open Curses model, the details are not given.   The  important
-       distinction between SVr4 curses and X/Open Curses is that the non-char-
-       acter information (attributes and color) was separated from the charac-
-       ter information which is packed in a chtype to pass to waddch.
-
-       In  this  implementation,  chtype  holds  an  eight-bit character.  But
-       ncurses allows multibyte characters to be passed  in  a  succession  of
-       calls  to  waddch.  The other implementations do not do this; a call to
-       waddch passes exactly one character which may be  rendered  as  one  or
+       X/Open Curses assumes that the parameter passed to  waddch  contains  a
+       single  character.   As  discussed in curs_attr(3x), that character may
+       have been more than eight bits in an SVr3 or SVr4  implementation,  but
+       in  the  X/Open Curses model, the details are not given.  The important
+       distinction between SVr4 curses and X/Open  Curses  is  that  the  non-
+       character  information  (attributes  and  color) was separated from the
+       character information which is packed in a chtype to pass to waddch.
+
+       In this implementation,  chtype  holds  an  eight-bit  character.   But
+       ncurses  allows  multibyte  characters  to be passed in a succession of
+       calls to waddch.  The other implementations do not do this; a  call  to
+       waddch  passes  exactly  one  character which may be rendered as one or
        more cells on the screen depending on whether it is printable.
 
-       Depending  on the locale settings, ncurses will inspect the byte passed
-       in each call to waddch, and check if the latest call  will  continue  a
+       Depending on the locale settings, ncurses will inspect the byte  passed
+       in  each  call  to waddch, and check if the latest call will continue a
        multibyte sequence.  When a character is complete, ncurses displays the
        character and moves to the next position in the screen.
 
-       If the calling application interrupts the  succession  of  bytes  in  a
+       If  the  calling  application  interrupts  the succession of bytes in a
        multibyte character by moving the current location (e.g., using wmove),
        ncurses discards the partially built character, starting over again.
 
-       For portability to other implementations, do not rely upon this  behav-
-       ior:
+       For  portability  to  other  implementations,  do  not  rely  upon this
+       behavior:
 
-       o   check  if  a  character  can be represented as a single byte in the
+       o   check if a character can be represented as a  single  byte  in  the
            current locale before attempting call waddch, and
 
        o   call wadd_wch for characters which cannot be handled by waddch.

TABSIZE

-       The TABSIZE variable is implemented  in  SVr4  and  other  versions  of
-       curses,  but  is  not part of X/Open curses (see curs_variables(3x) for
+       The  TABSIZE  variable  is  implemented  in  SVr4 and other versions of
+       curses, but is not part of X/Open curses  (see  curs_variables(3x)  for
        more details).
 
        If ch is a carriage return, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the
-       current  row of the window.  This is true of other implementations, but
+       current row of the window.  This is true of other implementations,  but
        is not documented.

SEE ALSO

-       curses(3x),  curs_attr(3x),  curs_clear(3x),  curs_inch(3x),  curs_out-
-       opts(3x), curs_refresh(3x), curs_variables(3x), putc(3).
+       curses(3x),      curs_attr(3x),      curs_clear(3x),     curs_inch(3x),
+       curs_outopts(3x), curs_refresh(3x), curs_variables(3x), putc(3).
 
-       Comparable  functions  in  the  wide-character  (ncursesw)  library are
+       Comparable functions  in  the  wide-character  (ncursesw)  library  are
        described in curs_add_wch(3x).
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html
index 886e7aa7..5712a67c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_addchstr.3x.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: curs_addchstr.3x,v 1.21 2020/10/18 00:35:20 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: curs_addchstr.3x,v 1.22 2020/12/19 21:39:20 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@

SEE ALSO

-       curs_addstr(3x), curses(3x).
+       curses(3x), curs_addstr(3x).
 
        Comparable  functions  in the wide-character (ncursesw) library are de-
        scribed in curs_add_wchstr(3x).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html
index 4e9cccc1..95e98e41 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html
@@ -401,8 +401,8 @@
        have  the  enter_italics_mode (sitm) and exit_italics_mode (ritm) capa-
        bilities.  Italics are not mentioned in X/Open Curses.  Unlike the oth-
        er  video attributes, A_ITALIC is unrelated to the set_attributes capa-
-       bilities.  This  implementation  makes  the  assumption  that  exit_at-
-       tribute_mode may also reset italics.
+       bilities.  This implementation makes the  assumption  that  exit_attri-
+       bute_mode may also reset italics.
 
        Each  of  the functions added by XSI Curses has a parameter opts, which
        X/Open Curses still (after more than twenty  years)  documents  as  re-
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html
index e486c8b4..d9719d84 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_beep.3x.html
@@ -59,11 +59,11 @@

DESCRIPTION

        The  beep  and flash routines are used to alert the terminal user.  The
-       routine beep sounds an audible alarm on the terminal, if possible; oth-
-       erwise it flashes the screen (visible bell).  The routine flash flashes
-       the screen, and if that is not possible, sounds the alert.  If  neither
-       alert is possible, nothing happens.  Nearly all terminals have an audi-
-       ble alert (bell or beep), but only some can flash the screen.
+       routine beep sounds an audible alarm  on  the  terminal,  if  possible;
+       otherwise  it  flashes  the  screen  (visible bell).  The routine flash
+       flashes the screen, and if that is not possible, sounds the alert.   If
+       neither  alert is possible, nothing happens.  Nearly all terminals have
+       an audible alert (bell or beep), but only some can flash the screen.

RETURN VALUE

@@ -72,8 +72,8 @@

EXTENSIONS

-       SVr4's beep and flash routines always returned OK, so it was not possi-
-       ble to tell when the beep or flash failed.
+       SVr4's  beep  and  flash  routines  always  returned  OK, so it was not
+       possible to tell when the beep or flash failed.

PORTABILITY

diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html
index c77f4f99..d47f7b5e 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_bkgd.3x.html
@@ -67,8 +67,8 @@

bkgdset

        The bkgdset and wbkgdset routines  manipulate  the  background  of  the
-       named window.  The window background is a chtype consisting of any com-
-       bination  of  attributes  (i.e.,  rendition)  and  a  character.    The
+       named  window.   The  window  background  is a chtype consisting of any
+       combination of attributes  (i.e.,  rendition)  and  a  character.   The
        attribute part of the background is combined (OR'ed) with all non-blank
        characters that are written into the  window  with  waddch.   Both  the
        character  and  attribute parts of the background are combined with the
@@ -99,9 +99,9 @@
 
        This  implementation,  like  SVr4 curses, does not store the background
        and window attribute contributions to each cell separately.  It updates
-       the rendition by comparing the character, non-color attributes and col-
-       ors contained in the background.  For each cell in the window,  whether
-       or not it is blank:
+       the  rendition  by  comparing  the  character, non-color attributes and
+       colors contained in the background.   For  each  cell  in  the  window,
+       whether or not it is blank:
 
        o   The  library  first  compares  the character, and if it matches the
            current character part of the background, it replaces that with the
@@ -109,20 +109,20 @@
 
        o   The  library  then  checks  if the cell uses color, i.e., its color
            pair value is nonzero.  If not, it simply replaces  the  attributes
-           and color pair in the cell with those from the new background char-
-           acter.
+           and  color  pair  in  the  cell  with those from the new background
+           character.
 
        o   If the cell uses color, and that matches the color in  the  current
            background, the library removes attributes which may have come from
            the current background and adds attributes from the new background.
-           It finishes by setting the cell to use the color from the new back-
-           ground.
+           It  finishes  by  setting  the  cell  to use the color from the new
+           background.
 
        o   If the cell uses color, and that does not match the  color  in  the
            current   background,   the  library  updates  only  the  non-color
-           attributes, first removing those which may have come from the  cur-
-           rent  background,  and  then  adding  attributes from the new back-
-           ground.
+           attributes, first removing those  which  may  have  come  from  the
+           current  background,  and  then  adding  attributes  from  the  new
+           background.
 
        If the background's character value is zero, a space is assumed.
 
@@ -138,8 +138,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

        These  functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.  It
-       specifies that bkgd and wbkgd return ERR on failure, but gives no fail-
-       ure conditions.
+       specifies that bkgd and wbkgd return  ERR  on  failure,  but  gives  no
+       failure conditions.
 
        The  routines  bkgd and wbkgd return the integer OK, unless the library
        has not been initialized.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html
index 8ffea8a1..ec8a36e7 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_bkgrnd.3x.html
@@ -73,8 +73,8 @@
        The  attribute part of the background is combined (OR'ed) with all non-
        blank characters that are written into the window  with  waddch.   Both
        the  character  and attribute parts of the background are combined with
-       the blank characters.  The background becomes a property of the charac-
-       ter   and   moves   with   the  character  through  any  scrolling  and
+       the blank  characters.   The  background  becomes  a  property  of  the
+       character  and  moves  with  the  character  through  any scrolling and
        insert/delete line/character operations.
 
        To the extent possible on a particular terminal, the attribute part  of
@@ -84,8 +84,8 @@

bkgrnd

        The bkgrnd and wbkgrnd functions set the  background  property  of  the
-       current  or specified window and then apply this setting to every char-
-       acter position in that window:
+       current  or  specified  window  and  then  apply  this setting to every
+       character position in that window:
 
        o   The rendition of every character on the screen is  changed  to  the
            new background rendition.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html
index aae55777..c672b72a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html
@@ -135,8 +135,8 @@
 
        o   If the parameter passed to waddch is not blank, or it does not  use
            the  special  color  pair 0, curses prefers the color pair from the
-           parameter, if it is nonzero.  Otherwise, it tries  the  window  at-
-           tribute next, and finally the background character.
+           parameter, if it is nonzero.  Otherwise, it tries the window attri-
+           bute next, and finally the background character.
 
        Some  curses  functions such as wprintw call waddch.  Those do not com-
        bine its parameter with a color pair.  Consequently those calls use on-
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html
index 541f0ce4..17698ec5 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_delch.3x.html
@@ -64,15 +64,15 @@
        These routines delete the character under the cursor; all characters to
        the  right  of  the  cursor  on the same line are moved to the left one
        position and the last character on the line is  filled  with  a  blank.
-       The  cursor  position  does not change (after moving to y, x, if speci-
-       fied).  (This does not imply use of the hardware delete character  fea-
-       ture.)
+       The  cursor  position  does  not  change  (after  moving  to  y,  x, if
+       specified).  (This does not imply use of the hardware delete  character
+       feature.)

RETURN VALUE

-       All routines return the integer ERR upon failure and an OK (SVr4 speci-
-       fies only "an integer value other than ERR")  upon  successful  comple-
-       tion.
+       All  routines  return  the  integer  ERR  upon  failure and an OK (SVr4
+       specifies only "an integer  value  other  than  ERR")  upon  successful
+       completion.
 
        Functions  with  a  "mv"  prefix  first perform a cursor movement using
        wmove, and return an error if the position is outside the window, or if
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html
index 15a379a9..59a0f122 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_deleteln.3x.html
@@ -76,14 +76,14 @@
        the cursor), and move the remaining lines up.  The bottom n  lines  are
        cleared.  The current cursor position remains the same.
 
-       The  insertln and winsertln routines insert a blank line above the cur-
-       rent line and the bottom line is lost.
+       The  insertln  and  winsertln  routines  insert  a blank line above the
+       current line and the bottom line is lost.

RETURN VALUE

-       All routines return the integer ERR upon failure and an OK (SVr4 speci-
-       fies  only  "an  integer value other than ERR") upon successful comple-
-       tion.
+       All routines return the integer  ERR  upon  failure  and  an  OK  (SVr4
+       specifies  only  "an  integer  value  other  than ERR") upon successful
+       completion.
 
        X/Open defines no error conditions.  In  this  implementation,  if  the
        window parameter is null, an error is returned.
@@ -100,8 +100,8 @@
 
        These  routines do not require a hardware line delete or insert feature
        in  the  terminal.   In  fact,  they  will  not   use   hardware   line
-       delete/insert  unless idlok(..., TRUE) has been set on the current win-
-       dow.
+       delete/insert  unless  idlok(...,  TRUE)  has  been  set on the current
+       window.

SEE ALSO

diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html
index e8117399..f1645a31 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_extend.3x.html
@@ -69,11 +69,11 @@

use_extended_names

-       The  use_extended_names  function controls whether the calling applica-
-       tion is able to use user-defined or nonstandard names which may be com-
-       piled  into the terminfo description, i.e., via the terminfo or termcap
-       interfaces.  Normally these names are  available  for  use,  since  the
-       essential  decision  is  made  by using the -x option of tic to compile
+       The   use_extended_names   function   controls   whether   the  calling
+       application is able to use user-defined or nonstandard names which  may
+       be  compiled  into  the terminfo description, i.e., via the terminfo or
+       termcap interfaces.  Normally these names are available for use,  since
+       the essential decision is made by using the -x option of tic to compile
        extended terminal definitions.  However you can disable this feature to
        ensure compatibility with other implementations of curses.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html
index adee87eb..6a45e0ac 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_getcchar.3x.html
@@ -73,8 +73,8 @@

getcchar

        The getcchar function gets a wide-character string and rendition from a
-       cchar_t  argument.   When wch is not a null pointer, the getcchar func-
-       tion does the following:
+       cchar_t  argument.   When  wch  is  not  a  null  pointer, the getcchar
+       function does the following:
 
        o   Extracts information from a cchar_t value wcval
 
@@ -123,8 +123,8 @@
 
        o   For  functions which retrieve the color, e.g., getcchar, if opts is
            set it is treated as a pointer to int, and  used  to  retrieve  the
-           color pair as an int value, in addition retrieving it via the stan-
-           dard pointer to short parameter.
+           color  pair  as  an  int  value,  in addition retrieving it via the
+           standard pointer to short parameter.

NOTES

@@ -134,8 +134,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       When wch is a null pointer, getcchar returns the number of wide charac-
-       ters referenced by wcval, including one for a trailing null.
+       When wch is a  null  pointer,  getcchar  returns  the  number  of  wide
+       characters referenced by wcval, including one for a trailing null.
 
        When  wch  is  not  a null pointer, getcchar returns OK upon successful
        completion, and ERR otherwise.
@@ -180,8 +180,8 @@
        of  spacing and non-spacing characters (CCHARW_MAX).  That was probably
        due to a misreading of the  AIX 4  header  files,  because  the  X/Open
        Curses  document  was  not generally available at that time.  Later (in
-       2002), this detail was overlooked when beginning to implement the func-
-       tions using the structure.
+       2002), this detail was  overlooked  when  beginning  to  implement  the
+       functions using the structure.
 
        In  practice, even four non-spacing characters may seem enough.  X/Open
        Curses documents possible uses for  non-spacing  characters,  including
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html
index 3515adbf..b4e6c5cd 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: curs_getch.3x,v 1.56 2020/10/17 23:18:32 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: curs_getch.3x,v 1.57 2020/12/19 21:38:20 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -375,8 +375,8 @@

SEE ALSO

-       curses(3x),    curs_inopts(3x),    curs_outopts(3x),    curs_mouse(3x),
-       curs_move(3x), curs_refresh(3x), curs_variables(3x), resizeterm(3x).
+       curses(3x), curs_inopts(3x), curs_mouse(3x),  curs_move(3x),  curs_out-
+       opts(3x), curs_refresh(3x), curs_variables(3x), resizeterm(3x).
 
        Comparable  functions  in the wide-character (ncursesw) library are de-
        scribed in curs_get_wch(3x).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html
index 7f098479..7543eb2f 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_getyx.3x.html
@@ -64,12 +64,12 @@
        The getyx macro places the current cursor position of the given  window
        in the two integer variables y and x.
 
-       If  win is a subwindow, the getparyx macro places the beginning coordi-
-       nates of the subwindow relative to the parent window into  two  integer
-       variables y and x.  Otherwise, -1 is placed into y and x.
+       If  win  is  a  subwindow,  the  getparyx  macro  places  the beginning
+       coordinates of the subwindow relative to the  parent  window  into  two
+       integer variables y and x.  Otherwise, -1 is placed into y and x.
 
-       Like  getyx,  the getbegyx and getmaxyx macros store the current begin-
-       ning coordinates and size of the specified window.
+       Like  getyx,  the  getbegyx  and  getmaxyx  macros  store  the  current
+       beginning coordinates and size of the specified window.

RETURN VALUE

@@ -90,17 +90,18 @@
        getcury, getmaxx, getmaxy, getparx and getpary for  compatibility  with
        older versions of curses.
 
-       Although X/Open Curses does not address this, many implementations pro-
-       vide members of the WINDOW structure containing values corresponding to
-       these  macros.   For best portability, do not rely on using the data in
-       WINDOW, since some implementations make WINDOW  opaque  (do  not  allow
+       Although  X/Open  Curses  does  not  address this, many implementations
+       provide members of the WINDOW structure containing values corresponding
+       to  these  macros.  For best portability, do not rely on using the data
+       in WINDOW, since some implementations make WINDOW opaque (do not  allow
        direct use of its members).
 
        Besides the problem of opaque structures, the data stored in like-named
        members may not have like-values  in  different  implementations.   For
        example,  the  WINDOW._maxx and WINDOW._maxy values in ncurses have (at
-       least since release 1.8.1) differed by one from some other  implementa-
-       tions.  The difference is hidden by means of the macro getmaxyx.
+       least  since  release  1.8.1)  differed  by   one   from   some   other
+       implementations.   The  difference  is  hidden  by  means  of the macro
+       getmaxyx.

SEE ALSO

diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html
index 353bf908..7fed34ba 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_in_wch.3x.html
@@ -69,8 +69,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

        No errors are defined in the XSI Curses standard.  This  implementation
-       checks  for null pointers, returns ERR in that case.  Also, the mv rou-
-       tines check for error moving the cursor, returning ERR  in  that  case.
+       checks  for  null  pointers,  returns  ERR  in that case.  Also, the mv
+       routines check for error moving the cursor, returning ERR in that case.
        Otherwise they return OK.
 
        Functions  with  a  "mv"  prefix  first perform a cursor movement using
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html
index 6b37318c..a3382dfd 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_inch.3x.html
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@

DESCRIPTION

        These routines return the character, of type  chtype,  at  the  current
-       position in the named window.  If any attributes are set for that posi-
-       tion, their values  are  OR'ed  into  the  value  returned.   Constants
+       position  in  the  named  window.   If  any attributes are set for that
+       position, their values are OR'ed into the  value  returned.   Constants
        defined  in <curses.h> can be used with the & (logical AND) operator to
        extract the character or attributes alone.
 
@@ -115,8 +115,8 @@
        X/Open Curses does not specify the size and layout of attributes, color
        and character values in chtype; it is  implementation-dependent.   This
        implementation  uses 8 bits for character values.  An application using
-       more bits, e.g., a Unicode value, should use the wide-character equiva-
-       lents to these functions.
+       more bits,  e.g.,  a  Unicode  value,  should  use  the  wide-character
+       equivalents to these functions.

SEE ALSO

@@ -124,8 +124,8 @@
             gives an overview of the WINDOW and chtype data types.
 
        curs_attr(3x)
-            goes  into more detail, pointing out portability problems and con-
-            straints on the use of chtype for returning window information.
+            goes  into  more  detail,  pointing  out  portability problems and
+            constraints on the use of chtype for returning window information.
 
        curs_in_wch(3x)
             describes comparable functions for the  wide-character  (ncursesw)
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html
index 238b418b..c727aa71 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_insch.3x.html
@@ -72,8 +72,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

        All routines that return an integer return  ERR  upon  failure  and  OK
        (SVr4 specifies only "an integer value other than ERR") upon successful
-       completion, unless otherwise noted in the  preceding  routine  descrip-
-       tions.
+       completion,  unless  otherwise   noted   in   the   preceding   routine
+       descriptions.
 
        Functions  with  a  "mv"  prefix  first perform a cursor movement using
        wmove, and return an error if the position is outside the window, or if
@@ -81,8 +81,8 @@

NOTES

-       These  routines do not necessarily imply use of a hardware insert char-
-       acter feature.
+       These  routines  do  not  necessarily  imply  use  of a hardware insert
+       character feature.
 
        Note that insch, mvinsch, and mvwinsch may be macros.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html
index 285bfa4b..7d4815a6 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_insstr.3x.html
@@ -79,8 +79,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

        All routines that return an integer return  ERR  upon  failure  and  OK
        (SVr4 specifies only "an integer value other than ERR") upon successful
-       completion, unless otherwise noted in the  preceding  routine  descrip-
-       tions.
+       completion,  unless  otherwise   noted   in   the   preceding   routine
+       descriptions.
 
        X/Open  defines  no  error  conditions.  In this implementation, if the
        window parameter is null or the str parameter  is  null,  an  error  is
@@ -99,10 +99,10 @@
        These  functions  are  described  in  the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4,
        which adds const qualifiers to the arguments.
 
-       The Single Unix Specification, Version 2 states that insnstr  and  win-
-       snstr perform wrapping.  This is probably an error, since it makes this
-       group of functions inconsistent.  Also,  no  implementation  of  curses
-       documents this inconsistency.
+       The Single Unix  Specification,  Version  2  states  that  insnstr  and
+       winsnstr  perform  wrapping.  This is probably an error, since it makes
+       this group of  functions  inconsistent.   Also,  no  implementation  of
+       curses documents this inconsistency.

SEE ALSO

diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html
index f223394a..cd6e7278 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_instr.3x.html
@@ -69,13 +69,13 @@
        These routines return a string of characters in str, extracted starting
        at  the  current  cursor  position in the named window.  Attributes are
        stripped from the characters.  The four functions with n  as  the  last
-       argument  return  a leading substring at most n characters long (exclu-
-       sive of the trailing NUL).
+       argument   return  a  leading  substring  at  most  n  characters  long
+       (exclusive of the trailing NUL).

RETURN VALUE

-       All of the functions return ERR upon failure, or the number of  charac-
-       ters actually read into the string.
+       All of the  functions  return  ERR  upon  failure,  or  the  number  of
+       characters actually read into the string.
 
        X/Open Curses defines no error conditions.  In this implementation:
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html
index 3560c6bc..3110967a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_inwstr.3x.html
@@ -69,22 +69,22 @@
        These routines return a string of  wchar_t  wide  characters  in  wstr,
        extracted starting at the current cursor position in the named window.
 
-       The  four  functions  with n as the last argument return a leading sub-
-       string at most n characters  long  (exclusive  of  the  trailing  NUL).
+       The  four  functions  with  n  as  the  last  argument return a leading
+       substring at most n characters long (exclusive of  the  trailing  NUL).
        Transfer  stops  at  the  end of the current line, or when n characters
        have been stored at the location referenced by wstr.
 
-       If the size n is not large enough to store a complete  complex  charac-
-       ter, an error is generated.
+       If the size  n  is  not  large  enough  to  store  a  complete  complex
+       character, an error is generated.

NOTES

        All routines except winnwstr may be macros.
 
-       Each cell in the window holds a complex character (i.e., base- and com-
-       bining-characters) together with attributes and color.  These functions
-       store  only  the  wide  characters, ignoring attributes and color.  Use
-       in_wchstr to return the complex characters from a window.
+       Each  cell  in  the  window  holds a complex character (i.e., base- and
+       combining-characters)  together  with  attributes  and  color.    These
+       functions  store  only  the  wide  characters,  ignoring attributes and
+       color.  Use in_wchstr to return the complex characters from a window.

RETURN VALUE

diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html
index d3fadc3a..c52be23b 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_legacy.3x.html
@@ -69,8 +69,8 @@

DESCRIPTION

-       These  legacy functions are simpler to use than the X/Open Curses func-
-       tions:
+       These  legacy  functions  are  simpler  to  use  than the X/Open Curses
+       functions:
 
        o   The getattrs function returns the same attribute data as wattr_get.
 
@@ -95,8 +95,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       Except  as noted, these functions return an integer, or ERR if the win-
-       dow parameter is null.
+       Except  as  noted,  these  functions  return  an integer, or ERR if the
+       window parameter is null.

NOTES

@@ -109,12 +109,13 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  functions were supported on Version 7, BSD or System V implemen-
-       tations.  None of those implementations checked the window parameter.
+       These   functions  were  supported  on  Version  7,  BSD  or  System  V
+       implementations.  None of  those  implementations  checked  the  window
+       parameter.
 
-       The getattrs function and macro are defined to return a (signed)  inte-
-       ger  for  compatibility with those implementations although an unsigned
-       type would have been more appropriate.
+       The  getattrs  function  and  macro  are  defined  to return a (signed)
+       integer  for  compatibility  with  those  implementations  although  an
+       unsigned type would have been more appropriate.

SEE ALSO

diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html
index 40e5084f..8550173f 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html
@@ -64,15 +64,15 @@
        printer  or  to  know  how  much buffering it has.  Your application is
        responsible for keeping the rate of writes to  the  printer  below  its
        continuous  throughput  rate  (typically  about half of its nominal cps
-       rating).  Dot-matrix printers and 6-page-per-minute  lasers  can  typi-
-       cally  handle  80cps,  so a good conservative rule of thumb is to sleep
-       for a second after shipping each 80-character line.
+       rating).   Dot-matrix  printers  and   6-page-per-minute   lasers   can
+       typically  handle  80cps,  so  a  good conservative rule of thumb is to
+       sleep for a second after shipping each 80-character line.

RETURN VALUE

        The mcprint function returns ERR if the  write  operation  aborted  for
-       some  reason.  In this case, errno will contain either an error associ-
-       ated with write(2) or one of the following:
+       some  reason.   In  this  case,  errno  will  contain  either  an error
+       associated with write(2) or one of the following:
 
        ENODEV
             Capabilities for printer redirection do not exist.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_scanw.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_scanw.3x.html
index b5997bcf..91b68292 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_scanw.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_scanw.3x.html
@@ -93,12 +93,12 @@

HISTORY

        While  scanw  was implemented in 4BSD, none of the BSD releases used it
        until 4.4BSD (in a game).  That early version of curses was before  the
-       ANSI  C  standard.   It did not use <varargs.h>, though that was avail-
-       able.  In 1991 (a couple of years after SVr4 was  generally  available,
-       and  after  the C standard was published), other developers updated the
-       library, using <stdarg.h> internally in 4.4BSD curses.  Even with  this
-       improvement,  BSD  curses  did  not  use  function  prototypes (or even
-       declare functions) in the <curses.h> header until 1992.
+       ANSI  C  standard.   It  did  not  use  <varargs.h>,  though  that  was
+       available.  In 1991  (a  couple  of  years  after  SVr4  was  generally
+       available,  and  after  the C standard was published), other developers
+       updated the library, using  <stdarg.h>  internally  in  4.4BSD  curses.
+       Even  with this improvement, BSD curses did not use function prototypes
+       (or even declare functions) in the <curses.h> header until 1992.
 
        SVr2 documented scanw, wscanw tersely as  "scanf  through  stdscr"  and
        tersely as "scanf through win", respectively.
@@ -144,16 +144,16 @@
            is  probably  an  editing error which was introduced in XSI, rather
            than being done intentionally.
 
-       o   This implementation returns the number of items scanned,  for  com-
-           patibility  with  SVr4  curses.   As  of  2018,  NetBSD curses also
+       o   This implementation  returns  the  number  of  items  scanned,  for
+           compatibility  with  SVr4  curses.   As of 2018, NetBSD curses also
            returns the number of  items  scanned.   Both  ncurses  and  NetBSD
            curses call vsscanf to scan the string, which returns EOF on error.
 
        o   Portable  applications should only test if the return value is ERR,
            since the OK value (zero) is likely to be misleading.
 
-           One possible way to get useful results would be to use a "%n"  con-
-           version  at  the  end of the format string to ensure that something
+           One possible way to get useful results  would  be  to  use  a  "%n"
+           conversion at the end of the format string to ensure that something
            was processed.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html
index 81805d29..1ca91e23 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_termattrs.3x.html
@@ -79,8 +79,8 @@

erasechar, erasewchar

        The erasechar routine returns the user's current erase character.
 
-       The  erasewchar routine stores the current erase character in the loca-
-       tion referenced by ch.  If no erase character  has  been  defined,  the
+       The  erasewchar  routine  stores  the  current  erase  character in the
+       location referenced by ch.  If no erase character has been defined, the
        routine fails and the location referenced by ch is not changed.
 
 
@@ -113,12 +113,13 @@

termattrs, term_attrs

-       If a given terminal does not support a video attribute that an applica-
-       tion program is trying to use, curses may substitute a different  video
-       attribute for it.  The termattrs and term_attrs functions return a log-
-       ical OR of all video attributes supported by the terminal using A_  and
-       WA_  constants  respectively.  This information is useful when a curses
-       program needs complete control over the appearance of the screen.
+       If  a  given  terminal  does  not  support  a  video  attribute that an
+       application program is trying to use, curses may substitute a different
+       video  attribute for it.  The termattrs and term_attrs functions return
+       a logical OR of all video attributes supported by the terminal using A_
+       and  WA_  constants  respectively.   This  information is useful when a
+       curses program needs  complete  control  over  the  appearance  of  the
+       screen.

termname

@@ -128,9 +129,9 @@

RETURN VALUE

        longname and termname return NULL on error.
 
-       Routines that return an integer return ERR upon failure  and  OK  (SVr4
-       only  specifies "an integer value other than ERR") upon successful com-
-       pletion.
+       Routines  that  return  an integer return ERR upon failure and OK (SVr4
+       only specifies "an integer  value  other  than  ERR")  upon  successful
+       completion.

NOTES

@@ -139,7 +140,7 @@

PORTABILITY

        The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions.  It changes
-       the  return type of termattrs to the new type attr_t.  Most versions of
+       the return type of termattrs to the new type attr_t.  Most versions  of
        curses truncate the result returned by termname to 14 characters.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html
index a1d532c4..4e3ca5a7 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.46 2020/11/07 23:39:47 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.47 2020/12/19 21:47:36 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@

SEE ALSO

-       curses(3x), terminfo(5), term_variables(3x), putc(3).
+       curses(3x), putc(3), term_variables(3x), terminfo(5).
 
        https://invisible-island.net/ncurses/tctest.html
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html b/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html
index 934f5cbf..d2a83a05 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.59 2020/10/24 09:15:57 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.60 2020/12/19 22:44:46 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -351,9 +351,9 @@

SEE ALSO

-       legacy_coding(3x),   curses(3x),   curs_initscr(3x),   curs_inopts(3x),
-       curs_kernel(3x),   curs_scr_dump(3x),   curs_sp_funcs(3x),   curs_vari-
-       ables(3x), legacy_coding(3x).
+       curses(3x),   curs_initscr(3x),    curs_inopts(3x),    curs_kernel(3x),
+       curs_scr_dump(3x),  curs_sp_funcs(3x),  curs_variables(3x), legacy_cod-
+       ing(3x).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html b/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html
index 5e3749b4..bb525b37 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/default_colors.3x.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
   * Author: Thomas E. Dickey 1997,1999,2000,2005
-  * @Id: default_colors.3x,v 1.30 2020/10/24 09:52:16 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: default_colors.3x,v 1.31 2020/12/19 21:38:37 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@

NAME

-       use_default_colors, assume_default_colors - use terminal's default col-
-       ors
+       use_default_colors,  assume_default_colors  -  use  terminal's  default
+       colors

SYNOPSIS

@@ -60,11 +60,11 @@

DESCRIPTION

-       The use_default_colors and assume_default_colors functions  are  exten-
-       sions to the curses library.  They are used with terminals that support
-       ISO 6429 color, or equivalent.  These terminals allow  the  application
-       to  reset  color  to an unspecified default value (e.g., with SGR 39 or
-       SGR 49).
+       The  use_default_colors   and   assume_default_colors   functions   are
+       extensions  to  the  curses library.  They are used with terminals that
+       support ISO 6429 color,  or  equivalent.   These  terminals  allow  the
+       application  to reset color to an unspecified default value (e.g., with
+       SGR 39 or SGR 49).
 
        Applications that paint a colored background over the whole  screen  do
        not  take  advantage  of  SGR  39  and  SGR  49.  Some applications are
@@ -72,8 +72,8 @@
        text.  For example, there are several implementations of the ls program
        which use colors to denote different file types or permissions.   These
        "color  ls"  programs  do  not necessarily modify the background color,
-       typically using only the setaf terminfo capability  to  set  the  fore-
-       ground  color.   Full-screen  applications  that use default colors can
+       typically  using  only  the  setaf  terminfo  capability  to  set   the
+       foreground color.  Full-screen applications that use default colors can
        achieve similar visual effects.
 
        The first function, use_default_colors  tells  the  curses  library  to
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@
        default  background and init_pair(x,-1,COLOR_BLUE) will initialize pair
        x as default foreground on blue.
 
-       The other, assume_default_colors is a refinement which tells which col-
-       ors  to  paint  for  color  pair 0.  This function recognizes a special
+       The other, assume_default_colors is  a  refinement  which  tells  which
+       colors  to  paint for color pair 0.  This function recognizes a special
        color number -1, which denotes the default terminal color.
 
        The following are equivalent:
@@ -91,8 +91,8 @@
               assume_default_colors(-1,-1);
 
        These are ncurses extensions.  For other curses implementations,  color
-       number -1 does not mean anything, just as for ncurses before a success-
-       ful call of use_default_colors or assume_default_colors.
+       number  -1  does  not  mean  anything,  just  as  for  ncurses before a
+       successful call of use_default_colors or assume_default_colors.
 
        Other curses implementations do not  allow  an  application  to  modify
        color  pair  0.  They assume that the background is COLOR_BLACK, but do
@@ -121,16 +121,16 @@
        ls" programs.  Attempting to manage the background color of the  screen
        for this application would give unsatisfactory results for a variety of
        reasons.  This extension was devised after noting that color xterm (and
-       similar  programs) provides a background color which does not necessar-
-       ily correspond to any of the ANSI colors.   While  a  special  terminfo
-       entry  could  be  constructed using nine colors, there was no mechanism
-       provided within  curses  to  account  for  the  related  orig_pair  and
-       back_color_erase capabilities.
+       similar   programs)   provides   a  background  color  which  does  not
+       necessarily correspond to any of the  ANSI  colors.   While  a  special
+       terminfo  entry  could  be  constructed using nine colors, there was no
+       mechanism provided within curses to account for the  related  orig_pair
+       and back_color_erase capabilities.
 
-       The assume_default_colors function was added to solve a different prob-
-       lem: support for applications which would use environment variables and
-       other  configuration to bypass curses' notion of the terminal's default
-       colors, setting specific values.
+       The  assume_default_colors  function  was  added  to  solve a different
+       problem: support for applications which would use environment variables
+       and  other  configuration  to  bypass  curses' notion of the terminal's
+       default colors, setting specific values.

PORTABILITY

@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

SEE ALSO

-       curs_color(3x), ded(1).
+       ded(1), curs_color(3x).

AUTHOR

diff --git a/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html b/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html
index 73332600..a0f81a55 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/define_key.3x.html
@@ -69,10 +69,10 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       The keycode must be greater than zero, and the string non-null,  other-
-       wise  ERR  is  returned.  ERR may also be returned if there is insuffi-
-       cient memory to allocate the data to store the definition.  If no error
-       is detected, OK is returned.
+       The keycode must  be  greater  than  zero,  and  the  string  non-null,
+       otherwise  ERR  is  returned.   ERR  may  also  be returned if there is
+       insufficient memory to allocate the data to store the  definition.   If
+       no error is detected, OK is returned.

PORTABILITY

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form.3x.html
index 320b4d73..8549b333 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form.3x.html
@@ -59,8 +59,8 @@
        The form library provides terminal-independent facilities for composing
        form screens on character-cell terminals.  The library includes:  field
        routines, which create and modify form fields; and form routines, which
-       group fields into forms, display forms on the screen, and handle inter-
-       action with the user.
+       group fields into forms,  display  forms  on  the  screen,  and  handle
+       interaction with the user.
 
        The  form  library uses the curses libraries.  To use the form library,
        link with the options -lform -lcurses.
@@ -170,9 +170,9 @@

RETURN VALUE

        Routines  that  return  pointers return NULL on error, and set errno to
-       the corresponding error-code returned by functions returning  an  inte-
-       ger.  Routines that return an integer return one of the following error
-       codes:
+       the  corresponding  error-code  returned  by  functions  returning   an
+       integer.   Routines  that return an integer return one of the following
+       error codes:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
 
@@ -220,8 +220,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The menu facility was documented in SVr4.2 in Character User  Interface
        Programming (UNIX SVR4.2).
@@ -248,7 +248,7 @@
        curses(3x) and related pages whose names  begin  "form_"  for  detailed
        descriptions of the entry points.
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html
index d5e13cf6..622ab149 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_cursor.3x.html
@@ -89,8 +89,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html
index 72157880..c43be785 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_data.3x.html
@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html
index c2c1aa3f..38e9603c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: form_driver.3x,v 1.34 2020/10/17 23:28:04 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: form_driver.3x,v 1.35 2020/12/19 21:34:15 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -68,19 +68,19 @@
            and character codes returned by wgetch(3x).
 
        o   The input is a printable character.   Printable  characters  (which
-           must  be positive, less than 256) are checked according to the pro-
-           gram's locale settings.
+           must  be  positive,  less  than  256)  are checked according to the
+           program's locale settings.
 
        o   The input is the KEY_MOUSE special key  associated  with  an  mouse
            event.

form_driver_w

-       This extension simplifies the use of the forms library using wide char-
-       acters.  The input is either a key code (a request) or a wide character
-       returned  by  get_wch(3x).   The type must be passed as well, to enable
-       the library to determine whether the parameter is a wide character or a
-       request.
+       This  extension  simplifies  the  use  of  the forms library using wide
+       characters.  The input is either a key  code  (a  request)  or  a  wide
+       character returned by get_wch(3x).  The type must be passed as well, to
+       enable the library  to  determine  whether  the  parameter  is  a  wide
+       character or a request.

Form-driver requests

@@ -210,8 +210,8 @@
               that field and E_UNKNOWN_COMMAND is returned.  This return value
               makes sense, because a double click usually means that an field-
               specific action should be returned.  It is exactly  the  purpose
-              of this return value to signal that an application specific com-
-              mand should be executed.
+              of  this  return  value  to  signal that an application specific
+              command should be executed.
 
           o   If a translation into a request was  done,  form_driver  returns
               the result of this request.
@@ -259,8 +259,8 @@

SEE ALSO

-       curses(3x), form(3x), form_field_buffer(3x), form_field_validation(3x),
-       form_fieldtype(3x), form_variables(3x), getch(3x).
+       curses(3x),   form(3x),   form_fieldtype(3x),    form_field_buffer(3x),
+       form_field_validation(3x), form_variables(3x), getch(3x).

NOTES

@@ -269,8 +269,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html
index 20afff82..40ac7f27 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field.3x.html
@@ -68,8 +68,8 @@
 
        The function field_count returns the count of fields in form.
 
-       The function move_field moves the given field (which  must  be  discon-
-       nected) to a specified location on the screen.
+       The  function  move_field  moves  the  given  field  (which   must   be
+       disconnected) to a specified location on the screen.

RETURN VALUE

@@ -78,8 +78,8 @@
 
        The function field_count returns ERR if the form parameter is NULL.
 
-       The functions set_form_fields and move_field return one of the  follow-
-       ing codes on error:
+       The  functions  set_form_fields  and  move_field  return  one  of   the
+       following codes on error:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
 
@@ -106,8 +106,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The  SVr4  forms  library documentation specifies the field_count error
        value as -1 (which is the value of ERR).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html
index 589c965d..6239181d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_attributes.3x.html
@@ -67,8 +67,8 @@

DESCRIPTION

        The  function  set_field_fore  sets  the foreground attribute of field.
        This is the highlight used to display the field contents.  The function
-       field_fore  returns  the foreground attribute.  The default is A_STAND-
-       OUT.
+       field_fore   returns   the   foreground   attribute.   The  default  is
+       A_STANDOUT.
 
        The function set_field_back sets the background attribute of form. This
        is  the  highlight  used to display the extent fields in the form.  The
@@ -103,8 +103,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html
index de56787b..31fb08b9 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_buffer.3x.html
@@ -70,8 +70,8 @@
           o   Buffer 0 is the displayed value of the field.
 
           o   Other numbered buffers may be allocated by applications  through
-              the nbuf argument of (see form_field_new(3x)) but are not manip-
-              ulated by the forms library.
+              the  nbuf  argument  of  (see  form_field_new(3x))  but  are not
+              manipulated by the forms library.
 
        The function field_buffer returns a pointer  to  the  contents  of  the
        given numbered buffer:
@@ -105,8 +105,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       The field_buffer function returns NULL on error.  It sets errno accord-
-       ing to their success:
+       The field_buffer  function  returns  NULL  on  error.   It  sets  errno
+       according to their success:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
 
@@ -135,14 +135,14 @@
        The header file <form.h> automatically includes the header file
 
        When configured for wide characters, field_buffer returns a pointer  to
-       temporary  storage  (allocated and freed by the library).  The applica-
-       tion should not attempt to modify the data.  It will be  freed  on  the
-       next call to field_buffer to return the same buffer.  <curses.h>.
+       temporary   storage   (allocated   and  freed  by  the  library).   The
+       application should not attempt to modify the data.  It will be freed on
+       the next call to field_buffer to return the same buffer.  <curses.h>.

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The  set_max_field   function   checks   for   an   ncurses   extension
        O_INPUT_FIELD  which  allows a dynamic field to shrink if the new limit
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html
index 41cabe8c..f967ff71 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_info.3x.html
@@ -98,8 +98,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        A null (zero pointer) is accepted for any  of  the  return  values,  to
        ignore  that  value.  Not all implementations allow this, e.g., Solaris
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html
index ffd27b11..036da6db 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_just.3x.html
@@ -66,8 +66,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       The  function  field_just  returns  one  of:   NO_JUSTIFICATION,   JUS-
-       TIFY_RIGHT, JUSTIFY_LEFT, or JUSTIFY_CENTER.
+       The   function   field_just   returns   one    of:    NO_JUSTIFICATION,
+       JUSTIFY_RIGHT, JUSTIFY_LEFT, or JUSTIFY_CENTER.
 
        The function set_field_just returns one of the following:
 
@@ -91,8 +91,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html
index dc73d3bd..7f4a0e4f 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_new.3x.html
@@ -114,8 +114,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        It  may be unwise to count on the set of attributes copied by dup_field
        being portable; the System V  forms  library  documents  are  not  very
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html
index 1f4882db..a0470050 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_opts.3x.html
@@ -122,12 +122,12 @@
             discarded.
 
        O_EDGE_INSERT_STAY
-            When inserting into a field up to the boundary  position,  option-
-            ally  delay  the  scrolling,  so  that the last inserted character
-            remains visible, but advance the cursor to reflect the  insertion.
-            This  allows the form library to display the inserted character in
-            one-character fields as well as allowing the library  to  maintain
-            consistent state.
+            When  inserting  into  a  field  up  to  the  boundary   position,
+            optionally   delay  the  scrolling,  so  that  the  last  inserted
+            character remains visible, but advance the cursor to  reflect  the
+            insertion.   This  allows the form library to display the inserted
+            character in one-character fields as well as allowing the  library
+            to maintain consistent state.
 
        O_INPUT_FIELD
             The set_max_field function checks for this extension, which allows
@@ -160,8 +160,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html
index 989cfa33..2c32b99e 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_userptr.3x.html
@@ -60,8 +60,8 @@

DESCRIPTION

-       Every form field has a field that can be used to hold  application-spe-
-       cific  data  (that  is,  the  form-driver code leaves it alone).  These
+       Every form field has a field that can  be  used  to  hold  application-
+       specific  data  (that is, the form-driver code leaves it alone).  These
        functions get and set that field.
 
 
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The user pointer is a void pointer.  We chose not to leave it as a char
        pointer for SVr4 compatibility.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html
index 759878a2..695b2ed3 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_field_validation.3x.html
@@ -128,26 +128,26 @@
             lives in automatic variables on the stack.
 
        TYPE_INTEGER
-            Integer data, parsable to an integer by atoi(3).  Required parame-
-            ters:
+            Integer  data,  parsable  to  an  integer  by  atoi(3).   Required
+            parameters:
 
             o   a third int argument controlling the precision,
 
             o   a fourth long argument constraining minimum value,
 
             o   a fifth long constraining maximum value.  If the maximum value
-                is  less than or equal to the minimum value, the range is sim-
-                ply ignored.
+                is  less  than  or  equal  to  the minimum value, the range is
+                simply ignored.
 
             On return, the field buffer is formatted according to  the  printf
-            format specification ".*ld", where the "*" is replaced by the pre-
-            cision argument.
+            format  specification  ".*ld",  where  the  "*" is replaced by the
+            precision argument.
 
             For details of the precision handling see printf(3).
 
        TYPE_NUMERIC
-            Numeric data (may have a decimal-point  part).   Required  parame-
-            ters:
+            Numeric  data  (may  have   a   decimal-point   part).    Required
+            parameters:
 
             o   a third int argument controlling the precision,
 
@@ -159,8 +159,8 @@
                 or equal to the minimum value, the range is simply ignored.
 
             On return, the field buffer is formatted according to  the  printf
-            format  specification ".*f", where the "*" is replaced by the pre-
-            cision argument.
+            format  specification  ".*f",  where  the  "*"  is replaced by the
+            precision argument.
 
             For details of the precision handling see printf(3).
 
@@ -195,8 +195,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       The functions field_type and field_arg return NULL on error.  The func-
-       tion set_field_type returns one of the following:
+       The  functions  field_type  and  field_arg  return  NULL on error.  The
+       function set_field_type returns one of the following:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
 
@@ -214,8 +214,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html
index d4a65cc6..c236a268 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_fieldtype.3x.html
@@ -80,11 +80,13 @@
        validation.  Its parameters are function pointers:
 
        field_check
-            This function checks the validity of an entered data string  when-
-            ever the user attempts to leave a field.  It has two arguments:
+            This function checks  the  validity  of  an  entered  data  string
+            whenever  the  user  attempts  to  leave  a  field.   It  has  two
+            arguments:
 
-            o   The  (FIELD  *) argument is passed in so the validation predi-
-                cate can see the field's buffer, sizes and other attributes.
+            o   The  (FIELD  *)  argument  is  passed  in  so  the  validation
+                predicate   can  see  the  field's  buffer,  sizes  and  other
+                attributes.
 
             o   The second argument  is  an  argument-block  structure,  about
                 which more below.
@@ -96,8 +98,8 @@

free_fieldtype

-       The free_fieldtype function frees the space allocated for a given vali-
-       dation type by new_fieldtype.
+       The  free_fieldtype  function  frees  the  space  allocated for a given
+       validation type by new_fieldtype.

set_fieldtype_arg

@@ -128,9 +130,9 @@
        the forms user with a way to move through the set.
 
        The  set_fieldtype_choice  function  allows forms programmers to define
-       successor and predecessor functions for the field  type.   These  func-
-       tions  take  the field pointer and an argument-block structure as argu-
-       ments.
+       successor  and  predecessor  functions  for  the  field  type.    These
+       functions  take  the  field  pointer and an argument-block structure as
+       arguments.

link_fieldtype

@@ -177,8 +179,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html
index ba593cb0..28284c7a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_hook.3x.html
@@ -111,8 +111,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html
index 714b20ae..10d4bb02 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_new.3x.html
@@ -102,8 +102,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html
index 16b1b3e2..c1a84063 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_new_page.3x.html
@@ -88,8 +88,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html
index 8789e882..e30a321a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_opts.3x.html
@@ -104,8 +104,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html
index f38aa72d..3c67fccc 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_page.3x.html
@@ -114,8 +114,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The unfocus_current_field function is an ncurses extension.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html
index 9709d408..f42e72cf 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@

NAME

-       post_form,  unpost_form  - write or erase forms from associated subwin-
-       dows
+       post_form,   unpost_form   -  write  or  erase  forms  from  associated
+       subwindows

SYNOPSIS

@@ -105,8 +105,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html
index 1ca5a39c..b8c23062 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_requestname.3x.html
@@ -73,8 +73,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       form_request_name  returns  NULL on error and sets errno to E_BAD_ARGU-
-       MENT.
+       form_request_name   returns   NULL   on   error   and   sets  errno  to
+       E_BAD_ARGUMENT.
 
        form_request_by_name returns E_NO_MATCH on  error.   It  does  not  set
        errno.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html
index e6b6f5ec..91b07352 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_userptr.3x.html
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the System  V  forms  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The user pointer is a void pointer.  We chose not to leave it as a char
        pointer for SVr4 compatibility.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html b/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html
index 0adea8e7..9b18e3d2 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/form_win.3x.html
@@ -65,20 +65,20 @@

DESCRIPTION

        Every  form  has an associated pair of curses windows.  The form window
-       displays any title and border associated with the window; the form sub-
-       window  displays the items of the form that are currently available for
-       selection.
+       displays any title and border associated  with  the  window;  the  form
+       subwindow  displays  the items of the form that are currently available
+       for selection.
 
-       The first four functions get and set those windows.  It is  not  neces-
-       sary  to set either window; by default, the driver code uses stdscr for
-       both.
+       The first four  functions  get  and  set  those  windows.   It  is  not
+       necessary to set either window; by default, the driver code uses stdscr
+       for both.
 
        In the set_ functions, window argument of NULL is treated as though  it
        were stsdcr.  A form argument of NULL is treated as a request to change
        the system default form window or subwindow.
 
-       The function scale_form returns the minimum size required for the  sub-
-       window of form.
+       The function scale_form returns  the  minimum  size  required  for  the
+       subwindow of form.

RETURN VALUE

@@ -110,8 +110,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines emulate the System V forms library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  forms library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html b/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html
index a1934e35..dd53d551 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html
@@ -59,9 +59,9 @@

DESCRIPTION

-       infocmp  can be used to compare a binary terminfo entry with other ter-
-       minfo entries, rewrite a terminfo description to take advantage of  the
-       use=  terminfo  field,  or  print  out  a terminfo description from the
+       infocmp  can  be  used  to  compare  a binary terminfo entry with other
+       terminfo entries, rewrite a terminfo description to take  advantage  of
+       the  use=  terminfo field, or print out a terminfo description from the
        binary file (term) in a variety of formats.  In all cases, the  boolean
        fields  will be printed first, followed by the numeric fields, followed
        by the string fields.
@@ -77,8 +77,8 @@
        infocmp  compares  the  terminfo  description  of  the  first  terminal
        termname  with  each  of  the descriptions given by the entries for the
        other terminal's termnames.  If a capability is defined for only one of
-       the  terminals,  the value returned depends on the type of the capabil-
-       ity:
+       the   terminals,  the  value  returned  depends  on  the  type  of  the
+       capability:
 
        o   F for missing boolean variables
 
@@ -96,12 +96,12 @@
 
        -c   produces a list of each capability that is common between  two  or
             more entries.  Missing capabilities are ignored.  Each item in the
-            list shows "=" after the capability name, followed by the capabil-
-            ity value.
+            list  shows  "="  after  the  capability  name,  followed  by  the
+            capability value.
 
-            The  -u option provides a related output, showing the first termi-
-            nal description rewritten to use the second as  a  building  block
-            via the "use=" clause.
+            The  -u  option  provides  a  related  output,  showing  the first
+            terminal description rewritten to use the  second  as  a  building
+            block via the "use=" clause.
 
        -n   produces  a  list  of each capability that is in none of the given
             entries.  Each item in the list shows "!"  before  the  capability
@@ -116,8 +116,8 @@

Source Listing Options [-I] [-L] [-C] [-r]

-       The -I, -L, and -C options will produce a source listing for each  ter-
-       minal named.
+       The -I, -L, and -C options will  produce  a  source  listing  for  each
+       terminal named.
 
             -I   use the terminfo names
             -L   use the long C variable name listed in <term.h>
@@ -143,27 +143,27 @@
        excess whitespace (use the -0 option for that).
 
        All padding information for strings  will  be  collected  together  and
-       placed at the beginning of the string where termcap expects it.  Manda-
-       tory padding (padding information with  a  trailing  "/")  will  become
+       placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  string  where  termcap expects it.
+       Mandatory padding (padding information with a trailing "/") will become
        optional.
 
        All  termcap  variables  no longer supported by terminfo, but which are
-       derivable from other terminfo variables, will be output.  Not all  ter-
-       minfo  capabilities will be translated; only those variables which were
-       part of termcap will normally be output.  Specifying the -r option will
-       take  off  this  restriction, allowing all capabilities to be output in
-       termcap form.  Normally you would use both the -C and -r options.   The
-       actual  format  used incorporates some improvements for escaped charac-
-       ters from terminfo format.  For a stricter BSD-compatible  translation,
-       use the -K option rather than -C.
-
-       Note that because padding is collected to the beginning of the capabil-
-       ity, not all capabilities are output.  Mandatory padding  is  not  sup-
-       ported.   Because termcap strings are not as flexible, it is not always
-       possible to convert a terminfo string  capability  into  an  equivalent
-       termcap  format.  A subsequent conversion of the termcap file back into
-       terminfo format will not necessarily reproduce  the  original  terminfo
-       source.
+       derivable from other terminfo  variables,  will  be  output.   Not  all
+       terminfo  capabilities  will  be translated; only those variables which
+       were part of termcap will normally be output.  Specifying the -r option
+       will  take off this restriction, allowing all capabilities to be output
+       in termcap form.  Normally you would use both the -C  and  -r  options.
+       The  actual  format  used  incorporates  some  improvements for escaped
+       characters  from  terminfo  format.   For  a  stricter   BSD-compatible
+       translation, use the -K option rather than -C.
+
+       Note  that  because  padding  is  collected  to  the  beginning  of the
+       capability, not all capabilities are output.  Mandatory padding is  not
+       supported.   Because  termcap  strings  are  not as flexible, it is not
+       always possible  to  convert  a  terminfo  string  capability  into  an
+       equivalent termcap format.  A subsequent conversion of the termcap file
+       back into terminfo format will not necessarily reproduce  the  original
+       terminfo source.
 
        Some  common  terminfo  parameter sequences, their termcap equivalents,
        and some terminal types which commonly have such sequences, are:
@@ -179,10 +179,10 @@

Use= Option [-u]

-       The -u option produces a terminfo source description of the first  ter-
-       minal  termname  which is relative to the sum of the descriptions given
-       by the entries for the other terminals termnames.  It does this by ana-
-       lyzing  the  differences  between  the  first  termname  and  the other
+       The -u option produces a  terminfo  source  description  of  the  first
+       terminal  termname  which  is  relative  to the sum of the descriptions
+       given by the entries for the other terminals termnames.  It  does  this
+       by  analyzing  the differences between the first termname and the other
        termnames and producing a description with use= fields  for  the  other
        terminals.  In this manner, it is possible to retrofit generic terminfo
        entries into a terminal's description.  Or, if  two  similar  terminals
@@ -197,9 +197,9 @@
        the  first of the other termname entries that has this capability gives
        a different value for the capability than that in the first termname.
 
-       The order of the other termname entries is significant.  Since the ter-
-       minfo compiler tic does a left-to-right scan of the capabilities, spec-
-       ifying two use= entries that contain differing  entries  for  the  same
+       The order of the other termname  entries  is  significant.   Since  the
+       terminfo  compiler  tic  does a left-to-right scan of the capabilities,
+       specifying two use= entries that contain differing entries for the same
        capabilities will produce different results depending on the order that
        the entries are given in.  infocmp will flag any  such  inconsistencies
        between the other termname entries as they are found.
@@ -216,10 +216,10 @@
        were not needed.
 
    Changing Databases [-A directory] [-B directory]
-       Like other ncurses utilities, infocmp looks for the  terminal  descrip-
-       tions  in  several  places.  You can use the TERMINFO and TERMINFO_DIRS
-       environment variables to  override  the  compiled-in  default  list  of
-       places to search (see curses(3x) for details).
+       Like  other  ncurses  utilities,  infocmp  looks   for   the   terminal
+       descriptions   in  several  places.   You  can  use  the  TERMINFO  and
+       TERMINFO_DIRS environment variables to override the compiled-in default
+       list of places to search (see curses(3x) for details).
 
        You  can  also use the options -A and -B to override the list of places
        to search when comparing terminal descriptions:
@@ -228,8 +228,8 @@
 
        o   The -B option sets the location for the other termnames.
 
-       Using these options, it is possible to compare descriptions for a  ter-
-       minal  with  the  same  name  located  in two different databases.  For
+       Using these options, it is  possible  to  compare  descriptions  for  a
+       terminal  with  the  same name located in two different databases.  For
        instance, you can use this feature for comparing descriptions  for  the
        same terminal created by different people.
 
@@ -249,54 +249,55 @@
             and exit.
 
        -E   Dump the capabilities of the given terminal as tables,  needed  in
-            the  C initializer for a TERMTYPE structure (the terminal capabil-
-            ity structure in the <term.h>).  This option is useful for prepar-
-            ing  versions of the curses library hardwired for a given terminal
-            type.  The tables are all declared static, and are named according
-            to the type and the name of the corresponding terminal entry.
-
-            Before  ncurses  5.0,  the split between the -e and -E options was
-            not needed; but support for extended  names  required  making  the
-            arrays  of terminal capabilities separate from the TERMTYPE struc-
-            ture.
+            the   C   initializer  for  a  TERMTYPE  structure  (the  terminal
+            capability structure in the <term.h>).  This option is useful  for
+            preparing  versions  of  the  curses library hardwired for a given
+            terminal type.  The tables are all declared static, and are  named
+            according  to  the type and the name of the corresponding terminal
+            entry.
+
+            Before ncurses 5.0, the split between the -e and  -E  options  was
+            not  needed;  but  support  for extended names required making the
+            arrays  of  terminal  capabilities  separate  from  the   TERMTYPE
+            structure.
 
        -e   Dump the capabilities of the given terminal as a C initializer for
-            a  TERMTYPE  structure  (the  terminal capability structure in the
-            <term.h>).  This option is useful for preparing  versions  of  the
+            a TERMTYPE structure (the terminal  capability  structure  in  the
+            <term.h>).   This  option  is useful for preparing versions of the
             curses library hardwired for a given terminal type.
 
        -F   compare terminfo files.  This assumes that two following arguments
-            are filenames.   The  files  are  searched  for  pairwise  matches
-            between  entries,  with  two entries considered to match if any of
-            their names do.  The  report  printed  to  standard  output  lists
-            entries  with  no matches in the other file, and entries with more
-            than one match.  For entries with exactly one match it includes  a
-            difference  report.  Normally, to reduce the volume of the report,
-            use references are not resolved before  looking  for  differences,
+            are  filenames.   The  files  are  searched  for  pairwise matches
+            between entries, with two entries considered to match  if  any  of
+            their  names  do.   The  report  printed  to standard output lists
+            entries with no matches in the other file, and entries  with  more
+            than  one match.  For entries with exactly one match it includes a
+            difference report.  Normally, to reduce the volume of the  report,
+            use  references  are  not resolved before looking for differences,
             but resolution can be forced by also specifying -r.
 
-       -f   Display  complex terminfo strings which contain if/then/else/endif
+       -f   Display complex terminfo strings which contain  if/then/else/endif
             expressions indented for readability.
 
-       -G   Display constant literals in decimal form rather than their  char-
-            acter equivalents.
+       -G   Display  constant  literals  in  decimal  form  rather  than their
+            character equivalents.
 
-       -g   Display  constant  character  literals  in quoted form rather than
+       -g   Display constant character literals in  quoted  form  rather  than
             their decimal equivalents.
 
-       -i   Analyze the initialization (is1, is2, is3), and reset  (rs1,  rs2,
-            rs3),  strings  in  the  entry,  as  well as those used for start-
-            ing/stopping cursor-positioning mode (smcup,  rmcup)  as  well  as
-            starting/stopping keymap mode (smkx, rmkx).
+       -i   Analyze  the  initialization (is1, is2, is3), and reset (rs1, rs2,
+            rs3),  strings  in  the  entry,  as  well  as   those   used   for
+            starting/stopping  cursor-positioning  mode (smcup, rmcup) as well
+            as starting/stopping keymap mode (smkx, rmkx).
 
-            For  each  string,  the  code  tries to analyze it into actions in
-            terms of the other capabilities in the  entry,  certain  X3.64/ISO
+            For each string, the code tries to  analyze  it  into  actions  in
+            terms  of  the  other capabilities in the entry, certain X3.64/ISO
             6429/ECMA-48 capabilities, and certain DEC VT-series private modes
-            (the set of recognized special sequences  has  been  selected  for
-            completeness  over  the  existing terminfo database).  Each report
-            line consists of the capability name,  followed  by  a  colon  and
-            space,  followed by a printable expansion of the capability string
-            with  sections  matching  recognized   actions   translated   into
+            (the  set  of  recognized  special sequences has been selected for
+            completeness over the existing terminfo  database).   Each  report
+            line  consists  of  the  capability  name, followed by a colon and
+            space, followed by a printable expansion of the capability  string
+            with   sections   matching   recognized  actions  translated  into
             {}-bracketed descriptions.
 
             Here is a list of the DEC/ANSI special sequences recognized:
@@ -312,8 +313,8 @@
                          DECSTR        soft reset (VT320)
                          S7C1T         7-bit controls (VT220)
                          -----------------------------------------
-                         ISO DEC G0    enable DEC graphics for G0
 
+                         ISO DEC G0    enable DEC graphics for G0
                          ISO UK G0     enable UK chars for G0
                          ISO US G0     enable US chars for G0
                          ISO DEC G1    enable DEC graphics for G1
@@ -338,25 +339,25 @@
                          DEC[+-]AWM    wraparound mode
                          DEC[+-]ARM    auto-repeat mode
 
-            It   also  recognizes  a  SGR  action  corresponding  to  ANSI/ISO
-            6429/ECMA Set Graphics Rendition, with the  values  NORMAL,  BOLD,
-            UNDERLINE,  BLINK,  and  REVERSE.   All but NORMAL may be prefixed
+            It  also  recognizes  a  SGR  action  corresponding  to   ANSI/ISO
+            6429/ECMA  Set  Graphics  Rendition, with the values NORMAL, BOLD,
+            UNDERLINE, BLINK, and REVERSE.  All but  NORMAL  may  be  prefixed
             with
 
             o   "+" (turn on) or
 
             o   "-" (turn off).
 
-            An SGR0 designates an  empty  highlight  sequence  (equivalent  to
+            An  SGR0  designates  an  empty  highlight sequence (equivalent to
             {SGR:NORMAL}).
 
        -l   Set output format to terminfo.
 
        -p   Ignore padding specifications when comparing strings.
 
-       -Q n Rather  than show source in terminfo (text) format, print the com-
-            piled (binary) format in hexadecimal or base64 form, depending  on
-            the option's value:
+       -Q n Rather than show source  in  terminfo  (text)  format,  print  the
+            compiled  (binary) format in hexadecimal or base64 form, depending
+            on the option's value:
 
                1  hexadecimal
 
@@ -364,46 +365,46 @@
 
                3  hexadecimal and base64
 
-            For  example,  this prints the compiled terminfo value as a string
+            For example, this prints the compiled terminfo value as  a  string
             which could be assigned to the TERMINFO environment variable:
 
                 infocmp -0 -q -Q2
 
        -q   This makes the output a little shorter:
 
-            o   Make the comparison listing shorter by  omitting  subheadings,
+            o   Make  the  comparison listing shorter by omitting subheadings,
                 and using "-" for absent capabilities, "@" for canceled rather
                 than "NULL".
 
-            o   However, show differences between absent and  cancelled  capa-
-                bilities.
+            o   However,   show   differences  between  absent  and  cancelled
+                capabilities.
 
             o   Omit the "Reconstructed from" comment for source listings.
 
        -Rsubset
-            Restrict  output  to  a given subset.  This option is for use with
-            archaic versions of terminfo like those on SVr1, Ultrix, or  HP/UX
-            that  do not support the full set of SVR4/XSI Curses terminfo; and
-            variants such as AIX that have their own  extensions  incompatible
+            Restrict output to a given subset.  This option is  for  use  with
+            archaic  versions of terminfo like those on SVr1, Ultrix, or HP/UX
+            that do not support the full set of SVR4/XSI Curses terminfo;  and
+            variants  such  as AIX that have their own extensions incompatible
             with SVr4/XSI.
 
-            o   Available  terminfo  subsets  are  "SVr1", "Ultrix", "HP", and
+            o   Available terminfo subsets are  "SVr1",  "Ultrix",  "HP",  and
                 "AIX"; see terminfo(5) for details.
 
-            o   You can also choose the subset "BSD" which selects only  capa-
-                bilities  with  termcap equivalents recognized by 4.4BSD.  The
-                -C option sets the "BSD" subset as a side-effect.
+            o   You  can  also  choose  the  subset  "BSD"  which selects only
+                capabilities with termcap equivalents  recognized  by  4.4BSD.
+                The -C option sets the "BSD" subset as a side-effect.
 
-            o   If you select any other value for -R, it is  the  same  as  no
-                subset,  i.e., all capabilities are used.  The -I option like-
-                wise selects no subset as a side-effect.
+            o   If  you  select  any  other value for -R, it is the same as no
+                subset, i.e.,  all  capabilities  are  used.   The  -I  option
+                likewise selects no subset as a side-effect.
 
        -s [d|i|l|c]
-            The -s option sorts the fields within each type according  to  the
+            The  -s  option sorts the fields within each type according to the
             argument below:
 
-            d    leave  fields  in  the order that they are stored in the ter-
-                 minfo database.
+            d    leave fields in  the  order  that  they  are  stored  in  the
+                 terminfo database.
 
             i    sort by terminfo name.
 
@@ -411,92 +412,92 @@
 
             c    sort by the termcap name.
 
-            If the -s option is not given, the  fields  printed  out  will  be
-            sorted  alphabetically  by  the  terminfo  name  within each type,
-            except in the case of the -C or the -L options,  which  cause  the
-            sorting  to  be  done  by  the termcap name or the long C variable
+            If  the  -s  option  is  not given, the fields printed out will be
+            sorted alphabetically by  the  terminfo  name  within  each  type,
+            except  in  the  case of the -C or the -L options, which cause the
+            sorting to be done by the termcap name  or  the  long  C  variable
             name, respectively.
 
-       -T   eliminates size-restrictions  on  the  generated  text.   This  is
+       -T   eliminates  size-restrictions  on  the  generated  text.   This is
             mainly  useful  for  testing  and  analysis,  since  the  compiled
-            descriptions are limited (e.g., 1023 for termcap,  4096  for  ter-
-            minfo).
+            descriptions  are  limited  (e.g.,  1023  for  termcap,  4096  for
+            terminfo).
 
-       -t   tells  tic  to  discard commented-out capabilities.  Normally when
-            translating from terminfo to termcap, untranslatable  capabilities
+       -t   tells tic to discard commented-out  capabilities.   Normally  when
+            translating  from terminfo to termcap, untranslatable capabilities
             are commented-out.
 
-       -U   tells  infocmp  to  not  post-process  the  data after parsing the
-            source file.  This feature helps when comparing  the  actual  con-
-            tents  of  two source files, since it excludes the inferences that
-            infocmp makes to fill in missing data.
+       -U   tells infocmp to not  post-process  the  data  after  parsing  the
+            source  file.   This  feature  helps  when  comparing  the  actual
+            contents of two source files, since  it  excludes  the  inferences
+            that infocmp makes to fill in missing data.
 
        -V   reports the version of ncurses which was used in this program, and
             exits.
 
-       -v n prints  out  tracing  information on standard error as the program
+       -v n prints out tracing information on standard error  as  the  program
             runs.
 
-            The optional parameter n is a number  from  1  to  10,  inclusive,
+            The  optional  parameter  n  is  a number from 1 to 10, inclusive,
             indicating the desired level of detail of information.  If ncurses
-            is built  without  tracing  support,  the  optional  parameter  is
+            is  built  without  tracing  support,  the  optional  parameter is
             ignored.
 
-       -W   By  itself,  the  -w  option  will  not  force  long strings to be
+       -W   By itself, the -w  option  will  not  force  long  strings  to  be
             wrapped.  Use the -W option to do this.
 
        -w width
             changes the output to width characters.
 
        -x   print information for user-defined capabilities (see user_caps(5).
-            These  are  extensions  to  the  terminfo  repertoire which can be
+            These are extensions to  the  terminfo  repertoire  which  can  be
             loaded using the -x option of tic.

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo
-                           Compiled terminal description database.
+       /usr/share/terminfo Compiled terminal description database.

HISTORY

-       Although System V Release 2 provided a terminfo library, it had no doc-
-       umented  tool  for  decompiling the terminal descriptions.  Tony Hansen
+       Although  System  V  Release  2  provided a terminfo library, it had no
+       documented tool for decompiling the terminal descriptions.  Tony Hansen
        (AT&T) wrote the first infocmp in early 1984, for System V Release 3.
 
-       Eric Raymond used the AT&T documentation in 1995 to provide an  equiva-
-       lent  infocmp  for  ncurses.   In addition, he added a few new features
-       such as:
+       Eric  Raymond  used  the  AT&T  documentation  in  1995  to  provide an
+       equivalent infocmp for ncurses.   In  addition,  he  added  a  few  new
+       features such as:
 
-       o   the -e option, to support fallback (compiled-in) terminal  descrip-
-           tions
+       o   the   -e   option,   to  support  fallback  (compiled-in)  terminal
+           descriptions
 
        o   the -i option, to help with analysis
 
-       Later,  Thomas  Dickey added the -x (user-defined capabilities) option,
-       and the -E option to support fallback entries with  user-defined  capa-
-       bilities.
+       Later, Thomas Dickey added the -x (user-defined  capabilities)  option,
+       and  the  -E  option  to  support  fallback  entries  with user-defined
+       capabilities.
 
        For a complete list, see the EXTENSIONS section.
 
-       In  2010,  Roy  Marples  provided an infocmp program for NetBSD.  It is
-       less capable than the SVr4 or ncurses  versions  (e.g.,  it  lacks  the
-       sorting  options  documented in X/Open), but does include the -x option
+       In 2010, Roy Marples provided an infocmp program  for  NetBSD.   It  is
+       less  capable  than  the  SVr4  or ncurses versions (e.g., it lacks the
+       sorting options documented in X/Open), but does include the  -x  option
        adapted from ncurses.

PORTABILITY

-       X/Open Curses, Issue 7 (2009) provides a description  of  infocmp.   It
+       X/Open  Curses,  Issue  7 (2009) provides a description of infocmp.  It
        does not mention the options used for converting to termcap format.

EXTENSIONS

-       The  -0, -1, -E, -F, -G, -Q, -R, -T, -V, -a, -e, -f, -g, -i, -l, -p, -q
+       The -0, -1, -E, -F, -G, -Q, -R, -T, -V, -a, -e, -f, -g, -i, -l, -p,  -q
        and -t options are not supported in SVr4 curses.
 
-       SVr4 infocmp does not distinguish between absent and cancelled capabil-
-       ities.  Also, it shows missing integer capabilities as -1 (the internal
-       value used to represent missing integers).  This  implementation  shows
-       those as "NULL", for consistency with missing strings.
+       SVr4   infocmp  does  not  distinguish  between  absent  and  cancelled
+       capabilities.  Also, it shows missing integer capabilities as  -1  (the
+       internal   value   used   to   represent   missing   integers).    This
+       implementation shows those as  "NULL",  for  consistency  with  missing
+       strings.
 
        The  -r  option's  notion of "termcap" capabilities is System V Release
        4's.  Actual BSD curses versions will have a more restricted  set.   To
@@ -508,12 +509,12 @@

SEE ALSO

-       captoinfo(1m),   infotocap(1m),   tic(1m),  toe(1m),  curses(3x),  ter-
-       minfo(5).  user_caps(5).
+       captoinfo(1m),    infotocap(1m),    tic(1m),    toe(1m),    curses(3x),
+       terminfo(5).  user_caps(5).
 
        https://invisible-island.net/ncurses/tctest.html
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).

AUTHOR

diff --git a/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html b/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html
index d67f6489..4c0bd602 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: infotocap.1m,v 1.16 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: infotocap.1m,v 1.17 2020/12/19 21:49:52 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -75,8 +75,7 @@

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo
-                           Compiled terminal description database.
+       /usr/share/terminfo Compiled terminal description database.

NOTES

@@ -90,9 +89,9 @@

SEE ALSO

-       curses(3x), tic(1m), infocmp(1m), terminfo(5)
+       infocmp(1m), tic(1m), curses(3x), terminfo(5)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).

AUTHOR

diff --git a/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html b/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html
index 942e3a7b..55137622 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/keybound.3x.html
@@ -67,8 +67,8 @@
        The keycode parameter must be greater than zero, else NULL is returned.
        If it does not correspond to a defined key, then NULL is returned.  The
        count  parameter  is  used  to allow the application to iterate through
-       multiple definitions, counting from zero.  When successful,  the  func-
-       tion returns a string which must be freed by the caller.
+       multiple  definitions,  counting  from  zero.   When  successful,   the
+       function returns a string which must be freed by the caller.

PORTABILITY

diff --git a/doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html b/doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html
index d3469715..a7f3026a 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/legacy_coding.3x.html
@@ -66,8 +66,8 @@
 
        The level parameter controls the result:
 
-              0    the library functions normally, rendering nonprinting char-
-                   acters as described in unctrl.
+              0    the   library  functions  normally,  rendering  nonprinting
+                   characters as described in unctrl.
 
               1    the  library  ignores  isprintf  for  codes  in  the  range
                    160-255.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html
index 97bfb8f9..606e42fd 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html
@@ -59,24 +59,25 @@
        The menu library provides terminal-independent facilities for composing
        menu systems on character-cell terminals.  The library  includes:  item
        routines,  which create and modify menu items; and menu routines, which
-       group items into menus, display menus on the screen, and handle  inter-
-       action with the user.
+       group items into  menus,  display  menus  on  the  screen,  and  handle
+       interaction with the user.
 
        The menu library uses the curses libraries, and a curses initialization
-       routine such as initscr must be called before using any of these  func-
-       tions.  To use the menu library, link with the options -lmenu -lcurses.
+       routine such as initscr must  be  called  before  using  any  of  these
+       functions.   To  use  the  menu  library,  link with the options -lmenu
+       -lcurses.

Current Default Values for Item Attributes

-       The  menu  library  maintains a default value for item attributes.  You
-       can get or set this default by calling the  appropriate  get_  or  set_
-       routine  with  a  NULL item pointer.  Changing this default with a set_
-       function affects future item creations, but does not change the render-
-       ing of items already created.
+       The menu library maintains a default value for  item  attributes.   You
+       can  get  or  set  this default by calling the appropriate get_ or set_
+       routine with a NULL item pointer.  Changing this default  with  a  set_
+       function  affects  future  item  creations,  but  does  not  change the
+       rendering of items already created.

Routine Name Index

-       The  following table lists each menu routine and the name of the manual
+       The following table lists each menu routine and the name of the  manual
        page on which it is described.
 
        curses Routine Name    Manual Page Name
@@ -111,8 +112,8 @@
        menu_pattern           menu_pattern(3x)
        menu_request_by_name   menu_requestname(3x)
        menu_request_name      menu_requestname(3x)
-       menu_spacing           menu_spacing(3x)
 
+       menu_spacing           menu_spacing(3x)
        menu_sub               menu_win(3x)
        menu_term              menu_hook(3x)
        menu_userptr           menu_userptr(3x)
@@ -149,7 +150,7 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       Routines that return pointers return  NULL  on  error.   Routines  that
+       Routines  that  return  pointers  return  NULL on error.  Routines that
        return an integer return one of the following error codes:
 
        E_OK The routine succeeded.
@@ -189,19 +190,19 @@

NOTES

-       The  header  file  <menu.h>  automatically  includes  the  header files
+       The header  file  <menu.h>  automatically  includes  the  header  files
        <curses.h> and <eti.h>.
 
        In your library list, libmenu.a should be before libncurses.a; that is,
-       you  should  say  "-lmenu  -lncurses",  not the other way around (which
+       you should say "-lmenu -lncurses", not  the  other  way  around  (which
        would give a link-error when using static libraries).

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
-       The  menu facility was documented in SVr4.2 in Character User Interface
+       The menu facility was documented in SVr4.2 in Character User  Interface
        Programming (UNIX SVR4.2).
 
        It is not part of X/Open Curses.
@@ -214,15 +215,15 @@

AUTHORS

-       Juergen Pfeifer.  Manual pages and adaptation for ncurses  by  Eric  S.
+       Juergen  Pfeifer.   Manual  pages and adaptation for ncurses by Eric S.
        Raymond.

SEE ALSO

-       curses(3x)  and  related  pages  whose names begin "menu_" for detailed
+       curses(3x) and related pages whose names  begin  "menu_"  for  detailed
        descriptions of the entry points.
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html
index 42589c50..ec9db2ed 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_attributes.3x.html
@@ -49,8 +49,8 @@

NAME

        menu_back,     menu_fore,     menu_grey,    menu_pad,    set_menu_back,
-       set_menu_fore, set_menu_grey, set_menu_pad - color and  attribute  con-
-       trol for menus
+       set_menu_fore,  set_menu_grey,  set_menu_pad  -  color  and   attribute
+       control for menus

SYNOPSIS

@@ -112,8 +112,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html
index d181aed8..0957a9ad 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_cursor.3x.html
@@ -58,10 +58,10 @@

DESCRIPTION

-       The  function  pos_menu_cursor restores the cursor to the current posi-
-       tion associated with the menu's selected item.  This  is  useful  after
-       curses routines have been called to do screen-painting in response to a
-       menu select.
+       The  function  pos_menu_cursor  restores  the  cursor  to  the  current
+       position associated with the menu's  selected  item.   This  is  useful
+       after  curses  routines  have  been  called  to  do  screen-painting in
+       response to a menu select.

RETURN VALUE

@@ -89,8 +89,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html
index 84813650..8a3b3482 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.27 2020/10/17 23:42:13 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.28 2020/12/19 21:33:37 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -65,8 +65,8 @@
            and character codes returned by wgetch(3x).
 
        o   The input is a printable character.   Printable  characters  (which
-           must  be positive, less than 256) are checked according to the pro-
-           gram's locale settings.
+           must  be  positive,  less  than  256)  are checked according to the
+           program's locale settings.
 
        o   The input is the KEY_MOUSE special key  associated  with  an  mouse
            event.
@@ -174,10 +174,10 @@

APPLICATION-DEFINED COMMANDS

        If the second argument is neither printable nor one of the  above  pre-
-       defined menu requests or KEY_MOUSE, the drive assumes it is an applica-
-       tion-specific  command  and  returns  E_UNKNOWN_COMMAND.   Application-
-       defined commands should be defined relative to MAX_COMMAND, the maximum
-       value of these pre-defined requests.
+       defined  menu  requests  or  KEY_MOUSE,  the  drive  assumes  it  is an
+       application-specific    command    and    returns    E_UNKNOWN_COMMAND.
+       Application-defined commands should be defined relative to MAX_COMMAND,
+       the maximum value of these pre-defined requests.

RETURN VALUE

@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@

SEE ALSO

-       curses(3x), menu(3x), getch(3x).
+       curses(3x), getch(3x), menu(3x).

NOTES

@@ -217,9 +217,9 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.  The support for mouse  events  is
-       ncurses specific.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.  The support for  mouse  events
+       is ncurses specific.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html
index 184d0860..bafbee3d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_format.3x.html
@@ -61,9 +61,9 @@

DESCRIPTION

        The function set_menu_format sets the maximum display size of the given
        menu.  If this size is too small to display all menu  items,  the  menu
-       will be made scrollable.  If this size is larger than the menus subwin-
-       dow and the subwindow is too small to display all menu items, post_menu
-       will fail.
+       will  be  made  scrollable.   If  this  size  is  larger than the menus
+       subwindow and the subwindow is too small to  display  all  menu  items,
+       post_menu will fail.
 
        The  default format is 16 rows, 1 column.  Calling set_menu_format with
        a null menu pointer will change this default.  A  zero  row  or  column
@@ -102,8 +102,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html
index a894320b..3ece9611 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_hook.3x.html
@@ -113,8 +113,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html
index c3a70e98..1b010521 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_items.3x.html
@@ -104,8 +104,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The SVr4 menu library  documentation  specifies  the  item_count  error
        value as -1 (which is the value of ERR).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html
index 51d59d8d..bc9b0df0 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_mark.3x.html
@@ -100,8 +100,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html
index 7d5901bf..165764ab 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_new.3x.html
@@ -100,8 +100,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html
index 4dd172a6..125d70fd 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_opts.3x.html
@@ -96,9 +96,10 @@
             other end of the menu.
 
        O_MOUSE_MENU
-            If user clicks with the mouse and it does not  fall  on  the  cur-
-            rently active menu, push KEY_MOUSE and the MEVENT data back on the
-            queue to allow processing in another part of the calling program.
+            If user clicks with  the  mouse  and  it  does  not  fall  on  the
+            currently  active menu, push KEY_MOUSE and the MEVENT data back on
+            the queue to allow processing  in  another  part  of  the  calling
+            program.

RETURN VALUE

@@ -123,8 +124,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html
index fd67efa9..401ad4ae 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_pattern.3x.html
@@ -104,8 +104,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html
index 4321967b..5b5598c9 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@

NAME

-       post_menu,  unpost_menu  - write or erase menus from associated subwin-
-       dows
+       post_menu,   unpost_menu   -  write  or  erase  menus  from  associated
+       subwindows

SYNOPSIS

@@ -107,8 +107,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html
index f6e35be9..518955d7 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_requestname.3x.html
@@ -68,8 +68,8 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       menu_request_name  returns  NULL on error and sets errno to E_BAD_ARGU-
-       MENT.
+       menu_request_name   returns   NULL   on   error   and   sets  errno  to
+       E_BAD_ARGUMENT.
        menu_request_by_name returns E_NO_MATCH on  error.   It  does  not  set
        errno.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html
index df9c562b..aff22830 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_spacing.3x.html
@@ -74,8 +74,8 @@
        spc_rows  parameter  controls  the  number of rows that are used for an
        item.  It must not be larger than 3.  The menu system inserts the blank
        lines  between item rows, these lines will contain the pad character in
-       the appropriate positions.  The spc_columns parameter controls the num-
-       ber  of  blanks  between  columns of items.  It must not be larger than
+       the appropriate positions.   The  spc_columns  parameter  controls  the
+       number  of blanks between columns of items.  It must not be larger than
        TABSIZE.  A value of 0 for all the spacing values resets  them  to  the
        default, which is 1 for all of them.
        The  function  menu_spacing  passes back the spacing info for the menu.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html
index 1de814c5..bcd22a2f 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_userptr.3x.html
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The user pointer is a void pointer.  We chose not to leave it as a char
        pointer for SVr4 compatibility.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html b/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html
index b76b41d5..2ad5ada4 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/menu_win.3x.html
@@ -65,20 +65,20 @@

DESCRIPTION

        Every  menu  has an associated pair of curses windows.  The menu window
-       displays any title and border associated with the window; the menu sub-
-       window  displays the items of the menu that are currently available for
-       selection.
+       displays any title and border associated  with  the  window;  the  menu
+       subwindow  displays  the items of the menu that are currently available
+       for selection.
 
-       The first four functions get and set those windows.  It is  not  neces-
-       sary  to set either window; by default, the driver code uses stdscr for
-       both.
+       The first four  functions  get  and  set  those  windows.   It  is  not
+       necessary to set either window; by default, the driver code uses stdscr
+       for both.
 
        In the set_ functions, window argument of NULL is treated as though  it
        were stsdcr.  A menu argument of NULL is treated as a request to change
        the system default menu window or subwindow.
 
-       The function scale_menu returns the minimum size required for the  sub-
-       window of menu.
+       The function scale_menu returns  the  minimum  size  required  for  the
+       subwindow of menu.

RETURN VALUE

@@ -110,8 +110,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html
index 1fc955f2..016b6609 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_current.3x.html
@@ -112,8 +112,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The  SVr4  menu  library  documentation  specifies  the   top_row   and
        index_item error value as -1 (which is the value of ERR).
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html
index a745b078..b757dd47 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_name.3x.html
@@ -79,8 +79,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html
index be9151ba..25ef46f5 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_new.3x.html
@@ -103,8 +103,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These  routines  emulate the System V menu library.  They were not sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These  routines  emulate  the  System  V  menu  library.  They were not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html
index bb19f69f..26137c7d 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_opts.3x.html
@@ -98,8 +98,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html
index e3cd0a5a..fe58bd4f 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_userptr.3x.html
@@ -60,8 +60,8 @@

DESCRIPTION

-       Every menu item has a field that can be used to  hold  application-spe-
-       cific  data  (that  is,  the  menu-driver code leaves it alone).  These
+       Every menu item has a field that  can  be  used  to  hold  application-
+       specific  data  (that is, the menu-driver code leaves it alone).  These
        functions get and set that field.
 
 
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
 
        The user pointer is a void pointer.  We chose not to leave it as a char
        pointer for SVr4 compatibility.
diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html
index e58f8742..8ddf9343 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_value.3x.html
@@ -89,8 +89,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html b/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html
index e5e2b451..7a63ad3c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/mitem_visible.3x.html
@@ -73,8 +73,8 @@

PORTABILITY

-       These routines emulate the System V menu library.  They were  not  sup-
-       ported on Version 7 or BSD versions.
+       These routines emulate the  System  V  menu  library.   They  were  not
+       supported on Version 7 or BSD versions.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html b/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html
index 692ea2a9..5408c286 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html
@@ -60,19 +60,19 @@
        method of updating  character  screens  with  reasonable  optimization.
        This  implementation  is  "new  curses"  (ncurses)  and is the approved
        replacement for 4.4BSD classic curses,  which  has  been  discontinued.
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
        The  ncurses  library emulates the curses library of System V Release 4
        UNIX, and XPG4 (X/Open Portability Guide) curses  (also  known  as  XSI
        curses).   XSI  stands  for  X/Open  System  Interfaces Extension.  The
        ncurses library is freely redistributable in source form.   Differences
-       from  the SVr4 curses are summarized under the EXTENSIONS and PORTABIL-
-       ITY sections below and described in detail  in  the  respective  EXTEN-
-       SIONS, PORTABILITY and BUGS sections of individual man pages.
+       from   the   SVr4  curses  are  summarized  under  the  EXTENSIONS  and
+       PORTABILITY sections below and described in detail  in  the  respective
+       EXTENSIONS, PORTABILITY and BUGS sections of individual man pages.
 
-       The  ncurses  library  also provides many useful extensions, i.e., fea-
-       tures which cannot be implemented by a simple add-on library but  which
-       require access to the internals of the library.
+       The  ncurses  library  also  provides  many  useful  extensions,  i.e.,
+       features which cannot be implemented by a  simple  add-on  library  but
+       which require access to the internals of the library.
 
        A  program  using  these  routines  must  be  linked with the -lncurses
        option, or (if it  has  been  generated)  with  the  debugging  library
@@ -82,11 +82,11 @@
        directory) that describe curses  actions.   See  also  the  section  on
        ALTERNATE CONFIGURATIONS.
 
-       The  ncurses package supports: overall screen, window and pad manipula-
-       tion; output to windows and pads; reading terminal input; control  over
-       terminal  and  curses  input and output options; environment query rou-
-       tines; color manipulation; use of soft label keys;  terminfo  capabili-
-       ties; and access to low-level terminal-manipulation routines.
+       The   ncurses   package   supports:  overall  screen,  window  and  pad
+       manipulation; output to  windows  and  pads;  reading  terminal  input;
+       control  over terminal and curses input and output options; environment
+       query routines; color manipulation; use of soft  label  keys;  terminfo
+       capabilities; and access to low-level terminal-manipulation routines.

Initialization

@@ -102,8 +102,8 @@
 
        The  function  initscr  or  newterm  must  be  called to initialize the
        library before any of the other routines that  deal  with  windows  and
-       screens  are  used.  The routine endwin(3x) must be called before exit-
-       ing.
+       screens  are  used.   The  routine  endwin(3x)  must  be  called before
+       exiting.
 
        To get character-at-a-time input  without  echoing  (most  interactive,
        screen  oriented  programs want this), the following sequence should be
@@ -118,22 +118,22 @@
 
        Before a curses program is run, the tab stops of the terminal should be
        set  and  its initialization strings, if defined, must be output.  This
-       can be done by executing the tput init command after the shell environ-
-       ment  variable  TERM has been exported.  tset(1) is usually responsible
-       for doing this.  [See terminfo(5) for further details.]
+       can be done  by  executing  the  tput  init  command  after  the  shell
+       environment  variable  TERM  has  been  exported.   tset(1)  is usually
+       responsible for doing this.  [See terminfo(5) for further details.]

Datatypes

        The ncurses library permits manipulation  of  data  structures,  called
-       windows,  which  can be thought of as two-dimensional arrays of charac-
-       ters representing all or part of a CRT screen.  A default window called
-       stdscr,  which is the size of the terminal screen, is supplied.  Others
-       may be created with newwin.
+       windows,   which  can  be  thought  of  as  two-dimensional  arrays  of
+       characters representing all or part of a CRT screen.  A default  window
+       called  stdscr,  which is the size of the terminal screen, is supplied.
+       Others may be created with newwin.
 
        Note that curses does not handle overlapping windows,  that's  done  by
        the  panel(3x)  library.   This means that you can either use stdscr or
-       divide the screen into tiled windows and not using stdscr at all.  Mix-
-       ing the two will result in unpredictable, and undesired, effects.
+       divide the screen into tiled windows  and  not  using  stdscr  at  all.
+       Mixing the two will result in unpredictable, and undesired, effects.
 
        Windows  are referred to by variables declared as WINDOW *.  These data
        structures are manipulated with routines described here  and  elsewhere
@@ -150,136 +150,137 @@
 
        Special windows called pads may also be manipulated.  These are windows
        which  are not constrained to the size of the screen and whose contents
-       need not be completely displayed.  See curs_pad(3x) for  more  informa-
-       tion.
+       need  not  be  completely  displayed.   See   curs_pad(3x)   for   more
+       information.
 
        In  addition  to drawing characters on the screen, video attributes and
        colors may be supported, causing the characters  to  show  up  in  such
        modes  as  underlined,  in reverse video, or in color on terminals that
        support such display enhancements.   Line  drawing  characters  may  be
        specified  to  be  output.   On input, curses is also able to translate
-       arrow and function keys that transmit escape sequences into single val-
-       ues.   The  video attributes, line drawing characters, and input values
-       use names, defined in <curses.h>, such  as  A_REVERSE,  ACS_HLINE,  and
-       KEY_LEFT.
+       arrow and function keys that  transmit  escape  sequences  into  single
+       values.   The  video  attributes,  line  drawing  characters, and input
+       values use names, defined in <curses.h>, such as A_REVERSE,  ACS_HLINE,
+       and KEY_LEFT.

Environment variables

-       If  the environment variables LINES and COLUMNS are set, or if the pro-
-       gram is executing in a window environment, line and column  information
-       in  the  environment  will override information read by terminfo.  This
-       would affect a program running in an AT&T 630 layer, for example, where
-       the size of a screen is changeable (see ENVIRONMENT).
-
-       If  the  environment  variable  TERMINFO  is defined, any program using
-       curses checks for a local terminal definition before  checking  in  the
-       standard  place.  For example, if TERM is set to att4424, then the com-
-       piled terminal definition is found in
-
-           /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/a/att4424.
-
-       (The a is copied from the first letter of att4424 to avoid creation  of
-       huge  directories.)   However,  if  TERMINFO  is  set to $HOME/myterms,
+       If  the  environment  variables  LINES  and  COLUMNS are set, or if the
+       program  is  executing  in  a  window  environment,  line  and   column
+       information  in  the  environment  will  override  information  read by
+       terminfo.  This would affect a program running in an  AT&T  630  layer,
+       for   example,   where   the  size  of  a  screen  is  changeable  (see
+       ENVIRONMENT).
+
+       If the environment variable TERMINFO  is  defined,  any  program  using
+       curses  checks  for  a local terminal definition before checking in the
+       standard place.  For example, if TERM  is  set  to  att4424,  then  the
+       compiled terminal definition is found in
+
+           /usr/share/terminfo/a/att4424.
+
+       (The  a is copied from the first letter of att4424 to avoid creation of
+       huge directories.)  However,  if  TERMINFO  is  set  to  $HOME/myterms,
        curses first checks
 
            $HOME/myterms/a/att4424,
 
        and if that fails, it then checks
 
-           /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/a/att4424.
+           /usr/share/terminfo/a/att4424.
 
-       This is useful for developing experimental definitions  or  when  write
-       permission in /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo is not available.
+       This  is  useful  for developing experimental definitions or when write
+       permission in /usr/share/terminfo is not available.
 
        The integer variables LINES and COLS are defined in <curses.h> and will
-       be filled in by initscr with the size of  the  screen.   The  constants
+       be  filled  in  by  initscr with the size of the screen.  The constants
        TRUE and FALSE have the values 1 and 0, respectively.
 
-       The  curses  routines also define the WINDOW * variable curscr which is
-       used for certain low-level operations like  clearing  and  redrawing  a
-       screen  containing  garbage.  The curscr can be used in only a few rou-
-       tines.
+       The curses routines also define the WINDOW * variable curscr  which  is
+       used  for  certain  low-level  operations like clearing and redrawing a
+       screen containing garbage.  The curscr  can  be  used  in  only  a  few
+       routines.

Routine and Argument Names

-       Many curses routines have two or more versions.  The routines  prefixed
+       Many  curses routines have two or more versions.  The routines prefixed
        with w require a window argument.  The routines prefixed with p require
        a pad argument.  Those without a prefix generally use stdscr.
 
-       The routines prefixed with mv require a y and x coordinate to  move  to
+       The  routines  prefixed with mv require a y and x coordinate to move to
        before performing the appropriate action.  The mv routines imply a call
-       to move before the call to the other routine.  The coordinate y  always
-       refers  to  the row (of the window), and x always refers to the column.
+       to  move before the call to the other routine.  The coordinate y always
+       refers to the row (of the window), and x always refers to  the  column.
        The upper left-hand corner is always (0,0), not (1,1).
 
-       The routines prefixed with mvw take both a window argument and x and  y
-       coordinates.   The window argument is always specified before the coor-
-       dinates.
+       The  routines prefixed with mvw take both a window argument and x and y
+       coordinates.  The  window  argument  is  always  specified  before  the
+       coordinates.
 
-       In each case, win is the window affected, and pad is the pad  affected;
+       In  each case, win is the window affected, and pad is the pad affected;
        win and pad are always pointers to type WINDOW.
 
-       Option  setting  routines require a Boolean flag bf with the value TRUE
-       or FALSE; bf is always of type bool.  Most of the data  types  used  in
-       the  library  routines,  such  as  WINDOW, SCREEN, bool, and chtype are
-       defined in <curses.h>.  Types used for the terminfo  routines  such  as
+       Option setting routines require a Boolean flag bf with the  value  TRUE
+       or  FALSE;  bf  is always of type bool.  Most of the data types used in
+       the library routines, such as WINDOW,  SCREEN,  bool,  and  chtype  are
+       defined  in  <curses.h>.   Types used for the terminfo routines such as
        TERMINAL are defined in <term.h>.
 
-       This manual page describes functions which may appear in any configura-
-       tion of the library.   There  are  two  common  configurations  of  the
-       library:
+       This  manual  page  describes  functions  which  may  appear   in   any
+       configuration  of  the library.  There are two common configurations of
+       the library:
 
           ncurses
-               the "normal" library, which handles 8-bit characters.  The nor-
-               mal (8-bit) library stores characters combined with  attributes
-               in chtype data.
+               the "normal" library,  which  handles  8-bit  characters.   The
+               normal   (8-bit)   library   stores  characters  combined  with
+               attributes in chtype data.
 
-               Attributes  alone (no corresponding character) may be stored in
+               Attributes alone (no corresponding character) may be stored  in
                chtype or the equivalent attr_t data.  In either case, the data
                is stored in something like an integer.
 
                Each cell (row and column) in a WINDOW is stored as a chtype.
 
           ncursesw
-               the  so-called  "wide" library, which handles multibyte charac-
-               ters (see the section on ALTERNATE CONFIGURATIONS).  The "wide"
-               library  includes  all  of the calls from the "normal" library.
-               It adds about one third more calls using data types which store
-               multibyte characters:
+               the  so-called  "wide"   library,   which   handles   multibyte
+               characters  (see the section on ALTERNATE CONFIGURATIONS).  The
+               "wide" library includes all of  the  calls  from  the  "normal"
+               library.   It  adds about one third more calls using data types
+               which store multibyte characters:
 
                cchar_t
                     corresponds to chtype.  However it is a structure, because
-                    more data is stored than can fit  into  an  integer.   The
-                    characters  are  large  enough  to  require a full integer
+                    more  data  is  stored  than can fit into an integer.  The
+                    characters are large enough  to  require  a  full  integer
                     value - and there may be more than one character per cell.
-                    The  video  attributes  and  color  are stored in separate
+                    The video attributes and  color  are  stored  in  separate
                     fields of the structure.
 
-                    Each cell (row and column) in a  WINDOW  is  stored  as  a
+                    Each  cell  (row  and  column)  in a WINDOW is stored as a
                     cchar_t.
 
-                    The  setcchar(3x)  and  getcchar(3x)  functions  store and
+                    The setcchar(3x)  and  getcchar(3x)  functions  store  and
                     retrieve the data from a cchar_t structure.
 
                wchar_t
-                    stores a "wide" character.  Like chtype, this  may  be  an
+                    stores  a  "wide"  character.  Like chtype, this may be an
                     integer.
 
                wint_t
-                    stores  a  wchar_t or WEOF - not the same, though both may
+                    stores a wchar_t or WEOF - not the same, though  both  may
                     have the same size.
 
-               The "wide" library provides new functions which  are  analogous
-               to  functions  in the "normal" library.  There is a naming con-
-               vention which relates many of the normal/wide variants: a  "_w"
-               is  inserted  into  the  name.   For  example,  waddch  becomes
+               The  "wide"  library provides new functions which are analogous
+               to functions in  the  "normal"  library.   There  is  a  naming
+               convention  which  relates  many of the normal/wide variants: a
+               "_w" is inserted into the name.  For  example,  waddch  becomes
                wadd_wch.

Routine Name Index

-       The following table lists the curses routines provided in the  "normal"
-       and  "wide"  libraries  and the names of the manual pages on which they
-       are described.  Routines flagged with  "*"  are  ncurses-specific,  not
+       The  following table lists the curses routines provided in the "normal"
+       and "wide" libraries and the names of the manual pages  on  which  they
+       are  described.   Routines  flagged  with "*" are ncurses-specific, not
        described by XPG4 or present in SVr4.
 
                     curses Routine Name      Manual Page Name
@@ -312,8 +313,8 @@
                     bkgrnd                   curs_bkgrnd(3x)
                     bkgrndset                curs_bkgrnd(3x)
                     border                   curs_border(3x)
-                    border_set               curs_border_set(3x)
 
+                    border_set               curs_border_set(3x)
                     box                      curs_border(3x)
                     box_set                  curs_border_set(3x)
                     can_change_color         curs_color(3x)
@@ -378,8 +379,8 @@
                     getnstr                  curs_getstr(3x)
                     getparx                  curs_legacy(3x)*
                     getpary                  curs_legacy(3x)*
-                    getparyx                 curs_getyx(3x)
 
+                    getparyx                 curs_getyx(3x)
                     getstr                   curs_getstr(3x)
                     getsyx                   curs_kernel(3x)
                     getwin                   curs_util(3x)
@@ -444,8 +445,8 @@
                     killchar                 curs_termattrs(3x)
                     killwchar                curs_termattrs(3x)
                     leaveok                  curs_outopts(3x)
-                    longname                 curs_termattrs(3x)
 
+                    longname                 curs_termattrs(3x)
                     mcprint                  curs_print(3x)*
                     meta                     curs_inopts(3x)
                     mouse_trafo              curs_mouse(3x)*
@@ -510,8 +511,8 @@
                     mvwget_wstr              curs_get_wstr(3x)
                     mvwgetch                 curs_getch(3x)
                     mvwgetn_wstr             curs_get_wstr(3x)
-                    mvwgetnstr               curs_getstr(3x)
 
+                    mvwgetnstr               curs_getstr(3x)
                     mvwgetstr                curs_getstr(3x)
                     mvwhline                 curs_border(3x)
                     mvwhline_set             curs_border_set(3x)
@@ -576,8 +577,8 @@
                     scr_dump                 curs_scr_dump(3x)
                     scr_init                 curs_scr_dump(3x)
                     scr_restore              curs_scr_dump(3x)
-                    scr_set                  curs_scr_dump(3x)
 
+                    scr_set                  curs_scr_dump(3x)
                     scrl                     curs_scroll(3x)
                     scroll                   curs_scroll(3x)
                     scrollok                 curs_outopts(3x)
@@ -642,8 +643,8 @@
                     use_legacy_coding        legacy_coding(3x)*
                     use_tioctl               curs_util(3x)*
                     vid_attr                 curs_terminfo(3x)
-                    vid_puts                 curs_terminfo(3x)
 
+                    vid_puts                 curs_terminfo(3x)
                     vidattr                  curs_terminfo(3x)
                     vidputs                  curs_terminfo(3x)
                     vline                    curs_border(3x)
@@ -708,8 +709,8 @@
                     winnstr                  curs_instr(3x)
                     winnwstr                 curs_inwstr(3x)
                     wins_nwstr               curs_ins_wstr(3x)
-                    wins_wch                 curs_ins_wch(3x)
 
+                    wins_wch                 curs_ins_wch(3x)
                     wins_wstr                curs_ins_wstr(3x)
                     winsch                   curs_insch(3x)
                     winsdelln                curs_deleteln(3x)
@@ -738,7 +739,7 @@
                     wvline                   curs_border(3x)
                     wvline_set               curs_border_set(3x)
 
-       Depending  on  the  configuration,  additional sets of functions may be
+       Depending on the configuration, additional sets  of  functions  may  be
        available:
 
           curs_memleaks(3x) - curses memory-leak checking
@@ -751,38 +752,38 @@

RETURN VALUE

-       Routines that return an integer return ERR upon failure and an  integer
+       Routines  that return an integer return ERR upon failure and an integer
        value other than ERR upon successful completion, unless otherwise noted
        in the routine descriptions.
 
-       As a general rule, routines check for null pointers passed  as  parame-
-       ters, and handle this as an error.
+       As  a  general  rule,  routines  check  for  null  pointers  passed  as
+       parameters, and handle this as an error.
 
-       All  macros  return  the  value  of  the  w  version, except setscrreg,
-       wsetscrreg, getyx,  getbegyx,  and  getmaxyx.   The  return  values  of
-       setscrreg,  wsetscrreg,  getyx,  getbegyx,  and  getmaxyx are undefined
-       (i.e., these should not be used as the right-hand  side  of  assignment
+       All macros return  the  value  of  the  w  version,  except  setscrreg,
+       wsetscrreg,  getyx,  getbegyx,  and  getmaxyx.   The  return  values of
+       setscrreg, wsetscrreg, getyx,  getbegyx,  and  getmaxyx  are  undefined
+       (i.e.,  these  should  not be used as the right-hand side of assignment
        statements).
 
-       Functions  with  a  "mv"  prefix  first perform a cursor movement using
+       Functions with a "mv" prefix first  perform  a  cursor  movement  using
        wmove, and return an error if the position is outside the window, or if
-       the window pointer is null.  Most "mv"-prefixed functions (except vari-
-       adic functions such as mvprintw) are provided both as macros and  func-
-       tions.
+       the window pointer  is  null.   Most  "mv"-prefixed  functions  (except
+       variadic  functions  such  as mvprintw) are provided both as macros and
+       functions.
 
        Routines that return pointers return NULL on error.

ENVIRONMENT

-       The  following  environment symbols are useful for customizing the run-
-       time behavior of the ncurses library.  The  most  important  ones  have
+       The following  environment  symbols  are  useful  for  customizing  the
+       runtime  behavior of the ncurses library.  The most important ones have
        been already discussed in detail.

CC command-character

-       When  set, change occurrences of the command_character (i.e., the cmdch
-       capability) of the loaded terminfo entries to the value of  this  vari-
-       able.  Very few terminfo entries provide this feature.
+       When set, change occurrences of the command_character (i.e., the  cmdch
+       capability)  of  the  loaded  terminfo  entries  to  the  value of this
+       variable.  Very few terminfo entries provide this feature.
 
        Because this name is also used in development environments to represent
        the C compiler's name, ncurses ignores it if it does not happen to be a
@@ -790,34 +791,34 @@

BAUDRATE

-       The  debugging library checks this environment variable when the appli-
-       cation has redirected output to a file.  The variable's  numeric  value
-       is  used  for  the  baudrate.  If no value is found, ncurses uses 9600.
-       This allows testers to construct repeatable test-cases that  take  into
-       account costs that depend on baudrate.
+       The  debugging  library  checks  this  environment  variable  when  the
+       application  has  redirected  output to a file.  The variable's numeric
+       value is used for the baudrate.  If no value  is  found,  ncurses  uses
+       9600.  This allows testers to construct repeatable test-cases that take
+       into account costs that depend on baudrate.

COLUMNS

        Specify the width of the screen in characters.  Applications running in
-       a windowing environment usually are able to obtain  the  width  of  the
-       window  in  which they are executing.  If neither the COLUMNS value nor
-       the terminal's screen size is available, ncurses uses  the  size  which
+       a  windowing  environment  usually  are able to obtain the width of the
+       window in which they are executing.  If neither the COLUMNS  value  nor
+       the  terminal's  screen  size is available, ncurses uses the size which
        may be specified in the terminfo database (i.e., the cols capability).
 
-       It  is  important  that  your  application  use  a correct size for the
-       screen.  This is not always possible because your  application  may  be
-       running  on a host which does not honor NAWS (Negotiations About Window
-       Size), or because you are temporarily running as  another  user.   How-
-       ever,  setting  COLUMNS and/or LINES overrides the library's use of the
-       screen size obtained from the operating system.
+       It is important that your  application  use  a  correct  size  for  the
+       screen.   This  is  not always possible because your application may be
+       running on a host which does not honor NAWS (Negotiations About  Window
+       Size),  or  because  you  are  temporarily  running  as  another  user.
+       However, setting COLUMNS and/or LINES overrides the  library's  use  of
+       the screen size obtained from the operating system.
 
-       Either COLUMNS or LINES symbols may be specified  independently.   This
-       is  mainly useful to circumvent legacy misfeatures of terminal descrip-
-       tions, e.g., xterm which commonly specifies a 65 line screen.  For best
-       results,  lines and cols should not be specified in a terminal descrip-
-       tion for terminals which are run as emulations.
+       Either  COLUMNS  or LINES symbols may be specified independently.  This
+       is  mainly  useful  to  circumvent  legacy  misfeatures   of   terminal
+       descriptions,  e.g.,  xterm  which commonly specifies a 65 line screen.
+       For best results, lines and cols should not be specified in a  terminal
+       description for terminals which are run as emulations.
 
-       Use the use_env function to disable all  use  of  external  environment
+       Use  the  use_env  function  to disable all use of external environment
        (but not including system calls) to determine the screen size.  Use the
        use_tioctl function to update COLUMNS or LINES to match the screen size
        obtained from system calls or the terminal database.
@@ -825,31 +826,31 @@

ESCDELAY

        Specifies the total time, in milliseconds, for which ncurses will await
-       a character sequence, e.g., a function key.  The  default  value,  1000
-       milliseconds,  is enough for most uses.  However, it is made a variable
+       a  character  sequence,  e.g., a function key.  The default value, 1000
+       milliseconds, is enough for most uses.  However, it is made a  variable
        to accommodate unusual applications.
 
-       The most common instance where you may wish to change this value is  to
-       work  with  slow hosts, e.g., running on a network.  If the host cannot
-       read characters rapidly enough, it will have the same effect as if  the
-       terminal  did  not  send  characters  rapidly enough.  The library will
+       The  most common instance where you may wish to change this value is to
+       work with slow hosts, e.g., running on a network.  If the  host  cannot
+       read  characters rapidly enough, it will have the same effect as if the
+       terminal did not send characters  rapidly  enough.   The  library  will
        still see a timeout.
 
-       Note that xterm mouse events are  built  up  from  character  sequences
-       received from the xterm.  If your application makes heavy use of multi-
-       ple-clicking, you may wish to lengthen this default value  because  the
-       timeout  applies to the composed multi-click event as well as the indi-
-       vidual clicks.
+       Note  that  xterm  mouse  events  are built up from character sequences
+       received from the xterm.   If  your  application  makes  heavy  use  of
+       multiple-clicking,  you may wish to lengthen this default value because
+       the timeout applies to the composed multi-click event as  well  as  the
+       individual clicks.
 
        In addition to the environment variable, this implementation provides a
-       global  variable  with the same name.  Portable applications should not
-       rely upon the presence of ESCDELAY in  either  form,  but  setting  the
-       environment  variable  rather  than the global variable does not create
+       global variable with the same name.  Portable applications  should  not
+       rely  upon  the  presence  of  ESCDELAY in either form, but setting the
+       environment variable rather than the global variable  does  not  create
        problems when compiling an application.

HOME

-       Tells ncurses where your home directory is.  That is where it may  read
+       Tells  ncurses where your home directory is.  That is where it may read
        and write auxiliary terminal descriptions:
 
            $HOME/.termcap
@@ -857,51 +858,51 @@

LINES

-       Like COLUMNS, specify the height of the screen in characters.  See COL-
-       UMNS for a detailed description.
+       Like COLUMNS, specify the height of  the  screen  in  characters.   See
+       COLUMNS for a detailed description.

MOUSE_BUTTONS_123

-       This applies only to the OS/2 EMX port.  It specifies the order of but-
-       tons  on  the mouse.  OS/2 numbers a 3-button mouse inconsistently from
-       other platforms:
+       This  applies  only  to  the  OS/2 EMX port.  It specifies the order of
+       buttons on the mouse.  OS/2 numbers  a  3-button  mouse  inconsistently
+       from other platforms:
 
            1 = left
            2 = right
            3 = middle.
 
        This variable lets you customize the mouse.  The variable must be three
-       numeric digits 1-3 in any order, e.g., 123 or 321.  If it is not speci-
-       fied, ncurses uses 132.
+       numeric digits 1-3 in any order, e.g.,  123  or  321.   If  it  is  not
+       specified, ncurses uses 132.

NCURSES_ASSUMED_COLORS

-       Override the compiled-in assumption that the terminal's default  colors
-       are  white-on-black  (see  default_colors(3x)).   You may set the fore-
-       ground and background color values with this  environment  variable  by
-       proving  a 2-element list: foreground,background.  For example, to tell
-       ncurses to not assume anything about the colors, set this  to  "-1,-1".
-       To  make  it  green-on-black, set it to "2,0".  Any positive value from
-       zero to the terminfo max_colors value is allowed.
+       Override  the compiled-in assumption that the terminal's default colors
+       are  white-on-black  (see  default_colors(3x)).   You   may   set   the
+       foreground  and  background color values with this environment variable
+       by proving a 2-element list: foreground,background.   For  example,  to
+       tell  ncurses  to  not  assume  anything  about the colors, set this to
+       "-1,-1".  To make it green-on-black, set it  to  "2,0".   Any  positive
+       value from zero to the terminfo max_colors value is allowed.

NCURSES_CONSOLE2

        This applies only to the MinGW port of ncurses.
 
-       The Console2 program's handling of the Microsoft Console API call  Cre-
-       ateConsoleScreenBuffer  is defective.  Applications which use this will
-       hang.  However, it is possible to simulate the action of this  call  by
-       mapping  coordinates,  explicitly  saving  and  restoring  the original
-       screen contents.  Setting the environment variable NCGDB has  the  same
+       The  Console2  program's  handling  of  the  Microsoft Console API call
+       CreateConsoleScreenBuffer is defective.  Applications  which  use  this
+       will hang.  However, it is possible to simulate the action of this call
+       by mapping coordinates, explicitly saving and  restoring  the  original
+       screen  contents.   Setting the environment variable NCGDB has the same
        effect.

NCURSES_GPM_TERMS

        This applies only to ncurses configured to use the GPM interface.
 
-       If  present, the environment variable is a list of one or more terminal
-       names against which the TERM environment variable is matched.   Setting
-       it  to  an  empty  value disables the GPM interface; using the built-in
+       If present, the environment variable is a list of one or more  terminal
+       names  against which the TERM environment variable is matched.  Setting
+       it to an empty value disables the GPM  interface;  using  the  built-in
        support for xterm, etc.
 
        If the environment variable is absent, ncurses will attempt to open GPM
@@ -909,40 +910,40 @@

NCURSES_NO_HARD_TABS

-       Ncurses  may  use tabs as part of the cursor movement optimization.  In
-       some cases, your terminal driver may not handle  these  properly.   Set
-       this  environment variable to disable the feature.  You can also adjust
+       Ncurses may use tabs as part of the cursor movement  optimization.   In
+       some  cases,  your  terminal driver may not handle these properly.  Set
+       this environment variable to disable the feature.  You can also  adjust
        your stty settings to avoid the problem.

NCURSES_NO_MAGIC_COOKIE

-       Some terminals use a magic-cookie feature which requires  special  han-
-       dling to make highlighting and other video attributes display properly.
-       You can suppress the highlighting entirely for these terminals by  set-
-       ting this environment variable.
+       Some  terminals  use  a  magic-cookie  feature  which  requires special
+       handling to  make  highlighting  and  other  video  attributes  display
+       properly.   You  can  suppress  the  highlighting  entirely  for  these
+       terminals by setting this environment variable.

NCURSES_NO_PADDING

-       Most  of the terminal descriptions in the terminfo database are written
-       for real "hardware" terminals.   Many  people  use  terminal  emulators
+       Most of the terminal descriptions in the terminfo database are  written
+       for  real  "hardware"  terminals.   Many  people use terminal emulators
        which run in a windowing environment and use curses-based applications.
-       Terminal emulators can duplicate all of  the  important  aspects  of  a
-       hardware  terminal,  but  they  do  not have the same limitations.  The
-       chief limitation of a hardware terminal from  the  standpoint  of  your
-       application  is  the  management  of  dataflow, i.e., timing.  Unless a
-       hardware terminal is interfaced into  a  terminal  concentrator  (which
-       does flow control), it (or your application) must manage dataflow, pre-
-       venting overruns.  The cheapest solution (no hardware cost) is for your
-       program  to  do this by pausing after operations that the terminal does
-       slowly, such as clearing the display.
-
-       As a result, many terminal  descriptions  (including  the  vt100)  have
-       delay  times embedded.  You may wish to use these descriptions, but not
+       Terminal  emulators  can  duplicate  all  of the important aspects of a
+       hardware terminal, but they do not  have  the  same  limitations.   The
+       chief  limitation  of  a  hardware terminal from the standpoint of your
+       application is the management of  dataflow,  i.e.,  timing.   Unless  a
+       hardware  terminal  is  interfaced  into a terminal concentrator (which
+       does flow control), it (or  your  application)  must  manage  dataflow,
+       preventing  overruns.   The cheapest solution (no hardware cost) is for
+       your program to do this by pausing after operations that  the  terminal
+       does slowly, such as clearing the display.
+
+       As  a  result,  many  terminal  descriptions (including the vt100) have
+       delay times embedded.  You may wish to use these descriptions, but  not
        want to pay the performance penalty.
 
-       Set the NCURSES_NO_PADDING environment  variable  to  disable  all  but
-       mandatory padding.  Mandatory padding is used as a part of special con-
-       trol sequences such as flash.
+       Set  the  NCURSES_NO_PADDING  environment  variable  to disable all but
+       mandatory padding.  Mandatory padding is used  as  a  part  of  special
+       control sequences such as flash.

NCURSES_NO_SETBUF

@@ -952,44 +953,44 @@
 
           o   continued though 5.9 patch 20130126
 
-       ncurses enabled buffered output during terminal  initialization.   This
-       was done (as in SVr4 curses) for performance reasons.  For testing pur-
-       poses, both of ncurses and certain applications, this feature was  made
-       optional.   Setting  the  NCURSES_NO_SETBUF  variable  disabled  output
-       buffering, leaving the output in the original (usually  line  buffered)
+       ncurses  enabled  buffered output during terminal initialization.  This
+       was done (as in SVr4 curses)  for  performance  reasons.   For  testing
+       purposes,  both  of  ncurses and certain applications, this feature was
+       made optional.  Setting the NCURSES_NO_SETBUF variable disabled  output
+       buffering,  leaving  the output in the original (usually line buffered)
        mode.
 
-       In  the  current implementation, ncurses performs its own buffering and
-       does not require this workaround.  It does not modify the buffering  of
+       In the current implementation, ncurses performs its own  buffering  and
+       does  not require this workaround.  It does not modify the buffering of
        the standard output.
 
-       The  reason  for the change was to make the behavior for interrupts and
-       other signals more robust.  One drawback  is  that  certain  nonconven-
-       tional  programs  would mix ordinary stdio calls with ncurses calls and
-       (usually) work.  This is no longer possible since ncurses is not  using
-       the  buffered  standard  output  but  its  own output (to the same file
-       descriptor).  As a special case, the low-level calls such as putp still
-       use the standard output.  But high-level curses calls do not.
+       The reason for the change was to make the behavior for  interrupts  and
+       other   signals   more   robust.    One   drawback   is   that  certain
+       nonconventional programs would mix ordinary stdio  calls  with  ncurses
+       calls  and (usually) work.  This is no longer possible since ncurses is
+       not using the buffered standard output but its own output (to the  same
+       file  descriptor).  As a special case, the low-level calls such as putp
+       still use the standard output.  But high-level curses calls do not.

NCURSES_NO_UTF8_ACS

-       During  initialization,  the  ncurses  library checks for special cases
+       During initialization, the ncurses library  checks  for  special  cases
        where VT100 line-drawing (and the corresponding alternate character set
-       capabilities)  described  in  the  terminfo  are  known  to be missing.
-       Specifically, when running in a UTF-8 locale, the Linux console  emula-
-       tor  and  the GNU screen program ignore these.  Ncurses checks the TERM
-       environment variable for these.  For other special  cases,  you  should
-       set this environment variable.  Doing this tells ncurses to use Unicode
-       values which correspond to the VT100 line-drawing glyphs.   That  works
-       for  the special cases cited, and is likely to work for terminal emula-
-       tors.
-
-       When setting this variable, you should set it to a nonzero value.  Set-
-       ting  it  to  zero  (or  to a nonnumber) disables the special check for
+       capabilities) described in  the  terminfo  are  known  to  be  missing.
+       Specifically,  when  running  in  a  UTF-8  locale,  the  Linux console
+       emulator and the GNU screen program ignore these.  Ncurses  checks  the
+       TERM  environment  variable  for  these.   For other special cases, you
+       should set this environment variable.  Doing this tells ncurses to  use
+       Unicode values which correspond to the VT100 line-drawing glyphs.  That
+       works for the special cases cited, and is likely to work  for  terminal
+       emulators.
+
+       When  setting  this  variable,  you  should  set it to a nonzero value.
+       Setting it to zero (or to a nonnumber) disables the special  check  for
        "linux" and "screen".
 
-       As an alternative to the environment variable, ncurses  checks  for  an
-       extended  terminfo  capability  U8.  This is a numeric capability which
+       As  an  alternative  to the environment variable, ncurses checks for an
+       extended terminfo capability U8.  This is a  numeric  capability  which
        can be compiled using tic -x.  For example
 
           # linux console, if patched to provide working
@@ -1001,67 +1002,67 @@
           xterm-utf8|xterm relying on UTF-8 line-graphics,
                   U8#1, use=xterm,
 
-       The name "U8" is chosen to be two characters, to permit it to  be  used
+       The  name  "U8" is chosen to be two characters, to permit it to be used
        by applications that use ncurses' termcap interface.

NCURSES_TRACE

-       During   initialization,  the  ncurses  debugging  library  checks  the
-       NCURSES_TRACE environment variable.  If it is  defined,  to  a  numeric
-       value,  ncurses calls the trace function, using that value as the argu-
-       ment.
+       During  initialization,  the  ncurses  debugging  library  checks   the
+       NCURSES_TRACE  environment  variable.   If  it is defined, to a numeric
+       value, ncurses calls the  trace  function,  using  that  value  as  the
+       argument.
 
-       The argument values, which are defined  in  curses.h,  provide  several
-       types  of information.  When running with traces enabled, your applica-
-       tion will write the file trace to the current directory.
+       The  argument  values,  which  are defined in curses.h, provide several
+       types  of  information.   When  running  with  traces   enabled,   your
+       application will write the file trace to the current directory.
 
        See curs_trace(3x) for more information.

TERM

-       Denotes your terminal type.  Each terminal  type  is  distinct,  though
+       Denotes  your  terminal  type.   Each terminal type is distinct, though
        many are similar.
 
-       TERM  is commonly set by terminal emulators to help applications find a
-       workable terminal description.  Some of those choose a popular approxi-
-       mation,  e.g.,  "ansi", "vt100", "xterm" rather than an exact fit.  Not
-       infrequently, your application will have problems with  that  approach,
-       e.g., incorrect function-key definitions.
-
-       If  you set TERM in your environment, it has no effect on the operation
-       of the terminal emulator.  It only affects the  way  applications  work
-       within  the  terminal.  Likewise, as a general rule (xterm being a rare
-       exception), terminal emulators which allow you to  specify  TERM  as  a
-       parameter  or configuration value do not change their behavior to match
+       TERM is commonly set by terminal emulators to help applications find  a
+       workable   terminal  description.   Some  of  those  choose  a  popular
+       approximation, e.g., "ansi", "vt100", "xterm" rather than an exact fit.
+       Not  infrequently,  your  application  will  have  problems  with  that
+       approach, e.g., incorrect function-key definitions.
+
+       If you set TERM in your environment, it has no effect on the  operation
+       of  the  terminal  emulator.  It only affects the way applications work
+       within the terminal.  Likewise, as a general rule (xterm being  a  rare
+       exception),  terminal  emulators  which  allow you to specify TERM as a
+       parameter or configuration value do not change their behavior to  match
        that setting.

TERMCAP

-       If the ncurses  library  has  been  configured  with  termcap  support,
-       ncurses  will  check for a terminal's description in termcap form if it
+       If  the  ncurses  library  has  been  configured  with termcap support,
+       ncurses will check for a terminal's description in termcap form  if  it
        is not available in the terminfo database.
 
        The TERMCAP environment variable contains either a terminal description
-       (with newlines stripped out), or a file name telling where the informa-
-       tion denoted by the TERM environment variable exists.  In either  case,
-       setting  it directs ncurses to ignore the usual place for this informa-
-       tion, e.g., /etc/termcap.
+       (with newlines  stripped  out),  or  a  file  name  telling  where  the
+       information denoted by the TERM environment variable exists.  In either
+       case, setting it directs ncurses to ignore the  usual  place  for  this
+       information, e.g., /etc/termcap.

TERMINFO

-       ncurses can be configured to read  from  multiple  terminal  databases.
-       The  TERMINFO  variable overrides the location for the default terminal
-       database.  Terminal descriptions (in terminal  format)  are  stored  in
+       ncurses  can  be  configured  to read from multiple terminal databases.
+       The TERMINFO variable overrides the location for the  default  terminal
+       database.   Terminal  descriptions  (in  terminal format) are stored in
        terminal databases:
 
        o   Normally these are stored in a directory tree, using subdirectories
            named by the first letter of the terminal names therein.
 
            This is the scheme used in System V, which legacy Unix systems use,
-           and  the  TERMINFO variable is used by curses applications on those
+           and the TERMINFO variable is used by curses applications  on  those
            systems to override the default location of the terminal database.
 
-       o   If ncurses is built to use hashed databases,  then  each  entry  in
+       o   If  ncurses  is  built  to use hashed databases, then each entry in
            this list may be the path of a hashed database file, e.g.,
 
                /usr/share/terminfo.db
@@ -1070,30 +1071,30 @@
 
                /usr/share/terminfo/
 
-           The  hashed  database  uses  less disk-space and is a little faster
-           than the directory tree.  However,  some  applications  assume  the
-           existence  of  the  directory tree, reading it directly rather than
+           The hashed database uses less disk-space and  is  a  little  faster
+           than  the  directory  tree.   However, some applications assume the
+           existence of the directory tree, reading it  directly  rather  than
            using the terminfo library calls.
 
-       o   If ncurses is built  with  a  support  for  reading  termcap  files
-           directly,  then  an entry in this list may be the path of a termcap
+       o   If  ncurses  is  built  with  a  support  for reading termcap files
+           directly, then an entry in this list may be the path of  a  termcap
            file.
 
        o   If the TERMINFO variable begins with "hex:" or "b64:", ncurses uses
-           the  remainder of that variable as a compiled terminal description.
+           the remainder of that variable as a compiled terminal  description.
            You might produce the base64 format using infocmp(1m):
 
                TERMINFO="$(infocmp -0 -Q2 -q)"
                export TERMINFO
 
-           The compiled description is used if it corresponds to the  terminal
+           The  compiled description is used if it corresponds to the terminal
            identified by the TERM variable.
 
-       Setting  TERMINFO is the simplest, but not the only way to set location
-       of the default terminal database.  The complete list of database  loca-
-       tions in order follows:
+       Setting TERMINFO is the simplest, but not the only way to set  location
+       of  the  default  terminal  database.   The  complete  list of database
+       locations in order follows:
 
-          o   the  last  terminal  database to which ncurses wrote, if any, is
+          o   the last terminal database to which ncurses wrote,  if  any,  is
               searched first
 
           o   the location specified by the TERMINFO environment variable
@@ -1102,14 +1103,13 @@
 
           o   locations listed in the TERMINFO_DIRS environment variable
 
-          o   one or more locations whose names are  configured  and  compiled
+          o   one  or  more  locations whose names are configured and compiled
               into the ncurses library, i.e.,
 
-             o   /usr/local/ncurses/share/terminfo:/usr/share/terminfo (corre-
-                 sponding to the TERMINFO_DIRS variable)
+             o   no  default  value  (corresponding   to   the   TERMINFO_DIRS
+                 variable)
 
-             o   /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo (corresponding  to  the  TER-
-                 MINFO variable)
+             o   /usr/share/terminfo (corresponding to the TERMINFO variable)

TERMINFO_DIRS

@@ -1118,8 +1118,8 @@
        section  on  the  TERMINFO  variable.   The list is separated by colons
        (i.e., ":") on Unix, semicolons on OS/2 EMX.
 
-       There is no corresponding feature in System V terminfo; it is an exten-
-       sion developed for ncurses.
+       There is no corresponding feature  in  System  V  terminfo;  it  is  an
+       extension developed for ncurses.

TERMPATH

@@ -1142,10 +1142,10 @@

ALTERNATE CONFIGURATIONS

-       Several different configurations are possible, depending on the config-
-       ure  script  options  used when building ncurses.  There are a few main
-       options whose effects are visible to the applications  developer  using
-       ncurses:
+       Several  different  configurations  are  possible,  depending  on   the
+       configure  script  options used when building ncurses.  There are a few
+       main options whose effects are visible to  the  applications  developer
+       using ncurses:
 
        --disable-overwrite
             The standard include for ncurses is as noted in SYNOPSIS:
@@ -1154,8 +1154,8 @@
 
             This  option  is  used to avoid filename conflicts when ncurses is
             not the main implementation of curses of the computer.  If ncurses
-            is  installed disabling overwrite, it puts its headers in a subdi-
-            rectory, e.g.,
+            is  installed  disabling  overwrite,  it  puts  its  headers  in a
+            subdirectory, e.g.,
 
                 #include <ncurses/curses.h>
 
@@ -1163,10 +1163,10 @@
             -lcurses to build executables.
 
        --enable-widec
-            The  configure  script  renames  the  library  and  (if the --dis-
-            able-overwrite option is used) puts the header files in a  differ-
-            ent subdirectory.  All of the library names have a "w" appended to
-            them, i.e., instead of
+            The   configure   script   renames   the   library   and  (if  the
+            --disable-overwrite option is used) puts the  header  files  in  a
+            different  subdirectory.   All  of  the  library  names have a "w"
+            appended to them, i.e., instead of
 
                 -lncurses
 
@@ -1200,10 +1200,10 @@
             header.   Only  the size of the WINDOW structure differs, and very
             few applications require more than a pointer to WINDOWs.
 
-            If the headers are installed allowing overwrite, the  wide-charac-
-            ter  library's headers should be installed last, to allow applica-
-            tions to be built using either library from the same set of  head-
-            ers.
+            If  the  headers  are  installed  allowing  overwrite,  the  wide-
+            character  library's  headers  should  be installed last, to allow
+            applications to be built using either library from the same set of
+            headers.
 
        --with-pthread
             The  configure  script  renames  the  library.  All of the library
@@ -1222,10 +1222,10 @@
        --with-debug
 
        --with-profile
-            The shared and normal (static) library names differ by their  suf-
-            fixes,  e.g.,  libncurses.so and libncurses.a.  The debug and pro-
-            filing libraries add a "_g" and a "_p" to the root  names  respec-
-            tively, e.g., libncurses_g.a and libncurses_p.a.
+            The shared and normal  (static)  library  names  differ  by  their
+            suffixes,  e.g.,  libncurses.so  and  libncurses.a.  The debug and
+            profiling libraries add a "_g"  and  a  "_p"  to  the  root  names
+            respectively, e.g., libncurses_g.a and libncurses_p.a.
 
        --with-termlib
             Low-level  functions  which do not depend upon whether the library
@@ -1253,16 +1253,16 @@
 
        --with-trace
             The trace function normally resides in the debug library,  but  it
-            is sometimes useful to configure this in the shared library.  Con-
-            figure scripts should check for the  function's  existence  rather
+            is  sometimes  useful  to  configure  this  in the shared library.
+            Configure scripts should check for the function's existence rather
             than assuming it is always in the debug library.

FILES

        /usr/share/tabset
-            directory  containing  initialization files for the terminal capa-
-            bility database /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo terminal  capabil-
-            ity database
+            directory   containing   initialization  files  for  the  terminal
+            capability  database   /usr/share/terminfo   terminal   capability
+            database

SEE ALSO

@@ -1276,18 +1276,18 @@
        The ncurses library can be compiled with an option (-DUSE_GETCAP)  that
        falls  back  to  the  old-style /etc/termcap file if the terminal setup
        code cannot find a terminfo entry corresponding to TERM.  Use  of  this
-       feature  is not recommended, as it essentially includes an entire term-
-       cap compiler in the ncurses startup code, at significant cost  in  core
-       and startup cycles.
+       feature  is  not  recommended,  as  it  essentially  includes an entire
+       termcap compiler in the ncurses startup code, at  significant  cost  in
+       core and startup cycles.
 
        The  ncurses  library includes facilities for capturing mouse events on
        certain terminals (including xterm).   See  the  curs_mouse(3x)  manual
        page for details.
 
-       The ncurses library includes facilities for responding to window resiz-
-       ing events, e.g., when running in an xterm.  See the resizeterm(3x) and
-       wresize(3x)  manual pages for details.  In addition, the library may be
-       configured with a SIGWINCH handler.
+       The  ncurses  library  includes  facilities  for  responding  to window
+       resizing  events,  e.g.,  when  running   in   an   xterm.    See   the
+       resizeterm(3x)  and wresize(3x) manual pages for details.  In addition,
+       the library may be configured with a SIGWINCH handler.
 
        The ncurses library extends the fixed set of function key  capabilities
        of  terminals by allowing the application designer to define additional
@@ -1296,21 +1296,21 @@
 
        The  ncurses  library  can  exploit the capabilities of terminals which
        implement the ISO-6429 SGR 39 and  SGR  49  controls,  which  allow  an
-       application  to reset the terminal to its original foreground and back-
-       ground colors.  From the users' perspective, the application is able to
-       draw  colored  text  on  a background whose color is set independently,
-       providing better control over color contrasts.   See  the  default_col-
-       ors(3x) manual page for details.
-
-       The  ncurses library includes a function for directing application out-
-       put  to  a  printer  attached  to  the  terminal   device.    See   the
+       application  to  reset  the  terminal  to  its  original foreground and
+       background colors.  From the users'  perspective,  the  application  is
+       able  to  draw  colored  text  on  a  background  whose  color  is  set
+       independently, providing better control over color contrasts.  See  the
+       default_colors(3x) manual page for details.
+
+       The  ncurses  library  includes  a  function  for directing application
+       output  to  a  printer  attached  to  the  terminal  device.   See  the
        curs_print(3x) manual page for details.

PORTABILITY

        The  ncurses  library  is intended to be BASE-level conformant with XSI
-       Curses.  The EXTENDED XSI Curses functionality  (including  color  sup-
-       port) is supported.
+       Curses.   The  EXTENDED  XSI  Curses  functionality  (including   color
+       support) is supported.
 
        A  small  number  of local differences (that is, individual differences
        between the XSI Curses and ncurses calls) are described in  PORTABILITY
@@ -1321,13 +1321,13 @@
        In  many cases, X/Open Curses is vague about error conditions, omitting
        some of the SVr4 documentation.
 
-       Unlike other implementations, this one checks parameters such as point-
-       ers  to WINDOW structures to ensure they are not null.  The main reason
-       for providing this behavior is to guard against programmer error.   The
-       standard  interface  does  not provide a way for the library to tell an
-       application which of several possible errors were detected.  Relying on
-       this (or some other) extension will adversely affect the portability of
-       curses applications.
+       Unlike other  implementations,  this  one  checks  parameters  such  as
+       pointers  to  WINDOW  structures to ensure they are not null.  The main
+       reason for providing this  behavior  is  to  guard  against  programmer
+       error.   The  standard interface does not provide a way for the library
+       to tell an application which of several possible errors were  detected.
+       Relying  on  this  (or  some other) extension will adversely affect the
+       portability of curses applications.

Extensions versus portability

@@ -1346,18 +1346,18 @@
            are they present in SVr4.  See the curs_mouse(3x) manual  page  for
            details.
 
-       o   The  routine  mcprint was not present in any previous curses imple-
-           mentation.  See the curs_print(3x) manual page for details.
+       o   The  routine  mcprint  was  not  present  in  any  previous  curses
+           implementation.  See the curs_print(3x) manual page for details.
 
        o   The routine wresize is not part of XPG4, nor is it present in SVr4.
            See the wresize(3x) manual page for details.
 
-       o   The WINDOW structure's internal details can be hidden from applica-
-           tion programs.  See curs_opaque(3x) for the discussion of is_scrol-
-           lok, etc.
+       o   The   WINDOW  structure's  internal  details  can  be  hidden  from
+           application programs.  See curs_opaque(3x) for  the  discussion  of
+           is_scrollok, etc.
 
-       o   This  implementation  can be configured to provide rudimentary sup-
-           port for multi-threaded  applications.   See  curs_threads(3x)  for
+       o   This  implementation  can  be  configured  to  provide  rudimentary
+           support for multi-threaded applications.  See curs_threads(3x)  for
            details.
 
        o   This  implementation  can  also  be  configured to provide a set of
@@ -1369,8 +1369,8 @@
        In  historic  curses  versions, delays embedded in the capabilities cr,
        ind, cub1, ff and tab activated corresponding delay bits  in  the  UNIX
        tty driver.  In this implementation, all padding is done by sending NUL
-       bytes.  This method is slightly more expensive, but narrows the  inter-
-       face  to  the  UNIX  kernel  significantly  and increases the package's
+       bytes.  This  method  is  slightly  more  expensive,  but  narrows  the
+       interface  to the UNIX kernel significantly and increases the package's
        portability correspondingly.
 
 
@@ -1407,8 +1407,8 @@
 
            As a result, standard <curses.h> will always include <stdio.h>.
 
-       o   X/Open Curses is inconsistent with respect to SVr4 regarding  <unc-
-           trl.h>.
+       o   X/Open Curses  is  inconsistent  with  respect  to  SVr4  regarding
+           <unctrl.h>.
 
            As   noted  in  curs_util(3x),  ncurses  includes  <unctrl.h>  from
            <curses.h> (like SVr4).
@@ -1441,14 +1441,14 @@
 
            For instance, in ncurses <wchar.h> may be included  if  the  proper
            symbol  is defined, and if ncurses is configured for wide-character
-           support.  If the header is included, its symbols may be made  visi-
-           ble.  That depends on the value used for _XOPEN_SOURCE feature test
-           macro.
+           support.  If the header  is  included,  its  symbols  may  be  made
+           visible.   That depends on the value used for _XOPEN_SOURCE feature
+           test macro.
 
        o   X/Open Curses documents one required header,  in  a  special  case:
            <stdarg.h>   before  <curses.h>  to  prototype  the  vw_printw  and
-           vw_scanw functions (as well as the obsolete the vwprintw  and  vws-
-           canw functions).  Each of those uses a va_list parameter.
+           vw_scanw functions (as  well  as  the  obsolete  the  vwprintw  and
+           vwscanw functions).  Each of those uses a va_list parameter.
 
            The  two  obsolete  functions  were  introduced in SVr3.  The other
            functions were introduced  in  X/Open  Curses.   In  between,  SVr4
diff --git a/doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html b/doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html
index 8db75851..2ad91d50 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html
@@ -97,15 +97,15 @@
 
        --terminfo
               echos the $TERMINFO terminfo database path, e.g.,
-              /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo
+              /usr/share/terminfo
 
        --terminfo-dirs
               echos the $TERMINFO_DIRS directory list, e.g.,
-              /usr/local/ncurses/share/terminfo:/usr/share/terminfo
+              /usr/share/terminfo
 
        --termpath
-              echos the $TERMPATH termcap list, if support for termcap is con-
-              figured.
+              echos the $TERMPATH termcap list,  if  support  for  termcap  is
+              configured.
 
        --help prints this message
 
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/new_pair.3x.html b/doc/html/man/new_pair.3x.html
index 515f982d..28c9988c 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/new_pair.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/new_pair.3x.html
@@ -61,26 +61,26 @@

DESCRIPTION

        These functions are an extension to the curses library.  They permit an
-       application to dynamically  allocate  a  color  pair  using  the  fore-
-       ground/background  colors rather than assign a fixed color pair number,
-       and return an unused pair to the pool.
+       application  to  dynamically  allocate   a   color   pair   using   the
+       foreground/background  colors  rather  than  assign  a fixed color pair
+       number, and return an unused pair to the pool.
 
        The number of colors may be related to the  number  of  possible  color
        pairs for a given terminal, or it may not:
 
-       o   While almost all terminals allow setting the color attributes inde-
-           pendently, it is unlikely that your terminal allows you  to  modify
-           the  attributes  of  a  given  character cell without rewriting it.
-           That is, the foreground and background  colors  are  applied  as  a
+       o   While  almost  all  terminals  allow  setting  the color attributes
+           independently, it is unlikely that  your  terminal  allows  you  to
+           modify  the  attributes of a given character cell without rewriting
+           it.  That is, the foreground and background colors are applied as a
            pair.
 
-       o   Color  pairs  are the curses library's way of managing a color pal-
-           ette on a terminal.  If the library does not keep track of the com-
-           binations of colors which are displayed, it will be inefficient.
+       o   Color  pairs  are  the  curses  library's  way  of managing a color
+           palette on a terminal.  If the library does not keep track  of  the
+           combinations of colors which are displayed, it will be inefficient.
 
-       o   For  simple terminal emulators with only a few dozen color combina-
-           tions, it is convenient to use the maximum number  of  combinations
-           as the limit on color pairs:
+       o   For   simple  terminal  emulators  with  only  a  few  dozen  color
+           combinations, it  is  convenient  to  use  the  maximum  number  of
+           combinations as the limit on color pairs:
 
                COLORS * COLORS
 
@@ -93,8 +93,8 @@
            a predefined color scheme.
 
            Beyond  that lies in the realm of programs using the foreground and
-           background colors for "ASCII art" (or some other non-textual appli-
-           cation).
+           background colors  for  "ASCII  art"  (or  some  other  non-textual
+           application).
 
            Also beyond those few dozen pairs, the required size for a table to
            represent the combinations grows rapidly with an increasing  number
@@ -105,9 +105,9 @@

alloc_pair

-       The alloc_pair function accepts parameters  for  foreground  and  back-
-       ground  color,  and checks if that color combination is already associ-
-       ated with a color pair.
+       The  alloc_pair  function  accepts  parameters   for   foreground   and
+       background  color,  and  checks  if  that  color combination is already
+       associated with a color pair.
 
        o   If the combination already exists, alloc_pair returns the  existing
            pair.
@@ -115,21 +115,21 @@
        o   If the combination does not exist, alloc_pair allocates a new color
            pair and returns that.
 
-       o   If the table fills up, alloc_pair discards the least-recently allo-
-           cated entry using free_pair and allocates a new color pair.
+       o   If the table  fills  up,  alloc_pair  discards  the  least-recently
+           allocated entry using free_pair and allocates a new color pair.
 
        All  of  the  color  pairs are allocated from a table of possible color
-       pairs.  The size of the table is determined by the terminfo pairs capa-
-       bility.   The  table is shared with init_pair; in fact alloc_pair calls
-       init_pair after updating the ncurses library's fast index to the colors
-       versus color pairs.
+       pairs.  The size of the table  is  determined  by  the  terminfo  pairs
+       capability.   The  table  is  shared with init_pair; in fact alloc_pair
+       calls init_pair after updating the ncurses library's fast index to  the
+       colors versus color pairs.

find_pair

        The find_pair function accepts parameters for foreground and background
        color, and checks if that color combination is already associated  with
-       a color pair, returning the pair number if it has been allocated.  Oth-
-       erwise it returns -1.
+       a  color  pair,  returning  the  pair  number if it has been allocated.
+       Otherwise it returns -1.

free_pair

diff --git a/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html b/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html
index 1ea51a03..e27dd5f4 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html
@@ -100,11 +100,11 @@

DESCRIPTION

        Panels  are  curses(3x) windows with the added feature of depth.  Panel
-       functions allow the use of stacked windows and ensure the  proper  por-
-       tions  of  each  window and the curses stdscr window are hidden or dis-
-       played when panels are added, moved, modified or removed.  The  set  of
-       currently  visible panels is the stack of panels.  The stdscr window is
-       beneath all panels, and is not considered part of the stack.
+       functions allow the use  of  stacked  windows  and  ensure  the  proper
+       portions  of  each  window  and  the curses stdscr window are hidden or
+       displayed when panels are added, moved, modified or removed.   The  set
+       of  currently visible panels is the stack of panels.  The stdscr window
+       is beneath all panels, and is not considered part of the stack.
 
        A window is associated with every panel.  The panel routines enable you
        to  create, move, hide, and show panels, as well as position a panel at
@@ -125,8 +125,8 @@

del_panel

-       del_panel(pan)  removes the given panel pan from the  stack and deallo-
-       cates the PANEL structure (but not its associated window).
+       del_panel(pan)  removes  the  given  panel  pan  from  the   stack  and
+       deallocates the PANEL structure (but not its associated window).

ground_panel

@@ -213,8 +213,8 @@

DIAGNOSTICS

        Each routine that returns a pointer returns NULL if  an  error  occurs.
-       Each  routine  that returns an int value returns OK if it executes suc-
-       cessfully and ERR if not.
+       Each  routine  that  returns  an  int  value  returns OK if it executes
+       successfully and ERR if not.
 
        Except as noted, the pan and window parameters must  be  non-null.   If
        those are null, an error is returned.
@@ -227,16 +227,16 @@
        Reasonable care has been taken  to   ensure   compatibility  with   the
        native   panel  facility introduced in System V (inspection of the SVr4
        manual pages suggests the programming  interface  is  unchanged).   The
-       PANEL  data  structures  are  merely  similar.  The  programmer is cau-
-       tioned not to directly use PANEL fields.
+       PANEL   data  structures  are  merely   similar.   The   programmer  is
+       cautioned not to directly use PANEL fields.
 
-       The functions show_panel and top_panel are identical in this  implemen-
-       tation,  and work equally well with displayed or hidden panels.  In the
-       native System V implementation, show_panel is  intended  for  making  a
-       hidden  panel  visible  (at  the  top  of  the  stack) and top_panel is
-       intended for making an already-visible panel move to  the  top  of  the
-       stack.  You are cautioned to use the correct function to ensure compat-
-       ibility with native panel libraries.
+       The  functions  show_panel  and  top_panel  are   identical   in   this
+       implementation,  and work equally well with displayed or hidden panels.
+       In the native System  V  implementation,  show_panel  is  intended  for
+       making  a  hidden panel visible (at the top of the stack) and top_panel
+       is intended for making an already-visible panel move to the top of  the
+       stack.   You  are  cautioned  to  use  the  correct  function to ensure
+       compatibility with native panel libraries.

NOTE

@@ -281,13 +281,13 @@

SEE ALSO

        curses(3x), curs_variables(3x),
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).

AUTHOR

-       Originally  written by Warren Tucker <wht@n4hgf.mt-park.ga.us>, primar-
-       ily to assist in porting u386mon to systems  without  a  native  panels
-       library.
+       Originally   written   by   Warren   Tucker  <wht@n4hgf.mt-park.ga.us>,
+       primarily to assist in porting u386mon  to  systems  without  a  native
+       panels library.
 
        Repackaged for ncurses by Zeyd ben-Halim.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html b/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html
index 244bfd70..66b807d4 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html
@@ -62,8 +62,8 @@

DESCRIPTION

        This is an extension to the curses library.  It provides callers with a
-       hook into the ncurses data to resize windows, primarily for use by pro-
-       grams running in an X Window terminal (e.g., xterm).
+       hook  into  the  ncurses  data  to resize windows, primarily for use by
+       programs running in an X Window terminal (e.g., xterm).

resizeterm

@@ -102,15 +102,15 @@

RETURN VALUE

        Except  as  noted,  these functions return the integer ERR upon failure
        and OK on success.  They will fail if either of the dimensions are less
-       than  or equal to zero, or if an error occurs while (re)allocating mem-
-       ory for the windows.
+       than  or  equal  to  zero,  or  if an error occurs while (re)allocating
+       memory for the windows.

NOTES

-       While these functions are intended to be used to support a signal  han-
-       dler  (i.e., for SIGWINCH), care should be taken to avoid invoking them
-       in a context where malloc or realloc may have been  interrupted,  since
-       it uses those functions.
+       While these functions are intended to  be  used  to  support  a  signal
+       handler  (i.e.,  for  SIGWINCH), care should be taken to avoid invoking
+       them in a context where malloc or realloc may  have  been  interrupted,
+       since it uses those functions.
 
        If ncurses is configured to supply its own SIGWINCH handler,
 
@@ -132,9 +132,9 @@
            resize the ncurses data structures.
 
        If the environment variables LINES or COLUMNS are set,  this  overrides
-       the  library's  use of the window size obtained from the operating sys-
-       tem.  Thus, even if a SIGWINCH is received, no screen size  change  may
-       be recorded.
+       the  library's  use  of  the  window  size  obtained from the operating
+       system.  Thus, even if a SIGWINCH is received, no  screen  size  change
+       may be recorded.

PORTABILITY

diff --git a/doc/html/man/scr_dump.5.html b/doc/html/man/scr_dump.5.html
index e73ebc08..f1527c8b 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/scr_dump.5.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/scr_dump.5.html
@@ -60,8 +60,8 @@
        read it back using scr_restore or getwin.
 
        The  putwin  and  getwin  functions  do  the  work;  while scr_dump and
-       scr_restore conveniently save and restore the whole screen, i.e.,  std-
-       scr.
+       scr_restore conveniently save  and  restore  the  whole  screen,  i.e.,
+       stdscr.

ncurses6

@@ -72,8 +72,8 @@
            allowing  applications  (such  as file(1)) to recognize curses dump
            files.
 
-           Because ncurses6 uses a new format, that requires a new magic  num-
-           ber  was  unused  by  other  applications.   This 16-bit number was
+           Because ncurses6 uses a new  format,  that  requires  a  new  magic
+           number  was  unused  by other applications.  This 16-bit number was
            unused:
 
                0x8888 (octal "\210\210")
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@
 
                0x88888888 (octal "\210\210\210\210")
 
-           This is the pattern submitted to the maintainers of the  file  pro-
-           gram:
+           This is the pattern  submitted  to  the  maintainers  of  the  file
+           program:
 
                #
                # ncurses5 (and before) did not use a magic number,
@@ -95,17 +95,17 @@
 
        o   The screen dumps are written in textual form, so that internal data
            sizes are not directly related to the dump-format, and enabling the
-           library  to  read dumps from either narrow- or wide-character- con-
-           figurations.
+           library  to  read  dumps  from  either  narrow-  or wide-character-
+           configurations.
 
            The  narrow  library  configuration  holds  characters  and   video
            attributes  in  a  32-bit  chtype, while the wide-character library
            stores this information in the cchar_t  structure,  which  is  much
            larger than 32-bits.
 
-       o   It is possible to read a screen dump into a terminal with a differ-
-           ent screen-size, because the library truncates or fills the  screen
-           as necessary.
+       o   It  is  possible  to  read  a  screen  dump  into a terminal with a
+           different screen-size, because the library truncates or  fills  the
+           screen as necessary.
 
        o   The ncurses6 getwin reads the legacy screen dumps from ncurses5.
 
@@ -139,8 +139,8 @@
        X/Open's documentation for enhanced curses says only:
 
           The getwin( ) function reads window-related data stored in the  file
-          by  putwin( ).  The function then creates and initializes a new win-
-          dow using that data.
+          by  putwin( ).   The  function  then  creates  and initializes a new
+          window using that data.
 
           The putwin( ) function writes all data associated with win into  the
           stdio  stream  to  which  filep points, using an unspecified format.
@@ -157,17 +157,17 @@
               for applications originally written to be  compiled  on  systems
               based  on  the  UNIX  operating system.  Therefore, the features
               described may not be present on systems that conform to XPG4  or
-              to  earlier XPG releases.  The relevant reference pages may pro-
-              vide additional or more specific portability warnings about  use
-              of the material.
+              to  earlier  XPG  releases.   The  relevant  reference pages may
+              provide additional or more specific portability  warnings  about
+              use of the material.
 
        In  the foregoing, emphasis was added to unspecified format and to XPG4
        or to earlier XPG releases, for clarity.

Unix SystemV

-       Unix SystemV curses identified the file format by writing a "magic num-
-       ber"  at  the  beginning of the dump.  The WINDOW data and the lines of
+       Unix SystemV curses identified the file  format  by  writing  a  "magic
+       number" at the beginning of the dump.  The WINDOW data and the lines of
        text follow, all in binary form.
 
        The Solaris curses source has these definitions:
@@ -198,9 +198,10 @@
        be seen using od(1), none of the Unix systems documents the format used
        for screen-dumps.
 
-       The Unix systems do not use identical formats.  While collecting infor-
-       mation  for  for this manual page, the savescreen test-program produced
-       dumps of different size (all on 64-bit hardware, on 40x80 screens):
+       The Unix systems  do  not  use  identical  formats.   While  collecting
+       information  for  for  this  manual  page,  the savescreen test-program
+       produced dumps of different size (all  on  64-bit  hardware,  on  40x80
+       screens):
 
        o   AIX (51817 bytes)
 
@@ -212,27 +213,27 @@

Solaris

-       As noted above, Solaris curses has no  magic  number  corresponding  to
-       SVr4  curses.  This is odd since Solaris was the first operating system
+       As  noted  above,  Solaris  curses has no magic number corresponding to
+       SVr4 curses.  This is odd since Solaris was the first operating  system
        to pass the SVr4 guidelines.  Solaris has two versions of curses:
 
        o   The default curses library uses the SVr3 magic number.
 
-       o   There is an alternate curses library in  /usr/xpg4.   This  uses  a
+       o   There  is  an  alternate  curses library in /usr/xpg4.  This uses a
            textual format with no magic number.
 
-           According  to the copyright notice, the xpg4 Solaris curses library
+           According to the copyright notice, the xpg4 Solaris curses  library
            was developed by MKS (Mortice Kern Systems) from 1990 to 1995.
 
-           Like ncurses6, there is  a  file-header  with  parameters.   Unlike
-           ncurses6,  the  contents  of the window are written piecemeal, with
-           coordinates and attributes for each chunk of text rather than writ-
-           ing the whole window from top to bottom.
+           Like  ncurses6,  there  is  a  file-header with parameters.  Unlike
+           ncurses6, the contents of the window are  written  piecemeal,  with
+           coordinates  and  attributes  for  each  chunk  of text rather than
+           writing the whole window from top to bottom.

PDCurses

-       PDCurses  added  support  for screen dumps in version 2.7 (2005).  Like
-       Unix SystemV and ncurses5, it writes the WINDOW  structure  in  binary,
+       PDCurses added support for screen dumps in version  2.7  (2005).   Like
+       Unix  SystemV  and  ncurses5, it writes the WINDOW structure in binary,
        but begins the file with its three-byte identifier "PDC", followed by a
        one-byte version, e.g.,
 
@@ -243,7 +244,7 @@
        As  of  April  2017,  NetBSD  curses  does  not  support  scr_dump  and
        scr_restore (or scr_init, scr_set), although it has putwin and getwin.
 
-       Like  ncurses5, NetBSD putwin does not identify its dumps with a useful
+       Like ncurses5, NetBSD putwin does not identify its dumps with a  useful
        magic number.  It writes
 
        o   the curses shared library major and minor versions as the first two
@@ -251,14 +252,14 @@
 
        o   followed by a binary dump of the WINDOW,
 
-       o   some  data  for wide-characters referenced by the WINDOW structure,
+       o   some data for wide-characters referenced by the  WINDOW  structure,
            and
 
        o   finally, lines as done by other implementations.

EXAMPLE

-       Given a simple program which writes text to the  screen  (and  for  the
+       Given  a  simple  program  which writes text to the screen (and for the
        sake of example, limiting the screen-size to 10x20):
 
            #include <curses.h>
@@ -316,13 +317,13 @@
 
        o   The actual color pair values are not written to the file.
 
-       o   All characters are shown in printable  form;  spaces  are  "\s"  to
+       o   All  characters  are  shown  in  printable form; spaces are "\s" to
            ensure they are not overlooked.
 
-       o   Attributes  are  written  in escaped curly braces, e.g., "\{BOLD}",
+       o   Attributes are written in escaped curly  braces,  e.g.,  "\{BOLD}",
            and may include a color-pair (C1 or C2 in this example).
 
-       o   The parameters in the header are  written  out  only  if  they  are
+       o   The  parameters  in  the  header  are  written out only if they are
            nonzero.  When reading back, order does not matter.
 
        Running the same program with Solaris xpg4 curses gives this dump:
@@ -361,13 +362,13 @@
            9,19,0,0,
            CUR=11,5
 
-       Solaris  getwin  requires  that  all parameters are present, and in the
-       same order.  The xpg4 curses library does not know about the bce  (back
+       Solaris getwin requires that all parameters are  present,  and  in  the
+       same  order.  The xpg4 curses library does not know about the bce (back
        color erase) capability, and does not color the window background.
 
-       On  the  other  hand, the SVr4 curses library does know about the back-
-       ground color.  However, its screen dumps are in binary.   Here  is  the
-       corresponding dump (using "od -t x1"):
+       On the other  hand,  the  SVr4  curses  library  does  know  about  the
+       background  color.   However,  its screen dumps are in binary.  Here is
+       the corresponding dump (using "od -t x1"):
 
            0000000 1c 01 c3 d6 f3 58 05 00 0b 00 0a 00 14 00 00 00
            0000020 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
diff --git a/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html b/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html
index eef9befc..23cedfdc 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: tabs.1,v 1.27 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: tabs.1,v 1.28 2020/12/19 21:50:22 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -63,20 +63,21 @@
            stty tab0
 
        Like clear(1), tabs writes to the standard output.   You  can  redirect
-       the standard output to a file (which prevents tabs from actually chang-
-       ing the tabstops), and later cat the file to the screen,  setting  tab-
-       stops at that point.
-
-       These  are  hardware  tabs, which cannot be queried rapidly by applica-
-       tions running in the terminal, if at all.  Curses and other full-screen
-       applications  may  use  hardware tabs in optimizing their output to the
-       terminal.  If the hardware tabstops differ from the information in  the
-       terminal  database, the result is unpredictable.  Before running curses
-       programs, you should either reset tab-stops to the standard interval
+       the  standard  output  to  a  file  (which  prevents tabs from actually
+       changing the tabstops), and later cat the file to the  screen,  setting
+       tabstops at that point.
+
+       These   are   hardware   tabs,  which  cannot  be  queried  rapidly  by
+       applications running in the terminal, if  at  all.   Curses  and  other
+       full-screen  applications  may  use  hardware  tabs in optimizing their
+       output to the terminal.  If  the  hardware  tabstops  differ  from  the
+       information  in  the  terminal  database,  the result is unpredictable.
+       Before running curses programs, you should either  reset  tab-stops  to
+       the standard interval
 
            tabs -8
 
-       or use the reset program, since the normal initialization sequences  do
+       or  use the reset program, since the normal initialization sequences do
        not ensure that tab-stops are reset.
 
 
@@ -84,29 +85,29 @@

General Options

        -Tname
-            Tell  tabs  which  terminal  type  to  use.  If this option is not
-            given, tabs will use the $TERM environment variable.  If  that  is
+            Tell tabs which terminal type to  use.   If  this  option  is  not
+            given,  tabs  will use the $TERM environment variable.  If that is
             not set, it will use the ansi+tabs entry.
 
-       -d   The  debugging  option  shows  a  ruler line, followed by two data
-            lines.  The first data line shows the  expected  tab-stops  marked
-            with  asterisks.  The second data line shows the actual tab-stops,
+       -d   The debugging option shows a ruler  line,  followed  by  two  data
+            lines.   The  first  data line shows the expected tab-stops marked
+            with asterisks.  The second data line shows the actual  tab-stops,
             marked with asterisks.
 
-       -n   This option tells tabs to check the options and run any  debugging
+       -n   This  option tells tabs to check the options and run any debugging
             option, but not to modify the terminal settings.
 
        -V   reports the version of ncurses which was used in this program, and
             exits.
 
        The tabs program processes a single list of tab stops.  The last option
-       to  be  processed  which  defines a list is the one that determines the
+       to be processed which defines a list is the  one  that  determines  the
        list to be processed.

Implicit Lists

-       Use a single number as an option, e.g., "-5" to set tabs at  the  given
-       interval  (in  this case 1, 6, 11, 16, 21, etc.).  Tabs are repeated up
+       Use  a  single number as an option, e.g., "-5" to set tabs at the given
+       interval (in this case 1, 6, 11, 16, 21, etc.).  Tabs are  repeated  up
        to the right margin of the screen.
 
        Use "-0" to clear all tabs.
@@ -115,15 +116,15 @@

Explicit Lists

-       An explicit list can be defined after the options (this does not use  a
-       "-").   The values in the list must be in increasing numeric order, and
-       greater than zero.  They are separated by a comma or a blank, for exam-
-       ple,
+       An  explicit list can be defined after the options (this does not use a
+       "-").  The values in the list must be in increasing numeric order,  and
+       greater  than  zero.   They  are  separated  by a comma or a blank, for
+       example,
 
            tabs 1,6,11,16,21
            tabs 1 6 11 16 21
 
-       Use  a  "+"  to treat a number as an increment relative to the previous
+       Use a "+" to treat a number as an increment relative  to  the  previous
        value, e.g.,
 
            tabs 1,+5,+5,+5,+5
@@ -154,59 +155,59 @@

PORTABILITY

-       IEEE  Std  1003.1/The  Open   Group   Base   Specifications   Issue   7
+       IEEE   Std   1003.1/The   Open   Group   Base  Specifications  Issue  7
        (POSIX.1-2008) describes a tabs utility.  However
 
-       o   This  standard describes a +m option, to set a terminal's left-mar-
-           gin.  Very few of the entries in the terminal database provide  the
-           smgl  (set_left_margin)  or smglp (set_left_margin_parm) capability
-           needed to support the feature.
+       o   This standard describes a +m option,  to  set  a  terminal's  left-
+           margin.   Very  few of the entries in the terminal database provide
+           the  smgl   (set_left_margin)   or   smglp   (set_left_margin_parm)
+           capability needed to support the feature.
 
-       o   There is no counterpart in X/Open Curses Issue 7 for this  utility,
+       o   There  is no counterpart in X/Open Curses Issue 7 for this utility,
            unlike tput(1).
 
-       The  -d  (debug)  and -n (no-op) options are extensions not provided by
+       The -d (debug) and -n (no-op) options are extensions  not  provided  by
        other implementations.
 
-       A tabs utility appeared in PWB/Unix 1.0 (1977).  There  was  a  reduced
-       version  of  the  tabs  utility in Unix 7th edition and in 3BSD (1979).
-       The latter supported a single "-n" option (to cause the first tab  stop
+       A  tabs  utility  appeared in PWB/Unix 1.0 (1977).  There was a reduced
+       version of the tabs utility in Unix 7th edition  and  in  3BSD  (1979).
+       The  latter supported a single "-n" option (to cause the first tab stop
        to be set on the left margin).  That option is not documented by POSIX.
 
-       The  PWB/Unix  tabs  utility,  which was included in System III (1980),
-       used built-in tables rather than the terminal database,  to  support  a
-       half-dozen  terminal  types.  It also had built-in logic to support the
-       left-margin, as well as a feature for copying the tab settings  from  a
+       The PWB/Unix tabs utility, which was included  in  System  III  (1980),
+       used  built-in  tables  rather than the terminal database, to support a
+       half-dozen terminal types.  It also had built-in logic to  support  the
+       left-margin,  as  well as a feature for copying the tab settings from a
        file.
 
-       Later  versions  of  Unix,  e.g.,  SVr4, added support for the terminal
-       database, but kept the tables, as a fallback.  In an  earlier  develop-
-       ment  effort,  the  tab-stop initialization provided by tset (1982) and
-       incorporated into tput uses the terminal database,
+       Later versions of Unix, e.g., SVr4,  added  support  for  the  terminal
+       database,   but  kept  the  tables,  as  a  fallback.   In  an  earlier
+       development effort, the tab-stop initialization provided by tset (1982)
+       and incorporated into tput uses the terminal database,
 
-       POSIX documents no limits on the number of  tab  stops.   Documentation
+       POSIX  documents  no  limits on the number of tab stops.  Documentation
        for other implementations states that there is a limit on the number of
-       tab stops (e.g., 20 in PWB/Unix's tabs utility).  While some  terminals
-       may  not  accept  an arbitrary number of tab stops, this implementation
-       will attempt to set tab stops up to the right margin of the screen,  if
+       tab  stops (e.g., 20 in PWB/Unix's tabs utility).  While some terminals
+       may not accept an arbitrary number of tab  stops,  this  implementation
+       will  attempt to set tab stops up to the right margin of the screen, if
        the given list happens to be that long.
 
-       The  Rationale section of the POSIX documentation goes into some detail
-       about the ways the committee considered redesigning the tabs  and  tput
+       The Rationale section of the POSIX documentation goes into some  detail
+       about  the  ways the committee considered redesigning the tabs and tput
        utilities, without proposing an improved solution.  It comments that
 
-            no  known  historical  version  of tabs supports the capability of
+            no known historical version of tabs  supports  the  capability  of
             setting arbitrary tab stops.
 
-       However, the Explicit Lists described in this manual page  were  imple-
-       mented  in  PWB/Unix.  Those provide the capability of setting abitrary
-       tab stops.
+       However,  the  Explicit  Lists  described  in  this  manual  page  were
+       implemented in PWB/Unix.   Those  provide  the  capability  of  setting
+       abitrary tab stops.

SEE ALSO

-       tset(1), infocmp(1m), curses(3x), terminfo(5).
+       infocmp(1m), tset(1), curses(3x), terminfo(5).
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/term.5.html b/doc/html/man/term.5.html
index eaa8b4a2..03c6b3b6 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/term.5.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/term.5.html
@@ -58,42 +58,41 @@

STORAGE LOCATION

        Compiled   terminfo   descriptions   are  placed  under  the  directory
-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo.   Two  configurations  are   supported
-       (when building the ncurses libraries):
+       /usr/share/terminfo.  Two configurations are supported  (when  building
+       the ncurses libraries):
 
        directory tree
             A two-level scheme is used to avoid a linear search of a huge UNIX
-            system  directory:  /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/c/name   where
-            name  is the name of the terminal, and c is the first character of
-            name.     Thus,    act4    can    be    found    in    the    file
-            /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/a/act4.   Synonyms  for  the  same
-            terminal are implemented by multiple links to  the  same  compiled
-            file.
+            system directory: /usr/share/terminfo/c/name  where  name  is  the
+            name of the terminal, and c is the first character of name.  Thus,
+            act4  can  be  found  in  the   file   /usr/share/terminfo/a/act4.
+            Synonyms  for  the same terminal are implemented by multiple links
+            to the same compiled file.
 
        hashed database
-            Using Berkeley database, two types of records are stored: the ter-
-            minfo data in the same format as stored in a directory  tree  with
-            the  terminfo's primary name as a key, and records containing only
-            aliases pointing to the primary name.
-
-            If built to write hashed databases, ncurses can  still  read  ter-
-            minfo  databases  organized  as a directory tree, but cannot write
-            entries into the  directory  tree.   It  can  write  (or  rewrite)
+            Using Berkeley database, two types  of  records  are  stored:  the
+            terminfo  data  in  the  same format as stored in a directory tree
+            with the terminfo's primary name as a key, and records  containing
+            only aliases pointing to the primary name.
+
+            If  built  to  write  hashed  databases,  ncurses  can  still read
+            terminfo databases organized as a directory tree, but cannot write
+            entries  into  the  directory  tree.   It  can  write (or rewrite)
             entries in the hashed database.
 
-            ncurses  distinguishes  the  two  cases  in  the TERMINFO and TER-
-            MINFO_DIRS environment variable by assuming a directory  tree  for
-            entries that correspond to an existing directory, and hashed data-
-            base otherwise.
+            ncurses  distinguishes  the  two  cases  in   the   TERMINFO   and
+            TERMINFO_DIRS  environment  variable  by assuming a directory tree
+            for entries that correspond to an existing directory,  and  hashed
+            database otherwise.

LEGACY STORAGE FORMAT

        The format has been chosen so that it will be the same on all hardware.
-       An  8 or more bit byte is assumed, but no assumptions about byte order-
-       ing or sign extension are made.
+       An 8 or more bit  byte  is  assumed,  but  no  assumptions  about  byte
+       ordering or sign extension are made.
 
-       The compiled file is created with the tic program, and read by the rou-
-       tine setupterm(3x).  The file is divided into six parts:
+       The  compiled  file  is  created  with the tic program, and read by the
+       routine setupterm(3x).  The file is divided into six parts:
 
             a) header,
 
@@ -107,7 +106,7 @@
 
             f) string table.
 
-       The  header  section  begins the file.  This section contains six short
+       The header section begins the file.  This section  contains  six  short
        integers in the format described below.  These integers are
 
             (1) the magic number (octal 0432);
@@ -122,32 +121,32 @@
 
             (6) the size, in bytes, of the string table.
 
-       The capabilities in the boolean flags, numbers,  and  strings  sections
+       The  capabilities  in  the boolean flags, numbers, and strings sections
        are in the same order as the file <term.h>.
 
-       Short  integers  are  signed,  in  the range -32768 to 32767.  They are
-       stored as two 8-bit bytes.  The first byte contains the least  signifi-
-       cant 8 bits of the value, and the second byte contains the most signif-
-       icant 8 bits.  (Thus, the value represented is 256*second+first.)  This
-       format corresponds to the hardware of the VAX and PDP-11 (that is, lit-
-       tle-endian machines).  Machines where this does not correspond  to  the
-       hardware  must  read  the integers as two bytes and compute the little-
-       endian value.
-
-       Numbers in a terminal description, whether they are entries in the num-
-       bers  or  strings  table,  are  positive  integers.   Boolean flags are
-       treated as positive one-byte integers.  In each  case,  those  positive
-       integers  represent  a  terminal capability.  The terminal compiler tic
-       uses negative integers to handle the cases where a  capability  is  not
+       Short integers are signed, in the range  -32768  to  32767.   They  are
+       stored  as  two  8-bit  bytes.   The  first  byte  contains  the  least
+       significant 8 bits of the value, and the second byte contains the  most
+       significant 8 bits.  (Thus, the value represented is 256*second+first.)
+       This format corresponds to the hardware of the VAX and PDP-11 (that is,
+       little-endian  machines).   Machines  where this does not correspond to
+       the hardware must read the  integers  as  two  bytes  and  compute  the
+       little-endian value.
+
+       Numbers  in  a  terminal  description,  whether they are entries in the
+       numbers or strings table, are positive  integers.   Boolean  flags  are
+       treated  as  positive  one-byte integers.  In each case, those positive
+       integers represent a terminal capability.  The  terminal  compiler  tic
+       uses  negative  integers  to handle the cases where a capability is not
        available:
 
-       o   If  a  capability  is absent from this terminal, tic stores a -1 in
+       o   If a capability is absent from this terminal, tic stores  a  -1  in
            the corresponding table.
 
            The integer value -1 is represented by two bytes 0377, 0377.
            Absent boolean values are represented by the byte 0 (false).
 
-       o   If a capability has been canceled from this terminal, tic stores  a
+       o   If  a capability has been canceled from this terminal, tic stores a
            -2 in the corresponding table.
 
            The integer value -2 is represented by two bytes 0377, 0376.
@@ -155,50 +154,50 @@
 
        o   Other negative values are illegal.
 
-       The  terminal  names  section  comes after the header.  It contains the
-       first line of the terminfo description, listing the various  names  for
-       the  terminal, separated by the "|" character.  The terminal names sec-
-       tion is terminated with an ASCII NUL character.
+       The terminal names section comes after the  header.   It  contains  the
+       first  line  of the terminfo description, listing the various names for
+       the terminal, separated by  the  "|"  character.   The  terminal  names
+       section is terminated with an ASCII NUL character.
 
-       The boolean flags section has one byte for each flag.  Boolean capabil-
-       ities are either 1 or 0 (true or false) according to whether the termi-
-       nal supports the given capability or not.
+       The  boolean  flags  section  has  one  byte  for  each  flag.  Boolean
+       capabilities are either 1 or 0 (true or false) according to whether the
+       terminal supports the given capability or not.
 
-       Between the boolean flags section and the number section, a  null  byte
-       will  be  inserted,  if  necessary,  to  ensure that the number section
-       begins on an even byte This is a relic of the  PDP-11's  word-addressed
-       architecture,  originally designed to avoid traps induced by addressing
-       a word on an odd byte boundary.  All short integers are  aligned  on  a
+       Between  the  boolean flags section and the number section, a null byte
+       will be inserted, if necessary,  to  ensure  that  the  number  section
+       begins  on  an even byte This is a relic of the PDP-11's word-addressed
+       architecture, originally designed to avoid traps induced by  addressing
+       a  word  on  an odd byte boundary.  All short integers are aligned on a
        short word boundary.
 
-       The  numbers  section  is  similar  to the boolean flags section.  Each
-       capability takes up two bytes, and is stored as a  little-endian  short
+       The numbers section is similar to  the  boolean  flags  section.   Each
+       capability  takes  up two bytes, and is stored as a little-endian short
        integer.
 
-       The  strings  section  is also similar.  Each capability is stored as a
+       The strings section is also similar.  Each capability is  stored  as  a
        short integer.  The capability value is an index into the string table.
 
        The string table is the last section.  It contains all of the values of
-       string  capabilities referenced in the strings section.  Each string is
+       string capabilities referenced in the strings section.  Each string  is
        null-terminated.  Special characters in ^X or \c notation are stored in
-       their  interpreted  form,  not  the  printing  representation.  Padding
-       information $<nn> and parameter information %x  are  stored  intact  in
+       their interpreted  form,  not  the  printing  representation.   Padding
+       information  $<nn>  and  parameter  information %x are stored intact in
        uninterpreted form.

EXTENDED STORAGE FORMAT

        The previous section describes the conventional terminfo binary format.
-       With some minor variations of the offsets (see PORTABILITY),  the  same
-       binary  format  is used in all modern UNIX systems.  Each system uses a
+       With  some  minor variations of the offsets (see PORTABILITY), the same
+       binary format is used in all modern UNIX systems.  Each system  uses  a
        predefined set of boolean, number or string capabilities.
 
        The ncurses libraries and applications support extended terminfo binary
-       format,  allowing users to define capabilities which are loaded at run-
-       time.  This extension is made possible by using the fact that the other
-       implementations  stop  reading the terminfo data when they have reached
-       the end of the size given in the header.  ncurses checks the size,  and
-       if  it  exceeds  that  due  to  the predefined data, continues to parse
-       according to its own scheme.
+       format, allowing users to  define  capabilities  which  are  loaded  at
+       runtime.   This  extension  is made possible by using the fact that the
+       other implementations stop reading the terminfo  data  when  they  have
+       reached  the  end  of the size given in the header.  ncurses checks the
+       size, and if it exceeds that due to the predefined data,  continues  to
+       parse according to its own scheme.
 
        First, it reads the extended header (5 short integers):
 
@@ -212,103 +211,103 @@
 
             (5)  size of the extended string table in bytes
 
-       The count- and size-values for the extended string  table  include  the
+       The  count-  and  size-values for the extended string table include the
        extended capability names as well as extended capability values.
 
        Using the counts and sizes, ncurses allocates arrays and reads data for
        the extended capabilities in the same order as the header information.
 
-       The extended string table  contains  values  for  string  capabilities.
-       After  the  end  of these values, it contains the names for each of the
-       extended capabilities  in  order,  e.g.,  booleans,  then  numbers  and
+       The  extended  string  table  contains  values for string capabilities.
+       After the end of these values, it contains the names for  each  of  the
+       extended  capabilities  in  order,  e.g.,  booleans,  then  numbers and
        finally strings.
 
-       Applications  which  manipulate  terminal  data can use the definitions
-       described in term_variables(3x) which  associate  the  long  capability
+       Applications which manipulate terminal data  can  use  the  definitions
+       described  in  term_variables(3x)  which  associate the long capability
        names with members of a TERMTYPE structure.

EXTENDED NUMBER FORMAT

        On occasion, 16-bit signed integers are not large enough.  With ncurses
-       6.1, a new format was introduced by making a few changes to the  legacy
+       6.1,  a new format was introduced by making a few changes to the legacy
        format:
 
        o   a different magic number (octal 01036)
 
-       o   changing  the type for the number array from signed 16-bit integers
+       o   changing the type for the number array from signed 16-bit  integers
            to signed 32-bit integers.
 
-       To maintain compatibility, the library presents the  same  data  struc-
-       tures to direct users of the TERMTYPE structure as in previous formats.
-       However, that cannot provide callers with the  extended  numbers.   The
-       library  uses  a similar but hidden data structure TERMTYPE2 to provide
-       data for the terminfo functions.
+       To   maintain   compatibility,  the  library  presents  the  same  data
+       structures to direct users of the TERMTYPE  structure  as  in  previous
+       formats.   However,  that  cannot  provide  callers  with  the extended
+       numbers.   The  library  uses  a  similar  but  hidden  data  structure
+       TERMTYPE2 to provide data for the terminfo functions.

PORTABILITY

setupterm

-       Note that it is possible for setupterm to expect  a  different  set  of
-       capabilities  than  are actually present in the file.  Either the data-
-       base may have been updated since setupterm has been recompiled (result-
-       ing  in extra unrecognized entries in the file) or the program may have
-       been recompiled more recently than the database was updated  (resulting
-       in  missing  entries).  The routine setupterm must be prepared for both
-       possibilities - this is why the numbers and sizes are included.   Also,
-       new  capabilities must always be added at the end of the lists of bool-
-       ean, number, and string capabilities.
+       Note  that  it  is  possible for setupterm to expect a different set of
+       capabilities than  are  actually  present  in  the  file.   Either  the
+       database  may  have  been  updated  since setupterm has been recompiled
+       (resulting in extra unrecognized entries in the file)  or  the  program
+       may  have  been  recompiled more recently than the database was updated
+       (resulting in missing entries).  The routine setupterm must be prepared
+       for  both  possibilities  -  this  is  why  the  numbers  and sizes are
+       included.  Also, new capabilities must always be added at  the  end  of
+       the lists of boolean, number, and string capabilities.

Binary format

-       X/Open Curses does not specify a  format  for  the  terminfo  database.
-       UNIX  System  V  curses  used a directory-tree of binary files, one per
+       X/Open  Curses  does  not  specify  a format for the terminfo database.
+       UNIX System V curses used a directory-tree of  binary  files,  one  per
        terminal description.
 
-       Despite the consistent use of little-endian for numbers and the  other-
-       wise  self-describing format, it is not wise to count on portability of
-       binary terminfo entries between commercial UNIX versions.  The  problem
-       is  that  there  are  at least three versions of terminfo (under HP-UX,
-       AIX, and OSF/1) which diverged from System V terminfo after  SVr1,  and
-       have  added  extension  capabilities  to  the string table that (in the
-       binary format) collide with System V and XSI  Curses  extensions.   See
-       terminfo(5)  for  detailed  discussion of terminfo source compatibility
-       issues.
-
-       This implementation is by default compatible with the  binary  terminfo
-       format  used by Solaris curses, except in a few less-used details where
-       it was found that the latter did not match X/Open Curses.   The  format
+       Despite  the  consistent  use  of  little-endian  for  numbers  and the
+       otherwise  self-describing  format,  it  is  not  wise  to   count   on
+       portability   of   binary  terminfo  entries  between  commercial  UNIX
+       versions.  The problem is that there are at  least  three  versions  of
+       terminfo  (under  HP-UX,  AIX,  and OSF/1) which diverged from System V
+       terminfo after SVr1, and  have  added  extension  capabilities  to  the
+       string  table that (in the binary format) collide with System V and XSI
+       Curses extensions.  See terminfo(5) for detailed discussion of terminfo
+       source compatibility issues.
+
+       This  implementation  is by default compatible with the binary terminfo
+       format used by Solaris curses, except in a few less-used details  where
+       it  was  found that the latter did not match X/Open Curses.  The format
        used by the other Unix versions can be matched by building ncurses with
        different configuration options.

Magic codes

-       The magic number in a binary terminfo file is the  first  16-bits  (two
-       bytes).   Besides making it more reliable for the library to check that
-       a file is terminfo, utilities such as file also use that to  tell  what
-       the  file-format is.  System V defined more than one magic number, with
+       The  magic  number  in a binary terminfo file is the first 16-bits (two
+       bytes).  Besides making it more reliable for the library to check  that
+       a  file  is terminfo, utilities such as file also use that to tell what
+       the file-format is.  System V defined more than one magic number,  with
        0433, 0435 as screen-dumps (see scr_dump(5)).  This implementation uses
-       01036  as  a  continuation of that sequence, but with a different high-
+       01036 as a continuation of that sequence, but with  a  different  high-
        order byte to avoid confusion.

The TERMTYPE structure

-       Direct access to the TERMTYPE structure is provided for legacy applica-
-       tions.   Portable  applications  should  use  the tigetflag and related
-       functions described in curs_terminfo(3x) for reading terminal capabili-
-       ties.
+       Direct  access  to  the  TERMTYPE  structure  is  provided  for  legacy
+       applications.  Portable  applications  should  use  the  tigetflag  and
+       related  functions  described in curs_terminfo(3x) for reading terminal
+       capabilities.

Mixed-case terminal names

-       A  small  number  of  terminal descriptions use uppercase characters in
-       their names.  If  the  underlying  filesystem  ignores  the  difference
-       between  uppercase and lowercase, ncurses represents the "first charac-
-       ter" of the terminal name used as the intermediate level of a directory
-       tree in (two-character) hexadecimal form.
+       A small number of terminal descriptions  use  uppercase  characters  in
+       their  names.   If  the  underlying  filesystem  ignores the difference
+       between  uppercase  and  lowercase,  ncurses  represents   the   "first
+       character"  of  the  terminal  name used as the intermediate level of a
+       directory tree in (two-character) hexadecimal form.

EXAMPLE

-       As an example, here is a description for the Lear-Siegler ADM-3, a pop-
-       ular though rather stupid early terminal:
+       As an example, here is a description  for  the  Lear-Siegler  ADM-3,  a
+       popular though rather stupid early terminal:
 
            adm3a|lsi adm3a,
                    am,
@@ -348,23 +347,22 @@

LIMITS

        Some limitations:
 
-       o   total compiled entries cannot exceed 4096 bytes in the legacy  for-
-           mat.
+       o   total  compiled  entries  cannot  exceed  4096  bytes in the legacy
+           format.
 
-       o   total  compiled  entries  cannot exceed 32768 bytes in the extended
+       o   total compiled entries cannot exceed 32768 bytes  in  the  extended
            format.
 
        o   the name field cannot exceed 128 bytes.
 
-       Compiled entries are limited to 32768 bytes because  offsets  into  the
-       strings table use two-byte integers.  The legacy format could have sup-
-       ported 32768-byte entries, but was limited a virtual memory page's 4096
-       bytes.
+       Compiled  entries  are  limited to 32768 bytes because offsets into the
+       strings table use two-byte integers.   The  legacy  format  could  have
+       supported  32768-byte  entries, but was limited a virtual memory page's
+       4096 bytes.

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/*/*     compiled   terminal  capability
-       data base
+       /usr/share/terminfo/*/*  compiled terminal capability data base

SEE ALSO

diff --git a/doc/html/man/term.7.html b/doc/html/man/term.7.html
index 25653c5d..7a6a2965 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/term.7.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/term.7.html
@@ -58,8 +58,8 @@
 
        A default TERM value  will  be  set  on  a  per-line  basis  by  either
        /etc/inittab  (e.g.,  System-V-like  UNIXes) or /etc/ttys (BSD UNIXes).
-       This will nearly always suffice for workstation and microcomputer  con-
-       soles.
+       This will nearly  always  suffice  for  workstation  and  microcomputer
+       consoles.
 
        If  you  use a dialup line, the type of device attached to it may vary.
        Older UNIX systems pre-set a very dumb terminal  type  like  "dumb"  or
@@ -69,10 +69,10 @@
 
        Modern  telnets pass your TERM environment variable from the local side
        to the remote one.  There can be problems if  the  remote  terminfo  or
-       termcap entry for your type is not compatible with yours, but this sit-
-       uation is rare and can almost always be avoided by explicitly exporting
-       "vt100"  (assuming you are in fact using a VT100-superset console, ter-
-       minal, or terminal emulator.)
+       termcap  entry  for  your  type  is not compatible with yours, but this
+       situation is rare and  can  almost  always  be  avoided  by  explicitly
+       exporting  "vt100"  (assuming  you  are  in fact using a VT100-superset
+       console, terminal, or terminal emulator.)
 
        In any case, you are free to override the system TERM setting  to  your
        taste in your shell profile.  The tset(1) utility may be of assistance;
@@ -85,84 +85,83 @@
        line.
 
        Terminal type descriptions are  stored  as  files  of  capability  data
-       underneath  /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo.   To  browse a list of all
-       terminal names recognized by the system, do
+       underneath /usr/share/terminfo.  To browse a list of all terminal names
+       recognized by the system, do
 
             toe | more
 
-       from your shell.  These capability files are in a binary  format  opti-
-       mized  for  retrieval  speed  (unlike the old text-based termcap format
-       they replace); to examine an entry, you must use the  infocmp(1m)  com-
-       mand.  Invoke it as follows:
+       from your shell.   These  capability  files  are  in  a  binary  format
+       optimized for retrieval speed (unlike the old text-based termcap format
+       they replace); to examine  an  entry,  you  must  use  the  infocmp(1m)
+       command.  Invoke it as follows:
 
             infocmp entry_name
 
        where  entry_name  is the name of the type you wish to examine (and the
-       name    of    its    capability    file     the     subdirectory     of
-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo named for its first letter).  This com-
-       mand dumps a capability file in  the  text  format  described  by  ter-
-       minfo(5).
+       name of its capability file  the  subdirectory  of  /usr/share/terminfo
+       named  for  its first letter).  This command dumps a capability file in
+       the text format described by terminfo(5).
 
-       The  first  line  of a terminfo(5) description gives the names by which
-       terminfo knows a terminal, separated by "|" (pipe-bar) characters  with
+       The first line of a terminfo(5) description gives the  names  by  which
+       terminfo  knows a terminal, separated by "|" (pipe-bar) characters with
        the last name field terminated by a comma.  The first name field is the
        type's primary name, and is the one to use when setting TERM.  The last
-       name  field  (if  distinct from the first) is actually a description of
-       the terminal type (it may contain blanks; the  others  must  be  single
-       words).   Name  fields  between  the  first  and  last (if present) are
-       aliases for the terminal, usually historical names retained for compat-
-       ibility.
-
-       There  are  some  conventions  for how to choose terminal primary names
-       that help keep them informative and unique.   Here  is  a  step-by-step
+       name field (if distinct from the first) is actually  a  description  of
+       the  terminal  type  (it  may contain blanks; the others must be single
+       words).  Name fields between  the  first  and  last  (if  present)  are
+       aliases  for  the  terminal,  usually  historical  names  retained  for
+       compatibility.
+
+       There are some conventions for how to  choose  terminal  primary  names
+       that  help  keep  them  informative and unique.  Here is a step-by-step
        guide to naming terminals that also explains how to parse them:
 
-       First,  choose a root name.  The root will consist of a lower-case let-
-       ter followed by up to seven lower-case letters or digits.  You need  to
-       avoid using punctuation characters in root names, because they are used
-       and interpreted as filenames and shell meta-characters (such as  !,  $,
-       *, ?, etc.) embedded in them may cause odd and unhelpful behavior.  The
-       slash (/), or any other character that may be interpreted  by  anyone's
-       file  system  (\,  $, [, ]), is especially dangerous (terminfo is plat-
-       form-independent, and choosing  names  with  special  characters  could
-       someday  make  life difficult for users of a future port).  The dot (.)
-       character is relatively safe as long as there is at most one  per  root
+       First, choose a root name.  The  root  will  consist  of  a  lower-case
+       letter  followed by up to seven lower-case letters or digits.  You need
+       to avoid using punctuation characters in root names, because  they  are
+       used and interpreted as filenames and shell meta-characters (such as !,
+       $, *, ?, etc.) embedded in them may cause odd and  unhelpful  behavior.
+       The  slash  (/),  or  any  other  character  that may be interpreted by
+       anyone's file system (\, $, [, ]), is especially dangerous (terminfo is
+       platform-independent,  and choosing names with special characters could
+       someday make life difficult for users of a future port).  The  dot  (.)
+       character  is  relatively safe as long as there is at most one per root
        name; some historical terminfo names use it.
 
-       The  root name for a terminal or workstation console type should almost
-       always begin with a vendor prefix (such as hp for  Hewlett-Packard,  wy
-       for  Wyse, or att for AT&T terminals), or a common name of the terminal
-       line (vt for the VT series of  terminals  from  DEC,  or  sun  for  Sun
-       Microsystems  workstation  consoles,  or  regent  for  the  ADDS Regent
-       series.  You can list the  terminfo  tree  to  see  what  prefixes  are
-       already  in  common  use.  The root name prefix should be followed when
+       The root name for a terminal or workstation console type should  almost
+       always  begin  with a vendor prefix (such as hp for Hewlett-Packard, wy
+       for Wyse, or att for AT&T terminals), or a common name of the  terminal
+       line  (vt  for  the  VT  series  of  terminals from DEC, or sun for Sun
+       Microsystems workstation  consoles,  or  regent  for  the  ADDS  Regent
+       series.   You  can  list  the  terminfo  tree  to see what prefixes are
+       already in common use.  The root name prefix should  be  followed  when
        appropriate by a model number; thus vt100, hp2621, wy50.
 
-       The root name for a PC-Unix console type should be the OS  name,  i.e.,
-       linux,  bsdos,  freebsd, netbsd.  It should not be console or any other
+       The  root  name for a PC-Unix console type should be the OS name, i.e.,
+       linux, bsdos, freebsd, netbsd.  It should not be console or  any  other
        generic that might cause confusion in a multi-platform environment!  If
-       a  model number follows, it should indicate either the OS release level
+       a model number follows, it should indicate either the OS release  level
        or the console driver release level.
 
-       The root name for a terminal emulator (assuming it does not fit one  of
-       the standard ANSI or vt100 types) should be the program name or a read-
-       ily recognizable abbreviation of it (i.e., versaterm, ctrm).
+       The  root name for a terminal emulator (assuming it does not fit one of
+       the standard ANSI or vt100 types) should  be  the  program  name  or  a
+       readily recognizable abbreviation of it (i.e., versaterm, ctrm).
 
-       Following the root name, you may add any reasonable number  of  hyphen-
+       Following  the  root name, you may add any reasonable number of hyphen-
        separated feature suffixes.
 
        2p   Has two pages of memory.  Likewise 4p, 8p, etc.
 
-       mc   Magic-cookie.   Some terminals (notably older Wyses) can only sup-
-            port one attribute without magic-cookie lossage.  Their base entry
-            is usually paired with another that has this suffix and uses magic
-            cookies to support multiple attributes.
+       mc   Magic-cookie.  Some  terminals  (notably  older  Wyses)  can  only
+            support  one  attribute  without magic-cookie lossage.  Their base
+            entry is usually paired with another that has this suffix and uses
+            magic cookies to support multiple attributes.
 
        -am  Enable auto-margin (right-margin wraparound).
 
        -m   Mono mode - suppress color support.
 
-       -na  No arrow keys - termcap ignores  arrow  keys  which  are  actually
+       -na  No  arrow  keys  -  termcap  ignores arrow keys which are actually
             there on the terminal, so the user can use the arrow keys locally.
 
        -nam No auto-margin - suppress am capability.
@@ -181,19 +180,19 @@
 
        -w   Wide; terminal is in 132-column mode.
 
-       Conventionally,  if your terminal type is a variant intended to specify
-       a line height, that suffix should go first.   So,  for  a  hypothetical
-       FuBarCo  model  2317  terminal in 30-line mode with reverse video, best
+       Conventionally, if your terminal type is a variant intended to  specify
+       a  line  height,  that  suffix should go first.  So, for a hypothetical
+       FuBarCo model 2317 terminal in 30-line mode with  reverse  video,  best
        form would be fubar-30-rv (rather than, say, "fubar-rv-30").
 
-       Terminal types that are written not as standalone entries,  but  rather
-       as  components  to  be plugged into other entries via use capabilities,
+       Terminal  types  that are written not as standalone entries, but rather
+       as components to be plugged into other entries  via  use  capabilities,
        are distinguished by using embedded plus signs rather than dashes.
 
        Commands which use a terminal type to control display often accept a -T
-       option  that  accepts  a  terminal name argument.  Such programs should
-       fall back on the TERM environment variable when no -T option is  speci-
-       fied.
+       option that accepts a terminal name  argument.   Such  programs  should
+       fall  back  on  the  TERM  environment  variable  when  no -T option is
+       specified.

PORTABILITY

@@ -202,7 +201,7 @@

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/?/*
+       /usr/share/terminfo/?/*
             compiled terminal capability data base
 
        /etc/inittab
diff --git a/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html b/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html
index 26169c13..bea6cf97 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.99 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.100 2020/12/19 21:51:22 tom Exp @
   *.in -2
   *.in +2
   *.in -2
@@ -91,48 +91,50 @@

SYNOPSIS

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/*/*
+       /usr/share/terminfo/*/*

DESCRIPTION

        Terminfo  is  a data base describing terminals, used by screen-oriented
-       programs such as nvi(1), lynx(1), mutt(1), and  other  curses  applica-
-       tions,  using  high-level calls to libraries such as curses(3x).  It is
-       also used via low-level calls by non-curses applications which  may  be
-       screen-oriented (such as clear(1)) or non-screen (such as tabs(1)).
+       programs  such  as  nvi(1),  lynx(1),   mutt(1),   and   other   curses
+       applications,  using  high-level calls to libraries such as curses(3x).
+       It is also used via low-level calls by  non-curses  applications  which
+       may  be  screen-oriented  (such  as  clear(1))  or  non-screen (such as
+       tabs(1)).
 
        Terminfo describes terminals by giving a set of capabilities which they
        have, by specifying how to perform screen operations, and by specifying
        padding requirements and initialization sequences.
 
-       This manual describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This manual describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).

Terminfo Entry Syntax

        Entries in terminfo consist of a sequence of fields:
 
-       o   Each  field  ends  with a comma "," (embedded commas may be escaped
+       o   Each field ends with a comma "," (embedded commas  may  be  escaped
            with a backslash or written as "\054").
 
        o   White space between fields is ignored.
 
        o   The first field in a terminfo entry begins in the first column.
 
-       o   Newlines and leading whitespace (spaces or tabs) may  be  used  for
-           formatting  entries for readability.  These are removed from parsed
+       o   Newlines  and  leading  whitespace (spaces or tabs) may be used for
+           formatting entries for readability.  These are removed from  parsed
            entries.
 
-           The infocmp -f and -W options rely on this to  format  if-then-else
-           expressions,  or to enforce maximum line-width.  The resulting for-
-           matted terminal description can be read by tic.
+           The  infocmp  -f and -W options rely on this to format if-then-else
+           expressions, or  to  enforce  maximum  line-width.   The  resulting
+           formatted terminal description can be read by tic.
 
-       o   The first field for each terminal gives the names which  are  known
+       o   The  first  field for each terminal gives the names which are known
            for the terminal, separated by "|" characters.
 
-           The first name given is the most common abbreviation for the termi-
-           nal (its primary name), the last name given should be a  long  name
-           fully  identifying  the terminal (see longname(3x)), and all others
-           are treated as synonyms (aliases) for the primary terminal name.
+           The first name given  is  the  most  common  abbreviation  for  the
+           terminal  (its  primary name), the last name given should be a long
+           name fully identifying the terminal  (see  longname(3x)),  and  all
+           others  are  treated as synonyms (aliases) for the primary terminal
+           name.
 
            X/Open Curses advises that all names but  the  last  should  be  in
            lower  case  and  contain no blanks; the last name may well contain
@@ -143,20 +145,20 @@
            it allows that to be both an alias and a  verbose  name  (but  will
            warn about this ambiguity).
 
-       o   Lines  beginning with a "#" in the first column are treated as com-
-           ments.
+       o   Lines  beginning  with  a  "#"  in  the first column are treated as
+           comments.
 
            While comment lines are legal at any point, the output of captoinfo
            and  infotocap  (aliases  for tic) will move comments so they occur
            only between entries.
 
        Terminal names (except for the last, verbose entry)  should  be  chosen
-       using the following conventions.  The particular piece of hardware mak-
-       ing up the terminal should have a root name, thus "hp2621".  This  name
-       should not contain hyphens.  Modes that the hardware can be in, or user
-       preferences, should be indicated by appending a hyphen and a mode  suf-
-       fix.  Thus, a vt100 in 132-column mode would be vt100-w.  The following
-       suffixes should be used where possible:
+       using  the  following  conventions.   The  particular piece of hardware
+       making up the terminal should have a root name,  thus  "hp2621".   This
+       name should not contain hyphens.  Modes that the hardware can be in, or
+       user preferences, should be indicated by appending a hyphen and a  mode
+       suffix.   Thus,  a  vt100  in  132-column  mode  would be vt100-w.  The
+       following suffixes should be used where possible:
 
             Suffix                  Meaning                   Example
             -nn      Number of lines on the screen            aaa-60
@@ -178,8 +180,8 @@

Terminfo Capabilities Syntax

        The terminfo entry consists of  several  capabilities,  i.e.,  features
-       that  the  terminal  has, or methods for exercising the terminal's fea-
-       tures.
+       that  the  terminal  has,  or  methods  for  exercising  the terminal's
+       features.
 
        After the first field (giving the name(s) of the terminal entry), there
        should be one or more capability fields.  These are boolean, numeric or
@@ -206,9 +208,9 @@

Similar Terminals

        If there are two very similar  terminals,  one  (the  variant)  can  be
-       defined  as  being  just  like the other (the base) with certain excep-
-       tions.  In the definition of the variant, the string capability use can
-       be given with the name of the base terminal:
+       defined   as  being  just  like  the  other  (the  base)  with  certain
+       exceptions.  In the definition of the variant,  the  string  capability
+       use can be given with the name of the base terminal:
 
        o   The  capabilities  given before use override those in the base type
            named by use.
@@ -220,9 +222,9 @@
        o   Capabilities given explicitly in the entry override  those  brought
            in by use references.
 
-       A capability can be canceled by placing xx@ to the left of the use ref-
-       erence that imports it, where xx is the capability.  For  example,  the
-       entry
+       A  capability  can  be  canceled  by placing xx@ to the left of the use
+       reference that imports it, where xx is the  capability.   For  example,
+       the entry
 
               2621-nl, smkx@, rmkx@, use=2621,
 
@@ -248,8 +250,8 @@
        used by a person updating the database.   Whenever  possible,  capnames
        are chosen to be the same as or similar to the ANSI X3.64-1979 standard
        (now superseded by  ECMA-48,  which  uses  identical  or  very  similar
-       names).   Semantics  are also intended to match those of the specifica-
-       tion.
+       names).    Semantics   are   also   intended  to  match  those  of  the
+       specification.
 
        The termcap code is the old termcap capability name (some  capabilities
        are new, and have names which termcap did not originate).
@@ -281,49 +283,53 @@
 
                   Variable            Cap-      TCap       Description
                   Booleans            name      Code
-          auto_left_margin            bw        bw     cub1 wraps from col-
-                                                       umn 0 to last column
-          auto_right_margin           am        am     terminal has auto-
-                                                       matic margins
 
+
+
+          auto_left_margin            bw        bw     cub1 wraps from
+                                                       column 0 to last
+                                                       column
+          auto_right_margin           am        am     terminal has
+                                                       automatic margins
           back_color_erase            bce       ut     screen erased with
                                                        background color
           can_change                  ccc       cc     terminal can re-
-                                                       define existing col-
-                                                       ors
+                                                       define existing
+                                                       colors
           ceol_standout_glitch        xhp       xs     standout not erased
                                                        by overwriting (hp)
           col_addr_glitch             xhpa      YA     only positive motion
                                                        for hpa/mhpa caps
           cpi_changes_res             cpix      YF     changing character
-                                                       pitch changes reso-
-                                                       lution
+                                                       pitch changes
+                                                       resolution
           cr_cancels_micro_mode       crxm      YB     using cr turns off
                                                        micro mode
           dest_tabs_magic_smso        xt        xt     tabs destructive,
                                                        magic so char
                                                        (t1061)
           eat_newline_glitch          xenl      xn     newline ignored
-                                                       after 80 cols (con-
-                                                       cept)
-          erase_overstrike            eo        eo     can erase over-
-                                                       strikes with a blank
+                                                       after 80 cols
+                                                       (concept)
+          erase_overstrike            eo        eo     can erase
+                                                       overstrikes with a
+                                                       blank
           generic_type                gn        gn     generic line type
           hard_copy                   hc        hc     hardcopy terminal
           hard_cursor                 chts      HC     cursor is hard to
                                                        see
           has_meta_key                km        km     Has a meta key
                                                        (i.e., sets 8th-bit)
-          has_print_wheel             daisy     YC     printer needs opera-
-                                                       tor to change char-
-                                                       acter set
+          has_print_wheel             daisy     YC     printer needs
+                                                       operator to change
+                                                       character set
           has_status_line             hs        hs     has extra status
                                                        line
           hue_lightness_saturation    hls       hl     terminal uses only
                                                        HLS color notation
                                                        (Tektronix)
-          insert_null_glitch          in        in     insert mode distin-
-                                                       guishes nulls
+          insert_null_glitch          in        in     insert mode
+                                                       distinguishes nulls
           lpi_changes_res             lpix      YG     changing line pitch
                                                        changes resolution
           memory_above                da        da     display may be
@@ -345,13 +351,13 @@
                                                        not exist
           non_dest_scroll_region      ndscr     ND     scrolling region is
                                                        non-destructive
+
           non_rev_rmcup               nrrmc     NR     smcup does not
                                                        reverse rmcup
-          over_strike                 os        os     terminal can over-
-                                                       strike
+          over_strike                 os        os     terminal can
+                                                       overstrike
           prtr_silent                 mc5i      5i     printer will not
                                                        echo on screen
-
           row_addr_glitch             xvpa      YD     only positive motion
                                                        for vpa/mvpa caps
           semi_auto_right_margin      sam       YE     printing in last
@@ -411,24 +417,24 @@
        with SVr4's printer support.
 
 
+
                   Variable            Cap-      TCap       Description
                    Numeric            name      Code
           bit_image_entwining         bitwin    Yo     number of passes for
                                                        each bit-image row
           bit_image_type              bitype    Yp     type of bit-image
                                                        device
-
           buffer_capacity             bufsz     Ya     numbers of bytes
                                                        buffered before
                                                        printing
           buttons                     btns      BT     number of buttons on
                                                        mouse
-          dot_horz_spacing            spinh     Yc     spacing of dots hor-
-                                                       izontally in dots
+          dot_horz_spacing            spinh     Yc     spacing of dots
+                                                       horizontally in dots
+                                                       per inch
+          dot_vert_spacing            spinv     Yb     spacing of pins
+                                                       vertically in pins
                                                        per inch
-          dot_vert_spacing            spinv     Yb     spacing of pins ver-
-                                                       tically in pins per
-                                                       inch
           max_micro_address           maddr     Yd     maximum value in
                                                        micro_..._address
           max_micro_jump              mjump     Ye     maximum value in
@@ -439,18 +445,19 @@
                                                        in micro mode
           number_of_pins              npins     Yh     numbers of pins in
                                                        print-head
-          output_res_char             orc       Yi     horizontal resolu-
-                                                       tion in units per
-                                                       line
-          output_res_horz_inch        orhi      Yk     horizontal resolu-
-                                                       tion in units per
-                                                       inch
+          output_res_char             orc       Yi     horizontal
+                                                       resolution in units
+                                                       per line
+          output_res_horz_inch        orhi      Yk     horizontal
+                                                       resolution in units
+                                                       per inch
           output_res_line             orl       Yj     vertical resolution
                                                        in units per line
           output_res_vert_inch        orvi      Yl     vertical resolution
                                                        in units per inch
-          print_rate                  cps       Ym     print rate in char-
-                                                       acters per second
+          print_rate                  cps       Ym     print rate in
+                                                       characters per
+                                                       second
           wide_char_size              widcs     Yn     character step size
                                                        when in double wide
                                                        mode
@@ -475,15 +482,15 @@
                                                        lines per inch to #1
           change_res_horz             chr       ZC     Change horizontal
                                                        resolution to #1
-          change_res_vert             cvr       ZD     Change vertical res-
-                                                       olution to #1
+
+
+          change_res_vert             cvr       ZD     Change vertical
+                                                       resolution to #1
           change_scroll_region        csr       cs     change region to
                                                        line #1 to line #2
                                                        (P)
           char_padding                rmp       rP     like ip but when in
                                                        insert mode
-
-
           clear_all_tabs              tbc       ct     clear all tab stops
                                                        (P)
           clear_margins               mgc       MC     clear right and left
@@ -503,17 +510,18 @@
                                                        prototype !?
           create_window               cwin      CW     define a window #1
                                                        from #2,#3 to #4,#5
-          cursor_address              cup       cm     move to row #1 col-
-                                                       umns #2
+          cursor_address              cup       cm     move to row #1
+                                                       columns #2
           cursor_down                 cud1      do     down one line
           cursor_home                 home      ho     home cursor (if no
                                                        cup)
-          cursor_invisible            civis     vi     make cursor invisi-
-                                                       ble
+          cursor_invisible            civis     vi     make cursor
+                                                       invisible
           cursor_left                 cub1      le     move left one space
-          cursor_mem_address          mrcup     CM     memory relative cur-
-                                                       sor addressing, move
-                                                       to row #1 columns #2
+          cursor_mem_address          mrcup     CM     memory relative
+                                                       cursor addressing,
+                                                       move to row #1
+                                                       columns #2
           cursor_normal               cnorm     ve     make cursor appear
                                                        normal (undo
                                                        civis/cvvis)
@@ -541,23 +549,23 @@
                                                        character set (P)
           enter_am_mode               smam      SA     turn on automatic
                                                        margins
+
           enter_blink_mode            blink     mb     turn on blinking
           enter_bold_mode             bold      md     turn on bold (extra
                                                        bright) mode
-          enter_ca_mode               smcup     ti     string to start pro-
-                                                       grams using cup
+          enter_ca_mode               smcup     ti     string to start
+                                                       programs using cup
           enter_delete_mode           smdc      dm     enter delete mode
           enter_dim_mode              dim       mh     turn on half-bright
                                                        mode
-
           enter_doublewide_mode       swidm     ZF     Enter double-wide
                                                        mode
           enter_draft_quality         sdrfq     ZG     Enter draft-quality
                                                        mode
           enter_insert_mode           smir      im     enter insert mode
           enter_italics_mode          sitm      ZH     Enter italic mode
-          enter_leftward_mode         slm       ZI     Start leftward car-
-                                                       riage motion
+          enter_leftward_mode         slm       ZI     Start leftward
+                                                       carriage motion
           enter_micro_mode            smicm     ZJ     Start micro-motion
                                                        mode
           enter_near_letter_quality   snlq      ZK     Enter NLQ mode
@@ -568,8 +576,8 @@
           enter_reverse_mode          rev       mr     turn on reverse
                                                        video mode
           enter_secure_mode           invis     mk     turn on blank mode
-                                                       (characters invisi-
-                                                       ble)
+                                                       (characters
+                                                       invisible)
           enter_shadow_mode           sshm      ZM     Enter shadow-print
                                                        mode
           enter_standout_mode         smso      so     begin standout mode
@@ -577,20 +585,20 @@
           enter_superscript_mode      ssupm     ZO     Enter superscript
                                                        mode
           enter_underline_mode        smul      us     begin underline mode
-          enter_upward_mode           sum       ZP     Start upward car-
-                                                       riage motion
+          enter_upward_mode           sum       ZP     Start upward
+                                                       carriage motion
           enter_xon_mode              smxon     SX     turn on xon/xoff
                                                        handshaking
           erase_chars                 ech       ec     erase #1 characters
                                                        (P)
-          exit_alt_charset_mode       rmacs     ae     end alternate char-
-                                                       acter set (P)
+          exit_alt_charset_mode       rmacs     ae     end alternate
+                                                       character set (P)
           exit_am_mode                rmam      RA     turn off automatic
                                                        margins
           exit_attribute_mode         sgr0      me     turn off all
                                                        attributes
-          exit_ca_mode                rmcup     te     strings to end pro-
-                                                       grams using cup
+          exit_ca_mode                rmcup     te     strings to end
+                                                       programs using cup
           exit_delete_mode            rmdc      ed     end delete mode
           exit_doublewide_mode        rwidm     ZQ     End double-wide mode
           exit_insert_mode            rmir      ei     exit insert mode
@@ -604,18 +612,19 @@
           exit_subscript_mode         rsubm     ZV     End subscript mode
           exit_superscript_mode       rsupm     ZW     End superscript mode
           exit_underline_mode         rmul      ue     exit underline mode
-          exit_upward_mode            rum       ZX     End reverse charac-
-                                                       ter motion
+          exit_upward_mode            rum       ZX     End reverse
+                                                       character motion
+
+
           exit_xon_mode               rmxon     RX     turn off xon/xoff
                                                        handshaking
-          fixed_pause                 pause     PA     pause for 2-3 sec-
-                                                       onds
+          fixed_pause                 pause     PA     pause for 2-3
+                                                       seconds
           flash_hook                  hook      fh     flash switch hook
           flash_screen                flash     vb     visible bell (may
                                                        not move cursor)
           form_feed                   ff        ff     hardcopy terminal
                                                        page eject (P*)
-
           from_status_line            fsl       fs     return from status
                                                        line
           goto_window                 wingo     WG     go to window #1
@@ -626,8 +635,8 @@
                                                        string
           init_3string                is3       i3     initialization
                                                        string
-          init_file                   if        if     name of initializa-
-                                                       tion file
+          init_file                   if        if     name of
+                                                       initialization file
           init_prog                   iprog     iP     path name of program
                                                        for initialization
           initialize_color            initc     Ic     initialize color #1
@@ -641,15 +650,15 @@
           insert_padding              ip        ip     insert padding after
                                                        inserted character
           key_a1                      ka1       K1     upper left of keypad
-          key_a3                      ka3       K3     upper right of key-
-                                                       pad
+          key_a3                      ka3       K3     upper right of
+                                                       keypad
           key_b2                      kb2       K2     center of keypad
           key_backspace               kbs       kb     backspace key
           key_beg                     kbeg      @1     begin key
           key_btab                    kcbt      kB     back-tab key
           key_c1                      kc1       K4     lower left of keypad
-          key_c3                      kc3       K5     lower right of key-
-                                                       pad
+          key_c3                      kc3       K5     lower right of
+                                                       keypad
           key_cancel                  kcan      @2     cancel key
           key_catab                   ktbc      ka     clear-all-tabs key
           key_clear                   kclr      kC     clear-screen or
@@ -672,6 +681,7 @@
                                                        screen key
           key_exit                    kext      @9     exit key
           key_f0                      kf0       k0     F0 function key
+
           key_f1                      kf1       k1     F1 function key
           key_f10                     kf10      k;     F10 function key
           key_f11                     kf11      F1     F11 function key
@@ -681,7 +691,6 @@
           key_f15                     kf15      F5     F15 function key
           key_f16                     kf16      F6     F16 function key
           key_f17                     kf17      F7     F17 function key
-
           key_f18                     kf18      F8     F18 function key
           key_f19                     kf19      F9     F19 function key
           key_f2                      kf2       k2     F2 function key
@@ -738,6 +747,7 @@
           key_f9                      kf9       k9     F9 function key
           key_find                    kfnd      @0     find key
           key_help                    khlp      %1     help key
+
           key_home                    khome     kh     home key
           key_ic                      kich1     kI     insert-character key
           key_il                      kil1      kA     insert-line key
@@ -747,7 +757,6 @@
           key_mark                    kmrk      %2     mark key
           key_message                 kmsg      %3     message key
           key_move                    kmov      %4     move key
-
           key_next                    knxt      %5     next key
           key_npage                   knp       kN     next-page key
           key_open                    kopn      %6     open key
@@ -768,8 +777,8 @@
           key_scommand                kCMD      *1     shifted command key
           key_scopy                   kCPY      *2     shifted copy key
           key_screate                 kCRT      *3     shifted create key
-          key_sdc                     kDC       *4     shifted delete-char-
-                                                       acter key
+          key_sdc                     kDC       *4     shifted delete-
+                                                       character key
           key_sdl                     kDL       *5     shifted delete-line
                                                        key
           key_select                  kslt      *6     select key
@@ -781,8 +790,8 @@
           key_sfind                   kFND      *0     shifted find key
           key_shelp                   kHLP      #1     shifted help key
           key_shome                   kHOM      #2     shifted home key
-          key_sic                     kIC       #3     shifted insert-char-
-                                                       acter key
+          key_sic                     kIC       #3     shifted insert-
+                                                       character key
           key_sleft                   kLFT      #4     shifted left-arrow
                                                        key
           key_smessage                kMSG      %a     shifted message key
@@ -804,16 +813,17 @@
           key_suspend                 kspd      &7     suspend key
           key_undo                    kund      &8     undo key
           key_up                      kcuu1     ku     up-arrow key
-          keypad_local                rmkx      ke     leave 'key-
-                                                       board_transmit' mode
-          keypad_xmit                 smkx      ks     enter 'key-
-                                                       board_transmit' mode
+
+          keypad_local                rmkx      ke     leave
+                                                       'keyboard_transmit'
+                                                       mode
+          keypad_xmit                 smkx      ks     enter
+                                                       'keyboard_transmit'
+                                                       mode
           lab_f0                      lf0       l0     label on function
                                                        key f0 if not f0
           lab_f1                      lf1       l1     label on function
                                                        key f1 if not f1
-
-
           lab_f10                     lf10      la     label on function
                                                        key f10 if not f10
           lab_f2                      lf2       l2     label on function
@@ -864,22 +874,25 @@
                                                        (P*)
           parm_delete_line            dl        DL     delete #1 lines (P*)
           parm_down_cursor            cud       DO     down #1 lines (P*)
-          parm_down_micro             mcud      Zf     Like parm_down_cur-
-                                                       sor in micro mode
+          parm_down_micro             mcud      Zf     Like
+                                                       parm_down_cursor in
+                                                       micro mode
           parm_ich                    ich       IC     insert #1 characters
                                                        (P*)
+
           parm_index                  indn      SF     scroll forward #1
                                                        lines (P)
           parm_insert_line            il        AL     insert #1 lines (P*)
           parm_left_cursor            cub       LE     move #1 characters
                                                        to the left (P)
-          parm_left_micro             mcub      Zg     Like parm_left_cur-
-                                                       sor in micro mode
+          parm_left_micro             mcub      Zg     Like
+                                                       parm_left_cursor in
+                                                       micro mode
           parm_right_cursor           cuf       RI     move #1 characters
                                                        to the right (P*)
-          parm_right_micro            mcuf      Zh     Like parm_right_cur-
-                                                       sor in micro mode
-
+          parm_right_micro            mcuf      Zh     Like
+                                                       parm_right_cursor in
+                                                       micro mode
           parm_rindex                 rin       SR     scroll back #1 lines
                                                        (P)
           parm_up_cursor              cuu       UP     up #1 lines (P*)
@@ -902,8 +915,8 @@
           prtr_off                    mc4       pf     turn off printer
           prtr_on                     mc5       po     turn on printer
           pulse                       pulse     PU     select pulse dialing
-          quick_dial                  qdial     QD     dial number #1 with-
-                                                       out checking
+          quick_dial                  qdial     QD     dial number #1
+                                                       without checking
           remove_clock                rmclk     RC     remove clock
           repeat_char                 rep       rp     repeat char #1 #2
                                                        times (P*)
@@ -931,6 +944,8 @@
                                                        #1
           set_bottom_margin           smgb      Zk     Set bottom margin at
                                                        current line
+
+
           set_bottom_margin_parm      smgbp     Zl     Set bottom margin at
                                                        line #1 or (if smgtp
                                                        is not given) #2
@@ -941,21 +956,16 @@
                                                        pair to #1
           set_foreground              setf      Sf     Set foreground color
                                                        #1
-
-
-
-
-
           set_left_margin             smgl      ML     set left soft margin
-                                                       at current col-
-                                                       umn.     See smgl.
-                                                       (ML is not in BSD
-                                                       termcap).
+                                                       at current
+                                                       column.     See
+                                                       smgl. (ML is not in
+                                                       BSD termcap).
           set_left_margin_parm        smglp     Zm     Set left (right)
                                                        margin at column #1
-          set_right_margin            smgr      MR     set right soft mar-
-                                                       gin at current col-
-                                                       umn
+          set_right_margin            smgr      MR     set right soft
+                                                       margin at current
+                                                       column
           set_right_margin_parm       smgrp     Zn     Set right margin at
                                                        column #1
           set_tab                     hts       st     set a tab in every
@@ -977,10 +987,12 @@
                                                        image graphics
           stop_char_set_def           rcsd      Zt     End definition of
                                                        character set #1
-          subscript_characters        subcs     Zu     List of subscript-
-                                                       able characters
-          superscript_characters      supcs     Zv     List of superscript-
-                                                       able characters
+          subscript_characters        subcs     Zu     List of
+                                                       subscriptable
+                                                       characters
+          superscript_characters      supcs     Zv     List of
+                                                       superscriptable
+                                                       characters
           tab                         ht        ta     tab to next 8-space
                                                        hardware tab stop
           these_cause_cr              docr      Zw     Printing any of
@@ -999,6 +1011,7 @@
           user3                       u3        u3     User string #3
           user4                       u4        u4     User string #4
           user5                       u5        u5     User string #5
+
           user6                       u6        u6     User string #6
           user7                       u7        u7     User string #7
           user8                       u8        u8     User string #8
@@ -1006,18 +1019,18 @@
           wait_tone                   wait      WA     wait for dial-tone
           xoff_character              xoffc     XF     XOFF character
           xon_character               xonc      XN     XON character
-          zero_motion                 zerom     Zx     No motion for subse-
-                                                       quent character
+          zero_motion                 zerom     Zx     No motion for
+                                                       subsequent character
 
-       The following string capabilities are present in the SVr4.0 term struc-
-       ture, but were originally not documented in the man page.
+       The  following  string  capabilities  are  present  in  the SVr4.0 term
+       structure, but were originally not documented in the man page.
 
 
                   Variable            Cap-       TCap      Description
                    String             name       Code
           alt_scancode_esc            scesa      S8     Alternate escape
-                                                        for scancode emu-
-                                                        lation
+                                                        for scancode
+                                                        emulation
           bit_image_carriage_return   bicr       Yv     Move to beginning
                                                         of same row
           bit_image_newline           binel      Zz     Move to next row
@@ -1025,19 +1038,20 @@
           bit_image_repeat            birep      Xy     Repeat bit image
                                                         cell #1 #2 times
           char_set_names              csnm       Zy     Produce #1'th item
-                                                        from list of char-
-                                                        acter set names
+                                                        from list of
+                                                        character set
+                                                        names
           code_set_init               csin       ci     Init sequence for
                                                         multiple codesets
           color_names                 colornm    Yw     Give name for
                                                         color #1
           define_bit_image_region     defbi      Yx     Define rectangular
                                                         bit image region
-          device_type                 devt       dv     Indicate lan-
-                                                        guage/codeset sup-
-                                                        port
-          display_pc_char             dispc      S1     Display PC charac-
-                                                        ter #1
+          device_type                 devt       dv     Indicate
+                                                        language/codeset
+                                                        support
+          display_pc_char             dispc      S1     Display PC
+                                                        character #1
           end_bit_image_region        endbi      Yy     End a bit-image
                                                         region
           enter_pc_charset_mode       smpch      S2     Enter PC character
@@ -1062,10 +1076,12 @@
                                                         key #1 to type
                                                         string #2 and show
                                                         string #3
+
+
           req_mouse_pos               reqmp      RQ     Request mouse
                                                         position
-          scancode_escape             scesc      S7     Escape for scan-
-                                                        code emulation
+          scancode_escape             scesc      S7     Escape for
+                                                        scancode emulation
           set0_des_seq                s0ds       s0     Shift to codeset 0
                                                         (EUC set 0, ASCII)
           set1_des_seq                s1ds       s1     Shift to codeset 1
@@ -1077,14 +1093,13 @@
           set_a_foreground            setaf      AF     Set foreground
                                                         color to #1, using
                                                         ANSI escape
-
           set_color_band              setcolor   Yz     Change to ribbon
                                                         color #1
           set_lr_margin               smglr      ML     Set both left and
                                                         right margins to
                                                         #1, #2.  (ML is
-                                                        not in BSD term-
-                                                        cap).
+                                                        not in BSD
+                                                        termcap).
           set_page_length             slines     YZ     Set page length to
                                                         #1 lines
           set_tb_margin               smgtb      MT     Sets both top and
@@ -1107,20 +1122,20 @@
                                                        mode
           enter_low_hl_mode           elohlm    Xo     Enter low highlight
                                                        mode
-          enter_right_hl_mode         erhlm     Xr     Enter right high-
-                                                       light mode
+          enter_right_hl_mode         erhlm     Xr     Enter right
+                                                       highlight mode
           enter_top_hl_mode           ethlm     Xt     Enter top highlight
                                                        mode
-          enter_vertical_hl_mode      evhlm     Xv     Enter vertical high-
-                                                       light mode
+          enter_vertical_hl_mode      evhlm     Xv     Enter vertical
+                                                       highlight mode
           set_a_attributes            sgr1      sA     Define second set of
                                                        video attributes
                                                        #1-#6
           set_pglen_inch              slength   YI     Set page length to
                                                        #1 hundredth of an
-                                                       inch (some implemen-
-                                                       tations use sL for
-                                                       termcap).
+                                                       inch (some
+                                                       implementations use
+                                                       sL for termcap).

User-Defined Capabilities

@@ -1130,15 +1145,15 @@
        which  are awkward or impossible to represent by reusing the predefined
        capabilities.
 
-       ncurses addresses this limitation by  allowing  user-defined  capabili-
-       ties.  The tic and infocmp programs provide the -x option for this pur-
-       pose.  When -x is set, tic treats unknown capabilities as user-defined.
-       That  is,  if tic encounters a capability name which it does not recog-
-       nize, it infers its type (boolean, number or string)  from  the  syntax
-       and   makes   an   extended  table  entry  for  that  capability.   The
+       ncurses   addresses   this   limitation   by   allowing    user-defined
+       capabilities.   The  tic and infocmp programs provide the -x option for
+       this purpose.  When -x is set, tic treats unknown capabilities as user-
+       defined.   That  is,  if tic encounters a capability name which it does
+       not recognize, it infers its type (boolean, number or string) from  the
+       syntax  and  makes  an  extended  table entry for that capability.  The
        use_extended_names(3x) function makes  this  information  conditionally
-       available to applications.  The ncurses library provides the data leav-
-       ing most of the behavior to applications:
+       available  to  applications.   The  ncurses  library  provides the data
+       leaving most of the behavior to applications:
 
        o   User-defined capability strings whose  name  begins  with  "k"  are
            treated as function keys.
@@ -1149,21 +1164,21 @@
        o   If the capability name happens to be two characters, the capability
            is also available through the termcap interface.
 
-       While termcap is said to be extensible because it does not use a prede-
-       fined set of capabilities, in practice it has been limited to the capa-
-       bilities  defined by terminfo implementations.  As a rule, user-defined
-       capabilities intended for use by termcap applications should be limited
-       to  booleans  and  numbers  to  avoid  running past the 1023 byte limit
-       assumed by termcap implementations and their applications.  In particu-
-       lar,  providing  extended  sets  of function keys (past the 60 numbered
-       keys and the handful of special named keys)  is  best  done  using  the
-       longer names available using terminfo.
+       While  termcap  is  said  to  be  extensible  because it does not use a
+       predefined set of capabilities, in practice it has been limited to  the
+       capabilities  defined  by  terminfo  implementations.  As a rule, user-
+       defined capabilities intended for use by termcap applications should be
+       limited  to  booleans  and  numbers to avoid running past the 1023 byte
+       limit assumed by termcap implementations and  their  applications.   In
+       particular,  providing  extended  sets  of  function  keys (past the 60
+       numbered keys and the handful of special named keys) is best done using
+       the longer names available using terminfo.

A Sample Entry

-       The following entry, describing an ANSI-standard terminal, is represen-
-       tative of what a terminfo entry for a modern terminal  typically  looks
-       like.
+       The   following   entry,   describing  an  ANSI-standard  terminal,  is
+       representative of what a terminfo entry for a modern terminal typically
+       looks like.
 
        ansi|ansi/pc-term compatible with color,
                am, mc5i, mir, msgr,
@@ -1200,8 +1215,8 @@
        beginning of each line except the first.  Comments may be  included  on
        lines beginning with "#".  Capabilities in terminfo are of three types:
 
-       o   Boolean capabilities which indicate that the terminal has some par-
-           ticular feature,
+       o   Boolean  capabilities  which  indicate  that  the terminal has some
+           particular feature,
 
        o   numeric capabilities giving the size of the terminal or the size of
            particular delays, and
@@ -1218,15 +1233,15 @@
        are followed by the character "#" and  then  a  positive  value.   Thus
        cols, which indicates the number of columns the terminal has, gives the
        value "80" for ansi.  Values for numeric capabilities may be  specified
-       in decimal, octal or hexadecimal, using the C programming language con-
-       ventions (e.g., 255, 0377 and 0xff or 0xFF).
+       in  decimal,  octal  or  hexadecimal,  using the C programming language
+       conventions (e.g., 255, 0377 and 0xff or 0xFF).
 
        Finally, string valued capabilities, such as el (clear to end  of  line
        sequence)  are  given  by  the  two-character  code, an "=", and then a
        string ending at the next following ",".
 
-       A number of escape sequences are provided in the string valued capabil-
-       ities for easy encoding of characters there:
+       A number  of  escape  sequences  are  provided  in  the  string  valued
+       capabilities for easy encoding of characters there:
 
        o   Both \E and \e map to an ESCAPE character,
 
@@ -1268,8 +1283,8 @@
            the compiled terminfo files with other implementations,  e.g.,  the
            SVr4  systems,  which  document  this.  Compiled terminfo files use
            null-terminated strings, with no  lengths.   Modifying  this  would
-           require a new binary format, which would not work with other imple-
-           mentations.
+           require  a  new  binary  format,  which  would  not work with other
+           implementations.
 
        Finally, characters may be given as three octal digits after a \.
 
@@ -1277,8 +1292,8 @@
        enclosed  in  $<..>  brackets, as in el=\EK$<5>, and padding characters
        are supplied by tputs(3x) to provide this delay.
 
-       o   The delay must be a number with at most one decimal place of preci-
-           sion; it may be followed by suffixes "*" or "/" or both.
+       o   The delay must be a number  with  at  most  one  decimal  place  of
+           precision; it may be followed by suffixes "*" or "/" or both.
 
        o   A  "*"  indicates  that the padding required is proportional to the
            number of lines affected by the operation, and the amount given  is
@@ -1300,8 +1315,8 @@

Fetching Compiled Descriptions

        The  ncurses  library  searches  for  terminal  descriptions in several
        places.  It uses only the first description found.  The library  has  a
-       compiled-in  list  of places to search which can be overridden by envi-
-       ronment variables.   Before  starting  to  search,  ncurses  eliminates
+       compiled-in  list  of  places  to  search  which  can  be overridden by
+       environment variables.  Before starting to search,  ncurses  eliminates
        duplicates in its search list.
 
        o   If  the  environment variable TERMINFO is set, it is interpreted as
@@ -1317,90 +1332,89 @@
 
            An empty directory name (i.e., if the variable begins or ends  with
            a  colon, or contains adjacent colons) is interpreted as the system
-           location /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo.
+           location /usr/share/terminfo.
 
        o   Finally, ncurses searches these compiled-in locations:
 
-           o   a   list    of    directories    (/usr/local/ncurses/share/ter-
-               minfo:/usr/share/terminfo), and
+           o   a list of directories (no default value), and
 
-           o   the  system terminfo directory, /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo
-               (the compiled-in default).
+           o   the  system  terminfo   directory,   /usr/share/terminfo   (the
+               compiled-in default).

Preparing Descriptions

-       We now outline how to prepare  descriptions  of  terminals.   The  most
-       effective  way  to  prepare  a terminal description is by imitating the
-       description of a similar  terminal  in  terminfo  and  to  build  up  a
+       We  now  outline  how  to  prepare descriptions of terminals.  The most
+       effective way to prepare a terminal description  is  by  imitating  the
+       description  of  a  similar  terminal  in  terminfo  and  to build up a
        description gradually, using partial descriptions with vi or some other
-       screen-oriented program to check that they are correct.  Be aware  that
-       a  very  unusual terminal may expose deficiencies in the ability of the
+       screen-oriented  program to check that they are correct.  Be aware that
+       a very unusual terminal may expose deficiencies in the ability  of  the
        terminfo file to describe it or bugs in the screen-handling code of the
        test program.
 
-       To  get the padding for insert line right (if the terminal manufacturer
-       did not document it) a severe test is to edit  a  large  file  at  9600
+       To get the padding for insert line right (if the terminal  manufacturer
+       did  not  document  it)  a  severe test is to edit a large file at 9600
        baud, delete 16 or so lines from the middle of the screen, then hit the
        "u" key several times quickly.  If the terminal messes up, more padding
        is usually needed.  A similar test can be used for insert character.

Basic Capabilities

-       The  number  of  columns  on each line for the terminal is given by the
-       cols numeric capability.  If the terminal is a CRT, then the number  of
-       lines  on the screen is given by the lines capability.  If the terminal
-       wraps around to the beginning of the next  line  when  it  reaches  the
-       right  margin,  then it should have the am capability.  If the terminal
-       can clear its screen, leaving the cursor in  the  home  position,  then
-       this  is  given  by the clear string capability.  If the terminal over-
-       strikes (rather than clearing a position when  a  character  is  struck
-       over)  then  it  should  have  the os capability.  If the terminal is a
+       The number of columns on each line for the terminal  is  given  by  the
+       cols  numeric capability.  If the terminal is a CRT, then the number of
+       lines on the screen is given by the lines capability.  If the  terminal
+       wraps  around  to  the  beginning  of the next line when it reaches the
+       right margin, then it should have the am capability.  If  the  terminal
+       can  clear  its  screen,  leaving the cursor in the home position, then
+       this is  given  by  the  clear  string  capability.   If  the  terminal
+       overstrikes (rather than clearing a position when a character is struck
+       over) then it should have the os capability.   If  the  terminal  is  a
        printing terminal, with no soft copy unit, give it both hc and os.  (os
-       applies  to  storage scope terminals, such as TEKTRONIX 4010 series, as
-       well as hard copy and APL terminals.)  If there is a code to  move  the
+       applies to storage scope terminals, such as TEKTRONIX 4010  series,  as
+       well  as  hard copy and APL terminals.)  If there is a code to move the
        cursor to the left edge of the current row, give this as cr.  (Normally
-       this will be carriage return, control/M.)  If there is a code  to  pro-
-       duce an audible signal (bell, beep, etc) give this as bel.
+       this  will  be  carriage  return,  control/M.)   If  there is a code to
+       produce an audible signal (bell, beep, etc) give this as bel.
 
        If there is a code to move the cursor one position to the left (such as
-       backspace) that capability should be given as cub1.   Similarly,  codes
-       to  move  to the right, up, and down should be given as cuf1, cuu1, and
-       cud1.  These local cursor motions should not alter the text  they  pass
-       over,  for  example,  you  would  not normally use "cuf1= " because the
+       backspace)  that  capability should be given as cub1.  Similarly, codes
+       to move to the right, up, and down should be given as cuf1,  cuu1,  and
+       cud1.   These  local cursor motions should not alter the text they pass
+       over, for example, you would not  normally  use  "cuf1= "  because  the
        space would erase the character moved over.
 
        A very important point here is that the local cursor motions encoded in
-       terminfo  are  undefined  at  the left and top edges of a CRT terminal.
+       terminfo are undefined at the left and top edges  of  a  CRT  terminal.
        Programs should never attempt to backspace around the left edge, unless
-       bw  is given, and never attempt to go up locally off the top.  In order
-       to scroll text up, a program will go to the bottom left corner  of  the
+       bw is given, and never attempt to go up locally off the top.  In  order
+       to  scroll  text up, a program will go to the bottom left corner of the
        screen and send the ind (index) string.
 
-       To  scroll  text  down,  a  program  goes to the top left corner of the
+       To scroll text down, a program goes to  the  top  left  corner  of  the
        screen and sends the ri (reverse index) string.  The strings ind and ri
        are undefined when not on their respective corners of the screen.
 
-       Parameterized  versions  of  the  scrolling  sequences are indn and rin
-       which have the same semantics as ind and ri except that they  take  one
-       parameter,  and scroll that many lines.  They are also undefined except
+       Parameterized versions of the scrolling  sequences  are  indn  and  rin
+       which  have  the same semantics as ind and ri except that they take one
+       parameter, and scroll that many lines.  They are also undefined  except
        at the appropriate edge of the screen.
 
-       The am capability tells whether the cursor sticks at the right edge  of
-       the  screen when text is output, but this does not necessarily apply to
-       a cuf1 from the last column.  The only local motion  which  is  defined
-       from  the  left  edge is if bw is given, then a cub1 from the left edge
-       will move to the right edge of the previous row.  If bw is  not  given,
-       the  effect  is undefined.  This is useful for drawing a box around the
+       The  am capability tells whether the cursor sticks at the right edge of
+       the screen when text is output, but this does not necessarily apply  to
+       a  cuf1  from  the last column.  The only local motion which is defined
+       from the left edge is if bw is given, then a cub1 from  the  left  edge
+       will  move  to the right edge of the previous row.  If bw is not given,
+       the effect is undefined.  This is useful for drawing a box  around  the
        edge of the screen, for example.  If the terminal has switch selectable
-       automatic  margins,  the terminfo file usually assumes that this is on;
-       i.e., am.  If the terminal has a command which moves to the first  col-
-       umn  of  the next line, that command can be given as nel (newline).  It
-       does not matter if the command clears  the  remainder  of  the  current
-       line,  so  if the terminal has no cr and lf it may still be possible to
+       automatic margins, the terminfo file usually assumes that this  is  on;
+       i.e.,  am.   If  the  terminal  has  a command which moves to the first
+       column of the next line, that command can be given  as  nel  (newline).
+       It  does  not matter if the command clears the remainder of the current
+       line, so if the terminal has no cr and lf it may still be  possible  to
        craft a working nel out of one or both of them.
 
-       These capabilities suffice to describe hard-copy and "glass-tty" termi-
-       nals.  Thus the model 33 teletype is described as
+       These  capabilities  suffice  to  describe  hard-copy  and  "glass-tty"
+       terminals.  Thus the model 33 teletype is described as
 
        33|tty33|tty|model 33 teletype,
                bel=^G, cols#72, cr=^M, cud1=^J, hc, ind=^J, os,
@@ -1413,28 +1427,28 @@

Parameterized Strings

-       Cursor  addressing and other strings requiring parameters in the termi-
-       nal are described by a parameterized string  capability,  with  printf-
-       like escapes such as %x in it.  For example, to address the cursor, the
-       cup capability is given, using two parameters: the row  and  column  to
-       address  to.  (Rows and columns are numbered from zero and refer to the
-       physical screen visible to the user, not to any unseen memory.)  If the
-       terminal  has  memory relative cursor addressing, that can be indicated
-       by mrcup.
-
-       The parameter mechanism uses a stack and special % codes to  manipulate
-       it.   Typically  a  sequence  will  push one of the parameters onto the
-       stack and then print it in some format.  Print (e.g., "%d") is  a  spe-
-       cial case.  Other operations, including "%t" pop their operand from the
-       stack.  It is noted that more complex operations are  often  necessary,
-       e.g., in the sgr string.
+       Cursor  addressing  and  other  strings  requiring  parameters  in  the
+       terminal  are  described  by  a  parameterized  string capability, with
+       printf-like escapes such as %x in it.   For  example,  to  address  the
+       cursor,  the cup capability is given, using two parameters: the row and
+       column to address to.  (Rows and columns are  numbered  from  zero  and
+       refer  to  the  physical  screen visible to the user, not to any unseen
+       memory.)  If the terminal has memory relative cursor  addressing,  that
+       can be indicated by mrcup.
+
+       The  parameter mechanism uses a stack and special % codes to manipulate
+       it.  Typically a sequence will push one  of  the  parameters  onto  the
+       stack  and  then  print  it  in  some  format.  Print (e.g., "%d") is a
+       special case.  Other operations, including "%t" pop their operand  from
+       the  stack.   It  is  noted  that  more  complex  operations  are often
+       necessary, e.g., in the sgr string.
 
        The % encodings have the following meanings:
 
        %%   outputs "%"
 
        %[[:]flags][width[.precision]][doxXs]
-            as  in  printf(3),  flags are [-+#] and space.  Use a ":" to allow
+            as in printf(3), flags are [-+#] and space.  Use a  ":"  to  allow
             the next character to be a "-" flag, avoiding interpreting "%-" as
             an operator.
 
@@ -1457,9 +1471,9 @@
        %g[A-Z]
             get static variable [a-z] and push it
 
-            The  terms  "static"  and "dynamic" are misleading.  Historically,
+            The terms "static" and "dynamic"  are  misleading.   Historically,
             these are simply two different sets of variables, whose values are
-            not  reset  between calls to tparm(3x).  However, that fact is not
+            not reset between calls to tparm(3x).  However, that fact  is  not
             documented in other implementations.  Relying on it will adversely
             impact portability to other implementations.
 
@@ -1489,8 +1503,8 @@
 
        %? expr %t thenpart %e elsepart %;
             This forms an if-then-else.  The %e elsepart is optional.  Usually
-            the %? expr part pushes a value onto the stack,  and  %t  pops  it
-            from  the  stack,  testing if it is nonzero (true).  If it is zero
+            the  %?  expr  part  pushes a value onto the stack, and %t pops it
+            from the stack, testing if it is nonzero (true).  If  it  is  zero
             (false), control passes to the %e (else) part.
 
             It is possible to form else-if's a la Algol 68:
@@ -1498,127 +1512,128 @@
 
             where ci are conditions, bi are bodies.
 
-            Use the -f option of tic or infocmp to see the  structure  of  if-
+            Use  the  -f  option of tic or infocmp to see the structure of if-
             then-else's.  Some strings, e.g., sgr can be very complicated when
-            written on one line.  The -f option splits the string  into  lines
+            written  on  one line.  The -f option splits the string into lines
             with the parts indented.
 
-       Binary  operations  are  in postfix form with the operands in the usual
-       order.  That is, to get x-5 one would use "%gx%{5}%-".  %P and %g vari-
-       ables are persistent across escape-string evaluations.
+       Binary operations are in postfix form with the operands  in  the  usual
+       order.   That  is,  to  get  x-5  one would use "%gx%{5}%-".  %P and %g
+       variables are persistent across escape-string evaluations.
 
-       Consider  the HP2645, which, to get to row 3 and column 12, needs to be
-       sent \E&a12c03Y padded for 6 milliseconds.  Note that the order of  the
-       rows  and  columns  is  inverted  here, and that the row and column are
-       printed   as   two   digits.     Thus    its    cup    capability    is
+       Consider the HP2645, which, to get to row 3 and column 12, needs to  be
+       sent  \E&a12c03Y padded for 6 milliseconds.  Note that the order of the
+       rows and columns is inverted here, and that  the  row  and  column  are
+       printed    as    two    digits.     Thus    its   cup   capability   is
        "cup=6\E&%p2%2dc%p1%2dY".
 
-       The  Microterm ACT-IV needs the current row and column sent preceded by
-       a  ^T,  with  the  row   and   column   simply   encoded   in   binary,
-       "cup=^T%p1%c%p2%c".   Terminals  which  use  "%c"  need  to  be able to
-       backspace the cursor (cub1), and to move the cursor up one line on  the
-       screen  (cuu1).   This  is  necessary  because it is not always safe to
-       transmit \n ^D and \r, as the system may change or discard them.   (The
-       library  routines  dealing with terminfo set tty modes so that tabs are
-       never expanded, so \t is safe to send.  This turns out to be  essential
+       The Microterm ACT-IV needs the current row and column sent preceded  by
+       a   ^T,   with   the   row   and   column  simply  encoded  in  binary,
+       "cup=^T%p1%c%p2%c".  Terminals which  use  "%c"  need  to  be  able  to
+       backspace  the cursor (cub1), and to move the cursor up one line on the
+       screen (cuu1).  This is necessary because it  is  not  always  safe  to
+       transmit  \n ^D and \r, as the system may change or discard them.  (The
+       library routines dealing with terminfo set tty modes so that  tabs  are
+       never  expanded, so \t is safe to send.  This turns out to be essential
        for the Ann Arbor 4080.)
 
-       A  final example is the LSI ADM-3a, which uses row and column offset by
+       A final example is the LSI ADM-3a, which uses row and column offset  by
        a blank character, thus "cup=\E=%p1%' '%+%c%p2%' '%+%c".  After sending
-       "\E=",  this  pushes  the first parameter, pushes the ASCII value for a
+       "\E=", this pushes the first parameter, pushes the ASCII  value  for  a
        space (32), adds them (pushing the sum on the stack in place of the two
-       previous  values) and outputs that value as a character.  Then the same
-       is done for the second parameter.  More complex arithmetic is  possible
+       previous values) and outputs that value as a character.  Then the  same
+       is  done for the second parameter.  More complex arithmetic is possible
        using the stack.

Cursor Motions

-       If  the  terminal has a fast way to home the cursor (to very upper left
-       corner of screen) then this can be given as home; similarly a fast  way
-       of  getting  to the lower left-hand corner can be given as ll; this may
+       If the terminal has a fast way to home the cursor (to very  upper  left
+       corner  of screen) then this can be given as home; similarly a fast way
+       of getting to the lower left-hand corner can be given as ll;  this  may
        involve going up with cuu1 from the home position, but a program should
        never do this itself (unless ll does) because it can make no assumption
-       about the effect of moving up from the home position.   Note  that  the
-       home  position is the same as addressing to (0,0): to the top left cor-
-       ner of the screen, not of memory.  (Thus, the \EH sequence on HP termi-
-       nals cannot be used for home.)
+       about  the  effect  of moving up from the home position.  Note that the
+       home position is the same as addressing  to  (0,0):  to  the  top  left
+       corner  of  the  screen,  not of memory.  (Thus, the \EH sequence on HP
+       terminals cannot be used for home.)
 
        If the terminal has row or column absolute cursor addressing, these can
-       be given as single  parameter  capabilities  hpa  (horizontal  position
-       absolute)  and  vpa  (vertical position absolute).  Sometimes these are
-       shorter than the more general  two  parameter  sequence  (as  with  the
-       hp2645)  and can be used in preference to cup.  If there are parameter-
-       ized local motions (e.g., move n spaces to  the  right)  these  can  be
-       given  as cud, cub, cuf, and cuu with a single parameter indicating how
-       many spaces to move.  These are primarily useful if the  terminal  does
-       not have cup, such as the TEKTRONIX 4025.
-
-       If  the  terminal  needs to be in a special mode when running a program
+       be  given  as  single  parameter  capabilities hpa (horizontal position
+       absolute) and vpa (vertical position absolute).   Sometimes  these  are
+       shorter  than  the  more  general  two  parameter sequence (as with the
+       hp2645)  and  can  be  used  in  preference  to  cup.   If  there   are
+       parameterized  local  motions  (e.g., move n spaces to the right) these
+       can be given as  cud,  cub,  cuf,  and  cuu  with  a  single  parameter
+       indicating  how many spaces to move.  These are primarily useful if the
+       terminal does not have cup, such as the TEKTRONIX 4025.
+
+       If the terminal needs to be in a special mode when  running  a  program
        that uses these capabilities, the codes to enter and exit this mode can
-       be  given as smcup and rmcup.  This arises, for example, from terminals
-       like the Concept with more than one page of memory.   If  the  terminal
-       has only memory relative cursor addressing and not screen relative cur-
-       sor addressing, a one screen-sized window must be fixed into the termi-
-       nal  for cursor addressing to work properly.  This is also used for the
-       TEKTRONIX 4025, where smcup sets the command character to  be  the  one
-       used  by  terminfo.   If the smcup sequence will not restore the screen
-       after an rmcup sequence is output (to the  state  prior  to  outputting
-       rmcup), specify nrrmc.
+       be given as smcup and rmcup.  This arises, for example, from  terminals
+       like  the  Concept  with more than one page of memory.  If the terminal
+       has only memory relative cursor  addressing  and  not  screen  relative
+       cursor  addressing,  a  one  screen-sized window must be fixed into the
+       terminal for cursor addressing to work properly.  This is also used for
+       the  TEKTRONIX  4025,  where smcup sets the command character to be the
+       one used by terminfo.  If the  smcup  sequence  will  not  restore  the
+       screen  after  an  rmcup  sequence  is  output  (to  the state prior to
+       outputting rmcup), specify nrrmc.

Area Clears

-       If  the  terminal can clear from the current position to the end of the
-       line, leaving the cursor where it is, this should be given as  el.   If
-       the  terminal  can  clear from the beginning of the line to the current
-       position inclusive, leaving the cursor where  it  is,  this  should  be
-       given  as  el1.  If the terminal can clear from the current position to
-       the end of the display, then this should be given as ed.   Ed  is  only
+       If the terminal can clear from the current position to the end  of  the
+       line,  leaving  the cursor where it is, this should be given as el.  If
+       the terminal can clear from the beginning of the line  to  the  current
+       position  inclusive,  leaving  the  cursor  where it is, this should be
+       given as el1.  If the terminal can clear from the current  position  to
+       the  end  of  the display, then this should be given as ed.  Ed is only
        defined from the first column of a line.  (Thus, it can be simulated by
-       a request to delete a large number of lines, if a true ed is not avail-
-       able.)
+       a  request  to  delete  a  large  number  of lines, if a true ed is not
+       available.)

Insert/delete line and vertical motions

-       If  the  terminal  can  open a new blank line before the line where the
-       cursor is, this should be given as il1; this  is  done  only  from  the
-       first  position  of  a  line.  The cursor must then appear on the newly
-       blank line.  If the terminal can delete the line which  the  cursor  is
-       on,  then this should be given as dl1; this is done only from the first
+       If the terminal can open a new blank line before  the  line  where  the
+       cursor  is,  this  should  be  given as il1; this is done only from the
+       first position of a line.  The cursor must then  appear  on  the  newly
+       blank  line.   If  the terminal can delete the line which the cursor is
+       on, then this should be given as dl1; this is done only from the  first
        position on the line to be deleted.  Versions of il1 and dl1 which take
        a single parameter and insert or delete that many lines can be given as
        il and dl.
 
-       If the terminal has a settable scrolling region (like  the  vt100)  the
-       command  to  set  this  can be described with the csr capability, which
+       If  the  terminal  has a settable scrolling region (like the vt100) the
+       command to set this can be described with  the  csr  capability,  which
        takes two parameters: the top and bottom lines of the scrolling region.
        The cursor position is, alas, undefined after using this command.
 
-       It  is possible to get the effect of insert or delete line using csr on
-       a properly chosen region; the sc and rc (save and restore cursor)  com-
-       mands  may  be  useful for ensuring that your synthesized insert/delete
-       string does not move the cursor.  (Note that  the  ncurses(3x)  library
-       does   this   synthesis   automatically,   so   you  need  not  compose
+       It is possible to get the effect of insert or delete line using csr  on
+       a  properly  chosen  region;  the  sc  and rc (save and restore cursor)
+       commands may be useful for ensuring that your synthesized insert/delete
+       string  does  not  move the cursor.  (Note that the ncurses(3x) library
+       does  this  synthesis  automatically,   so   you   need   not   compose
        insert/delete strings for an entry with csr).
 
-       Yet another way to construct insert and delete might be to use a combi-
-       nation  of  index  with the memory-lock feature found on some terminals
-       (like the HP-700/90 series, which however also has insert/delete).
+       Yet  another  way  to  construct  insert  and  delete might be to use a
+       combination of  index  with  the  memory-lock  feature  found  on  some
+       terminals   (like   the   HP-700/90  series,  which  however  also  has
+       insert/delete).
 
        Inserting lines at the top or bottom of the screen  can  also  be  done
        using  ri  or  ind on many terminals without a true insert/delete line,
        and is often faster even on terminals with those features.
 
-       The boolean non_dest_scroll_region should be set if each scrolling win-
-       dow  is  effectively a view port on a screen-sized canvas.  To test for
-       this capability, create a scrolling region in the middle of the screen,
-       write  something  to the bottom line, move the cursor to the top of the
-       region, and do ri followed by dl1 or ind.  If the data scrolled off the
-       bottom  of  the  region  by  the  ri re-appears, then scrolling is non-
-       destructive.  System V and XSI Curses expect that ind,  ri,  indn,  and
-       rin  will  simulate destructive scrolling; their documentation cautions
-       you not to define csr unless this is true.  This curses  implementation
-       is more liberal and will do explicit erases after scrolling if ndsrc is
-       defined.
+       The boolean non_dest_scroll_region should  be  set  if  each  scrolling
+       window  is  effectively  a view port on a screen-sized canvas.  To test
+       for this capability, create a scrolling region in  the  middle  of  the
+       screen,  write something to the bottom line, move the cursor to the top
+       of the region, and do ri followed by dl1 or ind.  If the data  scrolled
+       off  the  bottom  of the region by the ri re-appears, then scrolling is
+       non-destructive.  System V and XSI Curses expect that  ind,  ri,  indn,
+       and  rin  will  simulate  destructive  scrolling;  their  documentation
+       cautions you not to define  csr  unless  this  is  true.   This  curses
+       implementation  is  more  liberal  and  will  do  explicit erases after
+       scrolling if ndsrc is defined.
 
        If the terminal has the ability to define a window as part  of  memory,
        which  all  commands  affect,  it  should be given as the parameterized
@@ -1635,110 +1650,111 @@

Insert/Delete Character

        There  are  two  basic  kinds  of intelligent terminals with respect to
        insert/delete character which can be  described  using  terminfo.   The
-       most  common insert/delete character operations affect only the charac-
-       ters on the current line and shift characters off the end of  the  line
-       rigidly.  Other terminals, such as the Concept 100 and the Perkin Elmer
-       Owl, make a distinction between typed and untyped blanks on the screen,
-       shifting  upon  an  insert  or  delete  only to an untyped blank on the
-       screen which is either eliminated, or expanded to two untyped blanks.
-
-       You can determine the kind of terminal you have by clearing the  screen
-       and  then  typing  text separated by cursor motions.  Type "abc    def"
-       using local cursor motions (not  spaces)  between  the  "abc"  and  the
-       "def".   Then position the cursor before the "abc" and put the terminal
-       in insert mode.  If typing characters causes the rest of  the  line  to
-       shift  rigidly  and  characters to fall off the end, then your terminal
-       does not distinguish between blanks  and  untyped  positions.   If  the
-       "abc"  shifts over to the "def" which then move together around the end
-       of the current line and onto the next as you insert, you have the  sec-
-       ond  type  of terminal, and should give the capability in, which stands
-       for "insert null".
-
-       While these are two logically  separate  attributes  (one  line  versus
-       multi-line  insert  mode,  and  special treatment of untyped spaces) we
-       have seen no terminals whose insert mode cannot be described  with  the
+       most   common   insert/delete  character  operations  affect  only  the
+       characters on the current line and shift characters off the end of  the
+       line  rigidly.  Other terminals, such as the Concept 100 and the Perkin
+       Elmer Owl, make a distinction between typed and untyped blanks  on  the
+       screen,  shifting  upon an insert or delete only to an untyped blank on
+       the screen which is either  eliminated,  or  expanded  to  two  untyped
+       blanks.
+
+       You  can determine the kind of terminal you have by clearing the screen
+       and then typing text separated by cursor  motions.   Type  "abc    def"
+       using  local  cursor  motions  (not  spaces)  between the "abc" and the
+       "def".  Then position the cursor before the "abc" and put the  terminal
+       in  insert  mode.   If typing characters causes the rest of the line to
+       shift rigidly and characters to fall off the end,  then  your  terminal
+       does  not  distinguish  between  blanks  and untyped positions.  If the
+       "abc" shifts over to the "def" which then move together around the  end
+       of  the  current  line  and  onto  the next as you insert, you have the
+       second type of terminal, and  should  give  the  capability  in,  which
+       stands for "insert null".
+
+       While  these  are  two  logically  separate attributes (one line versus
+       multi-line insert mode, and special treatment  of  untyped  spaces)  we
+       have  seen  no terminals whose insert mode cannot be described with the
        single attribute.
 
-       Terminfo  can  describe  both  terminals which have an insert mode, and
-       terminals which send a simple sequence to open a blank position on  the
+       Terminfo can describe both terminals which have  an  insert  mode,  and
+       terminals  which send a simple sequence to open a blank position on the
        current line.  Give as smir the sequence to get into insert mode.  Give
-       as rmir the sequence to leave  insert  mode.   Now  give  as  ich1  any
-       sequence  needed  to  be  sent  just before sending the character to be
-       inserted.  Most terminals with a true insert mode will not  give  ich1;
-       terminals  which  send a sequence to open a screen position should give
+       as  rmir  the  sequence  to  leave  insert  mode.  Now give as ich1 any
+       sequence needed to be sent just before  sending  the  character  to  be
+       inserted.   Most  terminals with a true insert mode will not give ich1;
+       terminals which send a sequence to open a screen position  should  give
        it here.
 
-       If your terminal has both, insert mode is usually preferable  to  ich1.
-       Technically,  you  should  not  give  both unless the terminal actually
-       requires both to be used in combination.  Accordingly, some  non-curses
-       applications  get  confused if both are present; the symptom is doubled
-       characters in an update using insert.  This requirement  is  now  rare;
-       most  ich  sequences do not require previous smir, and most smir insert
-       modes do not require ich1 before each character.   Therefore,  the  new
-       curses  actually  assumes this is the case and uses either rmir/smir or
-       ich/ich1 as appropriate (but not both).  If you have to write an  entry
-       to  be  used  under  new curses for a terminal old enough to need both,
+       If  your  terminal has both, insert mode is usually preferable to ich1.
+       Technically, you should not give  both  unless  the  terminal  actually
+       requires  both to be used in combination.  Accordingly, some non-curses
+       applications get confused if both are present; the symptom  is  doubled
+       characters  in  an  update using insert.  This requirement is now rare;
+       most ich sequences do not require previous smir, and most  smir  insert
+       modes  do  not  require ich1 before each character.  Therefore, the new
+       curses actually assumes this is the case and uses either  rmir/smir  or
+       ich/ich1  as appropriate (but not both).  If you have to write an entry
+       to be used under new curses for a terminal old  enough  to  need  both,
        include the rmir/smir sequences in ich1.
 
        If post insert padding is needed, give this as a number of milliseconds
-       in  ip (a string option).  Any other sequence which may need to be sent
+       in ip (a string option).  Any other sequence which may need to be  sent
        after an insert of a single character may also be given in ip.  If your
-       terminal  needs  both  to be placed into an "insert mode" and a special
-       code to precede each inserted character, then both smir/rmir  and  ich1
-       can  be  given,  and  both  will be used.  The ich capability, with one
+       terminal needs both to be placed into an "insert mode"  and  a  special
+       code  to  precede each inserted character, then both smir/rmir and ich1
+       can be given, and both will be used.   The  ich  capability,  with  one
        parameter, n, will repeat the effects of ich1 n times.
 
-       If padding is necessary between characters typed while  not  in  insert
+       If  padding  is  necessary between characters typed while not in insert
        mode, give this as a number of milliseconds padding in rmp.
 
-       It  is  occasionally  necessary  to move around while in insert mode to
-       delete characters on the same line (e.g., if there is a tab  after  the
-       insertion  position).   If  your terminal allows motion while in insert
-       mode you can give the capability mir to  speed  up  inserting  in  this
-       case.   Omitting  mir  will affect only speed.  Some terminals (notably
-       Datamedia's) must not have mir because of the  way  their  insert  mode
+       It is occasionally necessary to move around while  in  insert  mode  to
+       delete  characters  on the same line (e.g., if there is a tab after the
+       insertion position).  If your terminal allows motion  while  in  insert
+       mode  you  can  give  the  capability mir to speed up inserting in this
+       case.  Omitting mir will affect only speed.   Some  terminals  (notably
+       Datamedia's)  must  not  have  mir because of the way their insert mode
        works.
 
-       Finally,  you  can  specify dch1 to delete a single character, dch with
-       one parameter, n, to delete n characters, and  delete  mode  by  giving
-       smdc  and  rmdc  to  enter  and exit delete mode (any mode the terminal
+       Finally, you can specify dch1 to delete a single  character,  dch  with
+       one  parameter,  n,  to  delete n characters, and delete mode by giving
+       smdc and rmdc to enter and exit delete  mode  (any  mode  the  terminal
        needs to be placed in for dch1 to work).
 
-       A command to erase n characters  (equivalent  to  outputting  n  blanks
+       A  command  to  erase  n  characters (equivalent to outputting n blanks
        without moving the cursor) can be given as ech with one parameter.

Highlighting, Underlining, and Visible Bells

        If your terminal has one or more kinds of display attributes, these can
-       be represented in a number of different ways.  You  should  choose  one
-       display  form  as  standout  mode,  representing a good, high contrast,
-       easy-on-the-eyes, format for  highlighting  error  messages  and  other
-       attention  getters.   (If  you  have a choice, reverse video plus half-
-       bright is good, or reverse video alone.)  The sequences  to  enter  and
-       exit  standout  mode  are given as smso and rmso, respectively.  If the
-       code to change into or out of standout mode  leaves  one  or  even  two
-       blank  spaces  on  the screen, as the TVI 912 and Teleray 1061 do, then
+       be  represented  in  a number of different ways.  You should choose one
+       display form as standout mode,  representing  a  good,  high  contrast,
+       easy-on-the-eyes,  format  for  highlighting  error  messages and other
+       attention getters.  (If you have a choice,  reverse  video  plus  half-
+       bright  is  good,  or reverse video alone.)  The sequences to enter and
+       exit standout mode are given as smso and rmso,  respectively.   If  the
+       code  to  change  into  or  out of standout mode leaves one or even two
+       blank spaces on the screen, as the TVI 912 and Teleray  1061  do,  then
        xmc should be given to tell how many spaces are left.
 
        Codes to begin underlining and end underlining can be given as smul and
        rmul respectively.  If the terminal has a code to underline the current
-       character and move the cursor one space  to  the  right,  such  as  the
+       character  and  move  the  cursor  one  space to the right, such as the
        Microterm Mime, this can be given as uc.
 
-       Other  capabilities  to  enter various highlighting modes include blink
-       (blinking) bold (bold or extra bright) dim (dim or  half-bright)  invis
-       (blanking  or invisible text) prot (protected) rev (reverse video) sgr0
-       (turn off all attribute modes) smacs  (enter  alternate  character  set
+       Other capabilities to enter various highlighting  modes  include  blink
+       (blinking)  bold  (bold or extra bright) dim (dim or half-bright) invis
+       (blanking or invisible text) prot (protected) rev (reverse video)  sgr0
+       (turn  off  all  attribute  modes) smacs (enter alternate character set
        mode) and rmacs (exit alternate character set mode).  Turning on any of
        these modes singly may or may not turn off other modes.
 
-       If there is a sequence to set arbitrary  combinations  of  modes,  this
-       should  be  given  as  sgr (set attributes), taking 9 parameters.  Each
-       parameter is either 0 or nonzero, as the corresponding attribute is  on
-       or  off.  The 9 parameters are, in order: standout, underline, reverse,
-       blink, dim, bold, blank, protect, alternate  character  set.   Not  all
-       modes need be supported by sgr, only those for which corresponding sep-
-       arate attribute commands exist.
+       If  there  is  a  sequence to set arbitrary combinations of modes, this
+       should be given as sgr (set attributes),  taking  9  parameters.   Each
+       parameter  is either 0 or nonzero, as the corresponding attribute is on
+       or off.  The 9 parameters are, in order: standout, underline,  reverse,
+       blink,  dim,  bold,  blank,  protect, alternate character set.  Not all
+       modes need be supported by sgr,  only  those  for  which  corresponding
+       separate attribute commands exist.
 
        For example, the DEC vt220 supports most of the modes:
 
@@ -1755,17 +1771,17 @@
                p8                   protect          not used
                p9                   altcharset       ^O (off) ^N (on)
 
-       We begin each escape sequence by turning off any existing modes,  since
-       there  is  no quick way to determine whether they are active.  Standout
-       is set up to be the combination of reverse and bold.  The vt220  termi-
-       nal  has  a protect mode, though it is not commonly used in sgr because
-       it protects characters on the screen from  the  host's  erasures.   The
-       altcharset  mode  also  is  different  in  that  it is either ^O or ^N,
-       depending on whether it is off or on.  If all modes are turned on,  the
+       We  begin each escape sequence by turning off any existing modes, since
+       there is no quick way to determine whether they are  active.   Standout
+       is  set  up  to  be  the  combination  of  reverse and bold.  The vt220
+       terminal has a protect mode, though it is  not  commonly  used  in  sgr
+       because  it protects characters on the screen from the host's erasures.
+       The altcharset mode also is different in that it is either  ^O  or  ^N,
+       depending  on whether it is off or on.  If all modes are turned on, the
        resulting sequence is \E[0;1;4;5;7;8m^N.
 
-       Some  sequences are common to different modes.  For example, ;7 is out-
-       put when either p1 or p3 is  true,  that  is,  if  either  standout  or
+       Some sequences are common to  different  modes.   For  example,  ;7  is
+       output  when  either  p1  or p3 is true, that is, if either standout or
        reverse modes are turned on.
 
        Writing out the above sequences, along with their dependencies yields
@@ -1786,54 +1802,54 @@
            sgr=\E[0%?%p1%p6%|%t;1%;%?%p2%t;4%;%?%p4%t;5%;
                %?%p1%p3%|%t;7%;%?%p7%t;8%;m%?%p9%t\016%e\017%;,
 
-       Remember  that  if  you specify sgr, you must also specify sgr0.  Also,
-       some implementations rely on sgr being given if sgr0 is, Not  all  ter-
-       minfo  entries  necessarily have an sgr string, however.  Many terminfo
-       entries are derived from termcap entries which have no sgr string.  The
-       only drawback to adding an sgr string is that termcap also assumes that
-       sgr0 does not exit alternate character set mode.
-
-       Terminals with the "magic cookie" glitch (xmc) deposit  special  "cook-
-       ies" when they receive mode-setting sequences, which affect the display
-       algorithm rather than having extra bits for each character.  Some  ter-
-       minals,  such  as  the  HP 2621, automatically leave standout mode when
-       they move to a new line or the cursor  is  addressed.   Programs  using
-       standout  mode  should  exit  standout mode before moving the cursor or
-       sending a newline, unless the msgr capability,  asserting  that  it  is
+       Remember that if you specify sgr, you must also  specify  sgr0.   Also,
+       some  implementations  rely  on  sgr  being  given  if sgr0 is, Not all
+       terminfo  entries  necessarily  have  an  sgr  string,  however.   Many
+       terminfo  entries  are  derived  from termcap entries which have no sgr
+       string.  The only drawback to adding an sgr string is that termcap also
+       assumes that sgr0 does not exit alternate character set mode.
+
+       Terminals   with  the  "magic  cookie"  glitch  (xmc)  deposit  special
+       "cookies" when they receive mode-setting sequences,  which  affect  the
+       display  algorithm  rather  than  having extra bits for each character.
+       Some terminals, such as the HP 2621, automatically leave standout  mode
+       when  they  move  to  a  new line or the cursor is addressed.  Programs
+       using standout mode should exit standout mode before moving the  cursor
+       or  sending a newline, unless the msgr capability, asserting that it is
        safe to move in standout mode, is present.
 
-       If  the  terminal has a way of flashing the screen to indicate an error
-       quietly (a bell replacement) then this can be given as flash;  it  must
+       If the terminal has a way of flashing the screen to indicate  an  error
+       quietly  (a  bell replacement) then this can be given as flash; it must
        not move the cursor.
 
-       If  the cursor needs to be made more visible than normal when it is not
+       If the cursor needs to be made more visible than normal when it is  not
        on the bottom line (to make, for example, a non-blinking underline into
-       an  easier  to  find block or blinking underline) give this sequence as
+       an easier to find block or blinking underline) give  this  sequence  as
        cvvis.  If there is a way to make the cursor completely invisible, give
-       that  as  civis.  The capability cnorm should be given which undoes the
+       that as civis.  The capability cnorm should be given which  undoes  the
        effects of both of these modes.
 
-       If your terminal correctly generates  underlined  characters  (with  no
-       special  codes  needed)  even  though  it does not overstrike, then you
-       should give the capability ul.  If  a  character  overstriking  another
-       leaves  both  characters  on the screen, specify the capability os.  If
+       If  your  terminal  correctly  generates underlined characters (with no
+       special codes needed) even though it  does  not  overstrike,  then  you
+       should  give  the  capability  ul.  If a character overstriking another
+       leaves both characters on the screen, specify the  capability  os.   If
        overstrikes are erasable with a blank, then this should be indicated by
        giving eo.

Keypad and Function Keys

-       If  the  terminal  has  a keypad that transmits codes when the keys are
-       pressed, this information can be given.  Note that it is  not  possible
+       If the terminal has a keypad that transmits codes  when  the  keys  are
+       pressed,  this  information can be given.  Note that it is not possible
        to handle terminals where the keypad only works in local (this applies,
-       for example, to the unshifted HP 2621 keys).  If the keypad can be  set
-       to transmit or not transmit, give these codes as smkx and rmkx.  Other-
-       wise the keypad is assumed to always transmit.
+       for  example, to the unshifted HP 2621 keys).  If the keypad can be set
+       to transmit or not  transmit,  give  these  codes  as  smkx  and  rmkx.
+       Otherwise the keypad is assumed to always transmit.
 
-       The codes sent by the left arrow, right arrow, up  arrow,  down  arrow,
-       and  home  keys  can  be given as kcub1, kcuf1, kcuu1, kcud1, and khome
+       The  codes  sent  by the left arrow, right arrow, up arrow, down arrow,
+       and home keys can be given as kcub1, kcuf1,  kcuu1,  kcud1,  and  khome
        respectively.  If there are function keys such as f0, f1, ..., f10, the
-       codes  they  send  can  be given as kf0, kf1, ..., kf10.  If these keys
-       have labels other than the default f0 through f10, the  labels  can  be
+       codes they send can be given as kf0, kf1, ...,  kf10.   If  these  keys
+       have  labels  other  than the default f0 through f10, the labels can be
        given as lf0, lf1, ..., lf10.
 
        The codes transmitted by certain other special keys can be given:
@@ -1872,64 +1888,64 @@
 
        o   khts (set a tab stop in this column).
 
-       In  addition,  if  the  keypad has a 3 by 3 array of keys including the
-       four arrow keys, the other five keys can be given  as  ka1,  ka3,  kb2,
-       kc1,  and  kc3.   These  keys  are  useful when the effects of a 3 by 3
+       In addition, if the keypad has a 3 by 3 array  of  keys  including  the
+       four  arrow  keys,  the  other five keys can be given as ka1, ka3, kb2,
+       kc1, and kc3.  These keys are useful when the  effects  of  a  3  by  3
        directional pad are needed.
 
        Strings to program function keys can be given as pfkey, pfloc, and pfx.
-       A  string to program screen labels should be specified as pln.  Each of
-       these strings takes two parameters: the function key number to  program
+       A string to program screen labels should be specified as pln.  Each  of
+       these  strings takes two parameters: the function key number to program
        (from 0 to 10) and the string to program it with.  Function key numbers
-       out of this range may program undefined keys in  a  terminal  dependent
-       manner.   The  difference between the capabilities is that pfkey causes
-       pressing the given key to be the same as  the  user  typing  the  given
-       string;  pfloc  causes  the  string  to  be executed by the terminal in
+       out  of  this  range may program undefined keys in a terminal dependent
+       manner.  The difference between the capabilities is that  pfkey  causes
+       pressing  the  given  key  to  be the same as the user typing the given
+       string; pfloc causes the string to  be  executed  by  the  terminal  in
        local; and pfx causes the string to be transmitted to the computer.
 
-       The capabilities nlab, lw and lh  define  the  number  of  programmable
-       screen  labels  and  their  width and height.  If there are commands to
-       turn the labels on and off, give them in smln and rmln.  smln  is  nor-
-       mally  output  after  one  or  more pln sequences to make sure that the
+       The  capabilities  nlab,  lw  and  lh define the number of programmable
+       screen labels and their width and height.  If  there  are  commands  to
+       turn  the  labels  on  and  off,  give  them in smln and rmln.  smln is
+       normally output after one or more pln sequences to make sure  that  the
        change becomes visible.

Tabs and Initialization

        A few capabilities are used only for tabs:
 
-       o   If the terminal has hardware tabs, the command to  advance  to  the
+       o   If  the  terminal  has hardware tabs, the command to advance to the
            next tab stop can be given as ht (usually control/I).
 
        o   A "back-tab" command which moves leftward to the preceding tab stop
            can be given as cbt.
 
-           By convention, if the teletype modes indicate that tabs  are  being
-           expanded  by  the  computer rather than being sent to the terminal,
-           programs should not use ht or cbt even if they are  present,  since
+           By  convention,  if the teletype modes indicate that tabs are being
+           expanded by the computer rather than being sent  to  the  terminal,
+           programs  should  not use ht or cbt even if they are present, since
            the user may not have the tab stops properly set.
 
-       o   If  the  terminal has hardware tabs which are initially set every n
+       o   If the terminal has hardware tabs which are initially set  every  n
            spaces when the terminal is powered up, the numeric parameter it is
            given, showing the number of spaces the tabs are set to.
 
            The it capability is normally used by the tset command to determine
-           whether to set the mode for hardware tab expansion, and whether  to
+           whether  to set the mode for hardware tab expansion, and whether to
            set the tab stops.  If the terminal has tab stops that can be saved
-           in non-volatile memory, the terminfo description  can  assume  that
+           in  non-volatile  memory,  the terminfo description can assume that
            they are properly set.
 
        Other capabilities include
 
        o   is1, is2, and is3, initialization strings for the terminal,
 
-       o   iprog,  the path name of a program to be run to initialize the ter-
-           minal,
+       o   iprog, the path name of a program  to  be  run  to  initialize  the
+           terminal,
 
        o   and if, the name of a file containing long initialization strings.
 
-       These strings are expected to set the terminal  into  modes  consistent
-       with  the  rest of the terminfo description.  They are normally sent to
-       the terminal, by the init option of the tput  program,  each  time  the
+       These  strings  are  expected to set the terminal into modes consistent
+       with the rest of the terminfo description.  They are normally  sent  to
+       the  terminal,  by  the  init option of the tput program, each time the
        user logs in.  They will be printed in the following order:
 
               run the program
@@ -1953,114 +1969,114 @@
               and finally output
                      is3.
 
-       Most  initialization  is  done with is2.  Special terminal modes can be
-       set up without duplicating strings by putting the common  sequences  in
+       Most initialization is done with is2.  Special terminal  modes  can  be
+       set  up  without duplicating strings by putting the common sequences in
        is2 and special cases in is1 and is3.
 
-       A  set  of  sequences  that  does a harder reset from a totally unknown
+       A set of sequences that does a harder  reset  from  a  totally  unknown
        state can be given as rs1, rs2, rf and rs3, analogous to is1 , is2 , if
-       and  is3  respectively.   These  strings  are output by reset option of
-       tput, or by the reset program (an alias of tset), which  is  used  when
+       and is3 respectively.  These strings are  output  by  reset  option  of
+       tput,  or  by  the reset program (an alias of tset), which is used when
        the terminal gets into a wedged state.  Commands are normally placed in
        rs1, rs2 rs3 and rf only if they produce annoying effects on the screen
        and are not necessary when logging in.  For example, the command to set
-       the vt100 into 80-column mode would normally be part  of  is2,  but  it
-       causes  an  annoying  glitch  of  the screen and is not normally needed
+       the  vt100  into  80-column  mode would normally be part of is2, but it
+       causes an annoying glitch of the screen  and  is  not  normally  needed
        since the terminal is usually already in 80-column mode.
 
-       The reset program writes strings including iprog,  etc.,  in  the  same
-       order  as  the  init program, using rs1, etc., instead of is1, etc.  If
-       any of rs1, rs2, rs3, or rf reset capability strings are  missing,  the
-       reset program falls back upon the corresponding initialization capabil-
-       ity string.
+       The  reset  program  writes  strings including iprog, etc., in the same
+       order as the init program, using rs1, etc., instead of  is1,  etc.   If
+       any  of  rs1, rs2, rs3, or rf reset capability strings are missing, the
+       reset  program  falls  back  upon  the   corresponding   initialization
+       capability string.
 
-       If there are commands to set and clear tab stops, they can be given  as
+       If  there are commands to set and clear tab stops, they can be given as
        tbc (clear all tab stops) and hts (set a tab stop in the current column
-       of every row).  If a more complex sequence is needed to  set  the  tabs
+       of  every  row).   If a more complex sequence is needed to set the tabs
        than can be described by this, the sequence can be placed in is2 or if.
 
-       The  tput  reset  command uses the same capability strings as the reset
-       command, although the two programs (tput and reset)  provide  different
+       The tput reset command uses the same capability strings  as  the  reset
+       command,  although  the two programs (tput and reset) provide different
        command-line options.
 
-       In practice, these terminfo capabilities are not often used in initial-
-       ization of tabs (though they are required for the tabs program):
+       In  practice,  these  terminfo  capabilities  are  not  often  used  in
+       initialization of tabs (though they are required for the tabs program):
 
        o   Almost all hardware terminals (at least those which supported tabs)
            initialized those to every eight columns:
 
-           The  only  exception  was  the  AT&T 2300 series, which set tabs to
+           The only exception was the AT&T 2300  series,  which  set  tabs  to
            every five columns.
 
-       o   In particular, developers of the hardware terminals which are  com-
-           monly  used  as models for modern terminal emulators provided docu-
-           mentation demonstrating that eight columns were the standard.
+       o   In  particular,  developers  of  the  hardware  terminals which are
+           commonly used as models  for  modern  terminal  emulators  provided
+           documentation demonstrating that eight columns were the standard.
 
        o   Because of this, the terminal initialization programs tput and tset
-           use   the  tbc  (clear_all_tabs)  and  hts  (set_tab)  capabilities
-           directly only when the it (init_tabs) capability is set to a  value
+           use  the  tbc  (clear_all_tabs)  and  hts  (set_tab)   capabilities
+           directly  only when the it (init_tabs) capability is set to a value
            other than eight.

Delays and Padding

-       Many  older  and slower terminals do not support either XON/XOFF or DTR
-       handshaking, including hard copy terminals and some very  archaic  CRTs
-       (including,  for example, DEC VT100s).  These may require padding char-
-       acters after certain cursor motions and screen changes.
+       Many older and slower terminals do not support either XON/XOFF  or  DTR
+       handshaking,  including  hard copy terminals and some very archaic CRTs
+       (including, for  example,  DEC  VT100s).   These  may  require  padding
+       characters after certain cursor motions and screen changes.
 
        If the terminal uses xon/xoff handshaking for flow control (that is, it
-       automatically  emits  ^S  back  to  the host when its input buffers are
-       close to full), set xon.  This capability suppresses  the  emission  of
-       padding.   You can also set it for memory-mapped console devices effec-
-       tively that do not have a  speed  limit.   Padding  information  should
-       still be included so that routines can make better decisions about rel-
-       ative costs, but actual pad characters will not be transmitted.
+       automatically emits ^S back to the host  when  its  input  buffers  are
+       close  to  full),  set xon.  This capability suppresses the emission of
+       padding.  You  can  also  set  it  for  memory-mapped  console  devices
+       effectively that do not have a speed limit.  Padding information should
+       still be included so that routines  can  make  better  decisions  about
+       relative costs, but actual pad characters will not be transmitted.
 
        If pb (padding baud rate) is given, padding is suppressed at baud rates
-       below  the  value  of  pb.  If the entry has no padding baud rate, then
+       below the value of pb.  If the entry has no  padding  baud  rate,  then
        whether padding is emitted or not is completely controlled by xon.
 
-       If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) character as  a  pad,
-       then  this  can  be  given as pad.  Only the first character of the pad
+       If  the  terminal requires other than a null (zero) character as a pad,
+       then this can be given as pad.  Only the first  character  of  the  pad
        string is used.

Status Lines

-       Some terminals have an extra "status line" which is not  normally  used
+       Some  terminals  have an extra "status line" which is not normally used
        by software (and thus not counted in the terminal's lines capability).
 
-       The  simplest case is a status line which is cursor-addressable but not
+       The simplest case is a status line which is cursor-addressable but  not
        part of the main scrolling region on the screen; the Heathkit H19 has a
-       status  line  of  this  kind,  as  would a 24-line VT100 with a 23-line
+       status line of this kind, as would  a  24-line  VT100  with  a  23-line
        scrolling region set up on initialization.  This situation is indicated
        by the hs capability.
 
-       Some  terminals  with status lines need special sequences to access the
-       status line.  These may be expressed as a string with single  parameter
-       tsl  which takes the cursor to a given zero-origin column on the status
-       line.  The capability fsl must return to the main-screen  cursor  posi-
-       tions  before the last tsl.  You may need to embed the string values of
-       sc (save cursor) and rc (restore cursor) in tsl and fsl  to  accomplish
-       this.
+       Some terminals with status lines need special sequences to  access  the
+       status  line.  These may be expressed as a string with single parameter
+       tsl which takes the cursor to a given zero-origin column on the  status
+       line.   The  capability  fsl  must  return  to  the  main-screen cursor
+       positions before the last tsl.  You may need to embed the string values
+       of  sc  (save  cursor)  and  rc  (restore  cursor)  in  tsl  and fsl to
+       accomplish this.
 
-       The  status  line is normally assumed to be the same width as the width
-       of the terminal.  If this is  untrue,  you  can  specify  it  with  the
+       The status line is normally assumed to be the same width as  the  width
+       of  the  terminal.   If  this  is  untrue,  you can specify it with the
        numeric capability wsl.
 
        A command to erase or blank the status line may be specified as dsl.
 
-       The  boolean  capability  eslok  specifies that escape sequences, tabs,
+       The boolean capability eslok specifies  that  escape  sequences,  tabs,
        etc., work ordinarily in the status line.
 
-       The ncurses implementation does not yet use any of these  capabilities.
+       The  ncurses implementation does not yet use any of these capabilities.
        They are documented here in case they ever become important.

Line Graphics

-       Many  terminals have alternate character sets useful for forms-drawing.
-       Terminfo and curses have built-in support for most of the drawing char-
-       acters  supported  by  the  VT100,  with  some characters from the AT&T
-       4410v1 added.  This alternate character set may  be  specified  by  the
+       Many terminals have alternate character sets useful for  forms-drawing.
+       Terminfo  and  curses  have  built-in  support  for most of the drawing
+       characters supported by the VT100, with some characters from  the  AT&T
+       4410v1  added.   This  alternate  character set may be specified by the
        acsc capability.
 
          Glyph                       ACS            Ascii     acsc     acsc
@@ -2078,6 +2094,7 @@
          board of squares            ACS_BOARD      #         h        0x68
          lantern symbol              ACS_LANTERN    #         i        0x69
          lower right corner          ACS_LRCORNER   +         j        0x6a
+
          upper right corner          ACS_URCORNER   +         k        0x6b
          upper left corner           ACS_ULCORNER   +         l        0x6c
          lower left corner           ACS_LLCORNER   +         m        0x6d
@@ -2101,34 +2118,34 @@
 
        A few notes apply to the table itself:
 
-       o   X/Open  Curses  incorrectly  states that the mapping for lantern is
-           uppercase "I" although Unix implementations use the  lowercase  "i"
+       o   X/Open Curses incorrectly states that the mapping  for  lantern  is
+           uppercase  "I"  although Unix implementations use the lowercase "i"
            mapping.
 
-       o   The  DEC  VT100  implemented graphics using the alternate character
-           set feature, temporarily switching modes and sending characters  in
-           the range 0x60 (96) to 0x7e (126) (the acsc Value column in the ta-
-           ble).
+       o   The DEC VT100 implemented graphics using  the  alternate  character
+           set  feature, temporarily switching modes and sending characters in
+           the range 0x60 (96) to 0x7e (126) (the acsc  Value  column  in  the
+           table).
 
        o   The AT&T terminal added graphics characters outside that range.
 
-           Some of the characters within the range do  not  match  the  VT100;
-           presumably  they  were  used in the AT&T terminal: board of squares
-           replaces the VT100 newline symbol, while  lantern  symbol  replaces
+           Some  of  the  characters  within the range do not match the VT100;
+           presumably they were used in the AT&T terminal:  board  of  squares
+           replaces  the  VT100  newline symbol, while lantern symbol replaces
            the VT100 vertical tab symbol.  The other VT100 symbols for control
-           characters (horizontal tab, carriage return and line-feed) are  not
+           characters  (horizontal tab, carriage return and line-feed) are not
            (re)used in curses.
 
-       The  best  way to define a new device's graphics set is to add a column
-       to a copy of this table for your terminal, giving the  character  which
-       (when  emitted  between  smacs/rmacs  switches) will be rendered as the
+       The best way to define a new device's graphics set is to add  a  column
+       to  a  copy of this table for your terminal, giving the character which
+       (when emitted between smacs/rmacs switches) will  be  rendered  as  the
        corresponding graphic.  Then read off the VT100/your terminal character
        pairs right to left in sequence; these become the ACSC string.

Color Handling

-       The  curses  library  functions init_pair and init_color manipulate the
-       color  pairs  and  color  values  discussed  in   this   section   (see
+       The curses library functions init_pair and  init_color  manipulate  the
+       color   pairs   and   color  values  discussed  in  this  section  (see
        curs_color(3x) for details on these and related functions).
 
        Most color terminals are either "Tektronix-like" or "HP-like":
@@ -2137,45 +2154,46 @@
            is usually 8), and can set character-cell foreground and background
            characters independently, mixing them into N * N color-pairs.
 
-       o   On  HP-like  terminals,  the user must set each color pair up sepa-
-           rately (foreground and background are not independently  settable).
-           Up to M color-pairs may be set up from 2*M different colors.  ANSI-
-           compatible terminals are Tektronix-like.
+       o   On HP-like  terminals,  the  user  must  set  each  color  pair  up
+           separately   (foreground   and  background  are  not  independently
+           settable).  Up to M color-pairs may be set up  from  2*M  different
+           colors.  ANSI-compatible terminals are Tektronix-like.
 
        Some basic color capabilities are independent of the color method.  The
-       numeric  capabilities  colors  and pairs specify the maximum numbers of
-       colors and color-pairs that can be displayed  simultaneously.   The  op
+       numeric capabilities colors and pairs specify the  maximum  numbers  of
+       colors  and  color-pairs  that can be displayed simultaneously.  The op
        (original pair) string resets foreground and background colors to their
-       default values for the terminal.  The oc string resets  all  colors  or
-       color-pairs  to  their default values for the terminal.  Some terminals
-       (including many PC terminal emulators) erase screen areas with the cur-
-       rent  background  color  rather  than  the power-up default background;
+       default  values  for  the terminal.  The oc string resets all colors or
+       color-pairs to their default values for the terminal.   Some  terminals
+       (including  many  PC  terminal  emulators)  erase screen areas with the
+       current background color rather than the power-up  default  background;
        these should have the boolean capability bce.
 
-       While the curses library works with color pairs (reflecting the inabil-
-       ity  of  some  devices to set foreground and background colors indepen-
-       dently), there are separate capabilities for setting these features:
+       While  the  curses  library  works  with  color  pairs  (reflecting the
+       inability of some devices  to  set  foreground  and  background  colors
+       independently),  there  are  separate  capabilities  for  setting these
+       features:
 
-       o   To change the current foreground or  background  color  on  a  Tek-
-           tronix-type  terminal,  use  setaf  (set ANSI foreground) and setab
-           (set ANSI background) or setf (set foreground) and setb (set  back-
-           ground).   These  take  one  parameter, the color number.  The SVr4
+       o   To  change  the  current  foreground  or  background  color  on   a
+           Tektronix-type  terminal, use setaf (set ANSI foreground) and setab
+           (set ANSI background)  or  setf  (set  foreground)  and  setb  (set
+           background).  These take one parameter, the color number.  The SVr4
            documentation describes only setaf/setab; the XPG4 draft says  that
            "If  the  terminal supports ANSI escape sequences to set background
-           and foreground, they should be coded as setaf  and  setab,  respec-
-           tively.
+           and  foreground,  they  should  be  coded  as  setaf   and   setab,
+           respectively.
 
        o   If  the  terminal supports other escape sequences to set background
-           and foreground, they should be coded  as  setf  and  setb,  respec-
-           tively.   The  vidputs  and the refresh(3x) functions use the setaf
-           and setab capabilities if they are defined.
+           and  foreground,  they  should  be  coded   as   setf   and   setb,
+           respectively.   The  vidputs  and the refresh(3x) functions use the
+           setaf and setab capabilities if they are defined.
 
-       The setaf/setab and setf/setb capabilities take a single numeric  argu-
-       ment  each.  Argument values 0-7 of setaf/setab are portably defined as
-       follows (the middle column is the symbolic  #define  available  in  the
+       The setaf/setab  and  setf/setb  capabilities  take  a  single  numeric
+       argument each.  Argument values 0-7 of setaf/setab are portably defined
+       as follows (the middle column is the symbolic #define available in  the
        header  for the curses or ncurses libraries).  The terminal hardware is
-       free to map these as it likes, but the RGB values indicate normal loca-
-       tions in color space.
+       free to map these as it likes,  but  the  RGB  values  indicate  normal
+       locations in color space.
 
                     Color       #define       Value       RGB
                     black     COLOR_BLACK       0     0, 0, 0
@@ -2200,8 +2218,8 @@
                     yellow    COLOR_YELLOW      6     max,max,0
                     white     COLOR_WHITE       7     max,max,max
 
-       It is important to not confuse the two sets of color capabilities; oth-
-       erwise red/blue will be interchanged on the display.
+       It is important to not confuse the  two  sets  of  color  capabilities;
+       otherwise red/blue will be interchanged on the display.
 
        On  an  HP-like terminal, use scp with a color-pair number parameter to
        set which color pair is current.
@@ -2212,20 +2230,21 @@
            indicate  that colors can be modified.  If so, the initc capability
            will take a color number (0 to colors - 1)and three more parameters
            which  describe the color.  These three parameters default to being
-           interpreted as RGB (Red, Green, Blue) values.  If the boolean capa-
-           bility  hls  is  present,  they are instead as HLS (Hue, Lightness,
+           interpreted as RGB (Red,  Green,  Blue)  values.   If  the  boolean
+           capability hls is present, they are instead as HLS (Hue, Lightness,
            Saturation) indices.  The ranges are terminal-dependent.
 
        o   On an HP-like terminal, initp may give a capability for changing  a
-           color-pair value.  It will take seven parameters; a color-pair num-
-           ber (0 to max_pairs - 1), and two triples  describing  first  back-
-           ground  and then foreground colors.  These parameters must be (Red,
-           Green, Blue) or (Hue, Lightness, Saturation) depending on hls.
+           color-pair  value.   It  will  take  seven parameters; a color-pair
+           number (0 to max_pairs -  1),  and  two  triples  describing  first
+           background  and  then  foreground colors.  These parameters must be
+           (Red, Green, Blue) or (Hue,  Lightness,  Saturation)  depending  on
+           hls.
 
-       On some color terminals, colors collide with highlights.  You can  reg-
-       ister  these collisions with the ncv capability.  This is a bit-mask of
-       attributes not to be used when colors are enabled.  The  correspondence
-       with the attributes understood by curses is as follows:
+       On  some  color  terminals,  colors  collide  with highlights.  You can
+       register these collisions with the ncv capability.  This is a  bit-mask
+       of   attributes   not   to  be  used  when  colors  are  enabled.   The
+       correspondence with the attributes understood by curses is as follows:
 
                   Attribute              Bit   Decimal      Set by
                   A_STANDOUT             0     1            sgr
@@ -2236,7 +2255,6 @@
                   A_BOLD                 5     32           sgr
                   A_INVIS                6     64           sgr
                   A_PROTECT              7     128          sgr
-
                   A_ALTCHARSET           8     256          sgr
                   A_HORIZONTAL           9     512          sgr1
                   A_LEFT                 10    1024         sgr1
@@ -2246,134 +2264,134 @@
                   A_VERTICAL             14    16384        sgr1
                   A_ITALIC               15    32768        sitm
 
-       For  example, on many IBM PC consoles, the underline attribute collides
-       with the foreground color blue and is  not  available  in  color  mode.
+       For example, on many IBM PC consoles, the underline attribute  collides
+       with  the  foreground  color  blue  and is not available in color mode.
        These should have an ncv capability of 2.
 
-       SVr4  curses does nothing with ncv, ncurses recognizes it and optimizes
+       SVr4 curses does nothing with ncv, ncurses recognizes it and  optimizes
        the output in favor of colors.

Miscellaneous

-       If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) character as  a  pad,
-       then  this  can  be  given as pad.  Only the first character of the pad
+       If  the  terminal requires other than a null (zero) character as a pad,
+       then this can be given as pad.  Only the first  character  of  the  pad
        string is used.  If the terminal does not have a pad character, specify
-       npc.   Note that ncurses implements the termcap-compatible PC variable;
-       though the application may set this value to  something  other  than  a
-       null,  ncurses will test npc first and use napms if the terminal has no
+       npc.  Note that ncurses implements the termcap-compatible PC  variable;
+       though  the  application  may  set this value to something other than a
+       null, ncurses will test npc first and use napms if the terminal has  no
        pad character.
 
-       If the terminal can move up or down half a line, this can be  indicated
-       with hu (half-line up) and hd (half-line down).  This is primarily use-
-       ful for superscripts and subscripts on hard-copy terminals.  If a hard-
-       copy  terminal  can eject to the next page (form feed), give this as ff
-       (usually control/L).
+       If  the terminal can move up or down half a line, this can be indicated
+       with hu (half-line up) and hd  (half-line  down).   This  is  primarily
+       useful  for  superscripts  and subscripts on hard-copy terminals.  If a
+       hard-copy terminal can eject to the next page (form feed), give this as
+       ff (usually control/L).
 
-       If there is a command to repeat a given character  a  given  number  of
-       times  (to  save  time transmitting a large number of identical charac-
-       ters) this can be indicated with the  parameterized  string  rep.   The
-       first  parameter  is the character to be repeated and the second is the
-       number of times to repeat it.  Thus, tparm(repeat_char, 'x', 10) is the
-       same as "xxxxxxxxxx".
+       If  there  is  a  command to repeat a given character a given number of
+       times  (to  save  time  transmitting  a  large  number   of   identical
+       characters)  this  can  be indicated with the parameterized string rep.
+       The first parameter is the character to be repeated and the  second  is
+       the number of times to repeat it.  Thus, tparm(repeat_char, 'x', 10) is
+       the same as "xxxxxxxxxx".
 
        If the terminal has a settable command character, such as the TEKTRONIX
-       4025, this can be indicated with cmdch.  A prototype command  character
-       is  chosen  which is used in all capabilities.  This character is given
-       in the cmdch capability to identify it.  The  following  convention  is
+       4025,  this can be indicated with cmdch.  A prototype command character
+       is chosen which is used in all capabilities.  This character  is  given
+       in  the  cmdch  capability to identify it.  The following convention is
        supported on some UNIX systems: The environment is to be searched for a
-       CC variable, and if found, all occurrences of the  prototype  character
+       CC  variable,  and if found, all occurrences of the prototype character
        are replaced with the character in the environment variable.
 
-       Terminal  descriptions  that  do not represent a specific kind of known
-       terminal, such as switch, dialup, patch, and  network,  should  include
-       the  gn (generic) capability so that programs can complain that they do
-       not know how to talk to the terminal.  (This capability does not  apply
-       to  virtual  terminal  descriptions  for which the escape sequences are
+       Terminal descriptions that do not represent a specific  kind  of  known
+       terminal,  such  as  switch, dialup, patch, and network, should include
+       the gn (generic) capability so that programs can complain that they  do
+       not  know how to talk to the terminal.  (This capability does not apply
+       to virtual terminal descriptions for which  the  escape  sequences  are
        known.)
 
        If the terminal has a "meta key" which acts as a shift key, setting the
-       8th  bit  of any character transmitted, this fact can be indicated with
-       km.  Otherwise, software will assume that the 8th bit is parity and  it
-       will  usually be cleared.  If strings exist to turn this "meta mode" on
+       8th bit of any character transmitted, this fact can be  indicated  with
+       km.   Otherwise, software will assume that the 8th bit is parity and it
+       will usually be cleared.  If strings exist to turn this "meta mode"  on
        and off, they can be given as smm and rmm.
 
        If the terminal has more lines of memory than will fit on the screen at
-       once,  the number of lines of memory can be indicated with lm.  A value
+       once, the number of lines of memory can be indicated with lm.  A  value
        of lm#0 indicates that the number of lines is not fixed, but that there
        is still more memory than fits on the screen.
 
-       If  the terminal is one of those supported by the UNIX virtual terminal
+       If the terminal is one of those supported by the UNIX virtual  terminal
        protocol, the terminal number can be given as vt.
 
-       Media copy strings which control an auxiliary printer connected to  the
-       terminal  can  be  given as mc0: print the contents of the screen, mc4:
-       turn off the printer, and mc5: turn on the printer.  When  the  printer
-       is  on,  all text sent to the terminal will be sent to the printer.  It
-       is undefined whether the text is also displayed on the terminal  screen
-       when  the  printer  is  on.   A variation mc5p takes one parameter, and
-       leaves the printer on for as many characters as the value of the param-
-       eter, then turns the printer off.  The parameter should not exceed 255.
-       All text, including mc4, is transparently passed to the  printer  while
-       an mc5p is in effect.
+       Media  copy strings which control an auxiliary printer connected to the
+       terminal can be given as mc0: print the contents of  the  screen,  mc4:
+       turn  off  the printer, and mc5: turn on the printer.  When the printer
+       is on, all text sent to the terminal will be sent to the  printer.   It
+       is  undefined whether the text is also displayed on the terminal screen
+       when the printer is on.  A variation  mc5p  takes  one  parameter,  and
+       leaves  the  printer  on  for  as  many  characters as the value of the
+       parameter, then turns the printer off.  The parameter should not exceed
+       255.   All  text, including mc4, is transparently passed to the printer
+       while an mc5p is in effect.

Glitches and Braindamage

-       Hazeltine  terminals, which do not allow "~" characters to be displayed
+       Hazeltine terminals, which do not allow "~" characters to be  displayed
        should indicate hz.
 
-       Terminals which ignore a line-feed immediately after an am  wrap,  such
+       Terminals  which  ignore a line-feed immediately after an am wrap, such
        as the Concept and vt100, should indicate xenl.
 
-       If  el  is  required  to get rid of standout (instead of merely writing
+       If el is required to get rid of standout  (instead  of  merely  writing
        normal text on top of it), xhp should be given.
 
        Teleray terminals, where tabs turn all characters moved over to blanks,
-       should  indicate  xt (destructive tabs).  Note: the variable indicating
-       this is now "dest_tabs_magic_smso"; in  older  versions,  it  was  tel-
-       eray_glitch.  This glitch is also taken to mean that it is not possible
-       to position the cursor on top of a "magic cookie", that to erase stand-
-       out  mode  it  is instead necessary to use delete and insert line.  The
-       ncurses implementation ignores this glitch.
-
-       The Beehive Superbee, which is unable to correctly transmit the  escape
-       or  control/C  characters,  has xsb, indicating that the f1 key is used
-       for escape and f2 for control/C.  (Only  certain  Superbees  have  this
-       problem,  depending on the ROM.)  Note that in older terminfo versions,
+       should indicate xt (destructive tabs).  Note: the  variable  indicating
+       this   is   now  "dest_tabs_magic_smso";  in  older  versions,  it  was
+       teleray_glitch.  This glitch is also taken  to  mean  that  it  is  not
+       possible  to  position  the  cursor on top of a "magic cookie", that to
+       erase standout mode it is instead necessary to use  delete  and  insert
+       line.  The ncurses implementation ignores this glitch.
+
+       The  Beehive Superbee, which is unable to correctly transmit the escape
+       or control/C characters, has xsb, indicating that the f1  key  is  used
+       for  escape  and  f2  for control/C.  (Only certain Superbees have this
+       problem, depending on the ROM.)  Note that in older terminfo  versions,
        this capability was called "beehive_glitch"; it is now "no_esc_ctl_c".
 
-       Other specific terminal problems may be corrected by adding more  capa-
-       bilities of the form xx.
+       Other  specific  terminal  problems  may  be  corrected  by adding more
+       capabilities of the form xx.

Pitfalls of Long Entries

-       Long  terminfo  entries are unlikely to be a problem; to date, no entry
-       has even approached terminfo's 4096-byte string-table maximum.   Unfor-
-       tunately,  the  termcap translations are much more strictly limited (to
-       1023 bytes), thus termcap translations of  long  terminfo  entries  can
+       Long terminfo entries are unlikely to be a problem; to date,  no  entry
+       has   even   approached   terminfo's  4096-byte  string-table  maximum.
+       Unfortunately, the termcap translations are much more strictly  limited
+       (to 1023 bytes), thus termcap translations of long terminfo entries can
        cause problems.
 
-       The  man  pages  for  4.3BSD and older versions of tgetent instruct the
-       user to allocate a 1024-byte buffer for the termcap entry.   The  entry
-       gets  null-terminated by the termcap library, so that makes the maximum
-       safe length for a termcap entry 1k-1 (1023) bytes.  Depending  on  what
-       the  application  and the termcap library being used does, and where in
-       the termcap file the terminal type that tgetent is  searching  for  is,
+       The man pages for 4.3BSD and older versions  of  tgetent  instruct  the
+       user  to  allocate a 1024-byte buffer for the termcap entry.  The entry
+       gets null-terminated by the termcap library, so that makes the  maximum
+       safe  length  for a termcap entry 1k-1 (1023) bytes.  Depending on what
+       the application and the termcap library being used does, and  where  in
+       the  termcap  file  the terminal type that tgetent is searching for is,
        several bad things can happen.
 
-       Some  termcap libraries print a warning message or exit if they find an
+       Some termcap libraries print a warning message or exit if they find  an
        entry that's longer than 1023 bytes; others do not; others truncate the
-       entries  to  1023  bytes.  Some application programs allocate more than
+       entries to 1023 bytes.  Some application programs  allocate  more  than
        the recommended 1K for the termcap entry; others do not.
 
-       Each termcap entry has two important sizes associated with  it:  before
-       "tc"  expansion, and after "tc" expansion.  "tc" is the capability that
+       Each  termcap  entry has two important sizes associated with it: before
+       "tc" expansion, and after "tc" expansion.  "tc" is the capability  that
        tacks on another termcap entry to the end of the current one, to add on
        its capabilities.  If a termcap entry does not use the "tc" capability,
        then of course the two lengths are the same.
 
-       The "before tc expansion" length is the most important one, because  it
-       affects  more than just users of that particular terminal.  This is the
-       length of the entry as it exists in /etc/termcap, minus the  backslash-
+       The  "before tc expansion" length is the most important one, because it
+       affects more than just users of that particular terminal.  This is  the
+       length  of the entry as it exists in /etc/termcap, minus the backslash-
        newline pairs, which tgetent strips out while reading it.  Some termcap
        libraries strip off the final newline, too (GNU termcap does not).  Now
        suppose:
@@ -2382,118 +2400,118 @@
 
        o   and the application has only allocated a 1k buffer,
 
-       o   and  the termcap library (like the one in BSD/OS 1.1 and GNU) reads
-           the whole entry into the buffer, no matter what its length, to  see
+       o   and the termcap library (like the one in BSD/OS 1.1 and GNU)  reads
+           the  whole entry into the buffer, no matter what its length, to see
            if it is the entry it wants,
 
-       o   and  tgetent  is  searching  for a terminal type that either is the
-           long entry, appears in the termcap file after the  long  entry,  or
-           does  not  appear in the file at all (so that tgetent has to search
+       o   and tgetent is searching for a terminal type  that  either  is  the
+           long  entry,  appears  in the termcap file after the long entry, or
+           does not appear in the file at all (so that tgetent has  to  search
            the whole termcap file).
 
-       Then tgetent will overwrite memory, perhaps  its  stack,  and  probably
-       core  dump the program.  Programs like telnet are particularly vulnera-
-       ble; modern telnets pass along values like the terminal type  automati-
-       cally.   The  results are almost as undesirable with a termcap library,
-       like SunOS 4.1.3 and Ultrix 4.4, that prints warning messages  when  it
-       reads  an  overly  long  termcap entry.  If a termcap library truncates
-       long entries, like OSF/1 3.0, it is  immune  to  dying  here  but  will
-       return incorrect data for the terminal.
+       Then  tgetent  will  overwrite  memory, perhaps its stack, and probably
+       core  dump  the  program.   Programs  like  telnet   are   particularly
+       vulnerable;  modern  telnets  pass  along values like the terminal type
+       automatically.  The results are almost as undesirable  with  a  termcap
+       library,  like SunOS 4.1.3 and Ultrix 4.4, that prints warning messages
+       when it reads an overly long  termcap  entry.   If  a  termcap  library
+       truncates  long entries, like OSF/1 3.0, it is immune to dying here but
+       will return incorrect data for the terminal.
 
-       The  "after  tc  expansion"  length  will  have a similar effect to the
+       The "after tc expansion" length will  have  a  similar  effect  to  the
        above, but only for people who actually set TERM to that terminal type,
-       since  tgetent  only  does "tc" expansion once it is found the terminal
+       since tgetent only does "tc" expansion once it is  found  the  terminal
        type it was looking for, not while searching.
 
-       In summary, a termcap entry that is longer than 1023 bytes  can  cause,
-       on  various  combinations of termcap libraries and applications, a core
-       dump, warnings, or incorrect operation.  If it is too long even  before
-       "tc"  expansion,  it will have this effect even for users of some other
-       terminal types and users whose TERM variable does not  have  a  termcap
+       In  summary,  a termcap entry that is longer than 1023 bytes can cause,
+       on various combinations of termcap libraries and applications,  a  core
+       dump,  warnings, or incorrect operation.  If it is too long even before
+       "tc" expansion, it will have this effect even for users of  some  other
+       terminal  types  and  users whose TERM variable does not have a termcap
        entry.
 
-       When  in  -C (translate to termcap) mode, the ncurses implementation of
-       tic(1m) issues warning messages when the pre-tc  length  of  a  termcap
-       translation  is  too  long.  The -c (check) option also checks resolved
+       When in -C (translate to termcap) mode, the ncurses  implementation  of
+       tic(1m)  issues  warning  messages  when the pre-tc length of a termcap
+       translation is too long.  The -c (check) option  also  checks  resolved
        (after tc expansion) lengths.

Binary Compatibility

-       It is not wise to count  on  portability  of  binary  terminfo  entries
-       between  commercial  UNIX  versions.   The problem is that there are at
-       least two versions of terminfo (under HP-UX  and  AIX)  which  diverged
-       from  System  V terminfo after SVr1, and have added extension capabili-
-       ties to the string table that (in the binary format) collide with  Sys-
-       tem V and XSI Curses extensions.
+       It  is  not  wise  to  count  on portability of binary terminfo entries
+       between commercial UNIX versions.  The problem is  that  there  are  at
+       least  two  versions  of  terminfo (under HP-UX and AIX) which diverged
+       from  System  V  terminfo  after  SVr1,  and   have   added   extension
+       capabilities  to  the  string table that (in the binary format) collide
+       with System V and XSI Curses extensions.

EXTENSIONS

-       Searching   for  terminal  descriptions  in  $HOME/.terminfo  and  TER-
-       MINFO_DIRS is not supported by older implementations.
+       Searching   for   terminal   descriptions   in   $HOME/.terminfo    and
+       TERMINFO_DIRS is not supported by older implementations.
 
-       Some SVr4 curses implementations, and all  previous  to  SVr4,  do  not
+       Some  SVr4  curses  implementations,  and  all previous to SVr4, do not
        interpret the %A and %O operators in parameter strings.
 
-       SVr4/XPG4  do  not  specify  whether msgr licenses movement while in an
-       alternate-character-set mode (such modes may, among other  things,  map
-       CR  and  NL  to  characters  that  do  not trigger local motions).  The
-       ncurses implementation ignores msgr in ALTCHARSET  mode.   This  raises
-       the  possibility that an XPG4 implementation making the opposite inter-
-       pretation may need terminfo entries  made  for  ncurses  to  have  msgr
+       SVr4/XPG4 do not specify whether msgr licenses  movement  while  in  an
+       alternate-character-set  mode  (such modes may, among other things, map
+       CR and NL to characters  that  do  not  trigger  local  motions).   The
+       ncurses  implementation  ignores  msgr in ALTCHARSET mode.  This raises
+       the  possibility  that  an  XPG4  implementation  making  the  opposite
+       interpretation  may need terminfo entries made for ncurses to have msgr
        turned off.
 
        The ncurses library handles insert-character and insert-character modes
-       in a slightly non-standard way to get better  update  efficiency.   See
+       in  a  slightly  non-standard way to get better update efficiency.  See
        the Insert/Delete Character subsection above.
 
-       The  parameter  substitutions  for  set_clock and display_clock are not
-       documented in SVr4 or the XSI Curses standard.  They are  deduced  from
+       The parameter substitutions for set_clock  and  display_clock  are  not
+       documented  in  SVr4 or the XSI Curses standard.  They are deduced from
        the documentation for the AT&T 505 terminal.
 
-       Be  careful  assigning the kmous capability.  The ncurses library wants
-       to interpret it as KEY_MOUSE, for use by terminals and  emulators  like
-       xterm  that can return mouse-tracking information in the keyboard-input
+       Be careful assigning the kmous capability.  The ncurses  library  wants
+       to  interpret  it as KEY_MOUSE, for use by terminals and emulators like
+       xterm that can return mouse-tracking information in the  keyboard-input
        stream.
 
-       X/Open Curses does not mention  italics.   Portable  applications  must
-       assume  that  numeric  capabilities  are  signed  16-bit  values.  This
-       includes the no_color_video (ncv) capability.   The  32768  mask  value
-       used  for  italics with ncv can be confused with an absent or cancelled
-       ncv.  If italics should work with colors, then the ncv  value  must  be
+       X/Open  Curses  does  not  mention italics.  Portable applications must
+       assume that  numeric  capabilities  are  signed  16-bit  values.   This
+       includes  the  no_color_video  (ncv)  capability.  The 32768 mask value
+       used for italics with ncv can be confused with an absent  or  cancelled
+       ncv.   If  italics  should work with colors, then the ncv value must be
        specified, even if it is zero.
 
-       Different  commercial  ports  of  terminfo and curses support different
-       subsets of the XSI Curses standard and (in some cases) different exten-
-       sion sets.  Here is a summary, accurate as of October 1995:
+       Different commercial ports of terminfo  and  curses  support  different
+       subsets  of  the  XSI  Curses  standard  and  (in some cases) different
+       extension sets.  Here is a summary, accurate as of October 1995:
 
        o   SVR4, Solaris, ncurses -- These support all SVr4 capabilities.
 
        o   SGI -- Supports the SVr4 set, adds one undocumented extended string
            capability (set_pglen).
 
-       o   SVr1, Ultrix -- These support a restricted subset of terminfo capa-
-           bilities.   The  booleans  end  with  xon_xoff;  the  numerics with
+       o   SVr1,  Ultrix  --  These  support  a  restricted subset of terminfo
+           capabilities.  The booleans end with xon_xoff;  the  numerics  with
            width_status_line; and the strings with prtr_non.
 
-       o   HP/UX -- Supports the  SVr1  subset,  plus  the  SVr[234]  numerics
-           num_labels,   label_height,  label_width,  plus  function  keys  11
-           through 63, plus plab_norm,  label_on,  and  label_off,  plus  some
+       o   HP/UX  --  Supports  the  SVr1  subset,  plus the SVr[234] numerics
+           num_labels,  label_height,  label_width,  plus  function  keys   11
+           through  63,  plus  plab_norm,  label_on,  and label_off, plus some
            incompatible extensions in the string table.
 
-       o   AIX  -- Supports the SVr1 subset, plus function keys 11 through 63,
+       o   AIX -- Supports the SVr1 subset, plus function keys 11 through  63,
            plus a number of incompatible string table extensions.
 
        o   OSF -- Supports both the SVr4 set and the AIX extensions.

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/?/*
-                                files containing terminal descriptions
+       /usr/share/terminfo/?/*  files containing terminal descriptions

SEE ALSO

-       tabs(1), tic(1m), infocmp(1m), curses(3x),  curs_color(3x),  curs_vari-
-       ables(3x), printf(3), term(5).  term_variables(3x).  user_caps(5).
+       infocmp(1m),     tabs(1),    tic(1m),    curses(3x),    curs_color(3x),
+       curs_variables(3x),    printf(3),     term_variables(3x).      term(5).
+       user_caps(5).

AUTHORS

diff --git a/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html b/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html
index b36c5e0e..6074d411 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: tic.1m,v 1.77 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: tic.1m,v 1.78 2020/12/19 21:32:45 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -56,8 +56,8 @@

DESCRIPTION

-       The tic command translates a terminfo file from source format into com-
-       piled  format.   The  compiled  format  is  necessary  for use with the
+       The tic command translates a terminfo  file  from  source  format  into
+       compiled  format.   The  compiled  format is necessary for use with the
        library routines in ncurses(3x).
 
        As described in term(5), the database may be either  a  directory  tree
@@ -65,8 +65,8 @@
        entry).  The tic command writes only one type of  entry,  depending  on
        how it was built:
 
-       o   For directory trees, the top-level directory, e.g., /usr/share/ter-
-           minfo, specifies the location of the database.
+       o   For    directory    trees,    the    top-level   directory,   e.g.,
+           /usr/share/terminfo, specifies the location of the database.
 
        o   For hashed databases, a filename is needed.  If the given  file  is
            not  found  by  that  name,  but  can be found by adding the suffix
@@ -75,26 +75,25 @@
            The default name for the hashed database is the same as the default
            directory name (only adding a ".db" suffix).
 
-       In either case (directory or hashed database), tic will create the con-
-       tainer if it does not exist.  For a directory, this would be the  "ter-
-       minfo" leaf, versus a "terminfo.db" file.
+       In  either  case  (directory  or  hashed database), tic will create the
+       container if it does not exist.  For a directory,  this  would  be  the
+       "terminfo" leaf, versus a "terminfo.db" file.
 
        The  results  are  normally  placed  in  the  system  terminfo database
-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo.  The compiled terminal description can
-       be  placed  in  a  different  terminfo database.  There are two ways to
-       achieve this:
+       /usr/share/terminfo.  The compiled terminal description can  be  placed
+       in a different terminfo database.  There are two ways to achieve this:
 
-       o   First, you may override the system default either by using  the  -o
-           option,  or by setting the variable TERMINFO in your shell environ-
-           ment to a valid database location.
+       o   First,  you  may override the system default either by using the -o
+           option,  or  by  setting  the  variable  TERMINFO  in  your   shell
+           environment to a valid database location.
 
-       o   Secondly, if tic cannot write in /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo or
-           the  location  specified using your TERMINFO variable, it looks for
-           the  directory  $HOME/.terminfo  (or  hashed  database  $HOME/.ter-
-           minfo.db); if that location exists, the entry is placed there.
+       o   Secondly,  if  tic  cannot  write  in  /usr/share/terminfo  or  the
+           location specified using your TERMINFO variable, it looks  for  the
+           directory  $HOME/.terminfo (or hashed database $HOME/.terminfo.db);
+           if that location exists, the entry is placed there.
 
-       Libraries  that  read terminfo entries are expected to check in succes-
-       sion
+       Libraries  that  read  terminfo  entries  are  expected  to  check   in
+       succession
 
        o   a location specified with the TERMINFO environment variable,
 
@@ -102,10 +101,9 @@
 
        o   directories listed in the TERMINFO_DIRS environment variable,
 
-       o   a compiled-in list  of  directories  (/usr/local/ncurses/share/ter-
-           minfo:/usr/share/terminfo), and
+       o   a compiled-in list of directories (no default value), and
 
-       o   the system terminfo database (/usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo).
+       o   the system terminfo database (/usr/share/terminfo).

ALIASES

@@ -122,10 +120,10 @@
 
        -1     restricts the output to a single column
 
-       -a     tells tic to retain commented-out capabilities rather than  dis-
-              carding them.  Capabilities are commented by prefixing them with
-              a period.  This sets the -x option, because it treats  the  com-
-              mented-out  entries  as  user-defined  names.   If the source is
+       -a     tells tic  to  retain  commented-out  capabilities  rather  than
+              discarding  them.   Capabilities are commented by prefixing them
+              with a period.  This sets the -x option, because it  treats  the
+              commented-out  entries  as user-defined names.  If the source is
               termcap, accept the 2-character names  required  by  version  6.
               Otherwise these are ignored.
 
@@ -150,26 +148,26 @@
               o   capabilities  with more than one delay or with delays before
                   the end of the string will not convert completely.
 
-       -c     tells tic to only check file for errors, including syntax  prob-
-              lems  and  bad  use-links.   If  you  specify  -C (-I) with this
+       -c     tells tic to  only  check  file  for  errors,  including  syntax
+              problems  and  bad  use-links.  If you specify -C (-I) with this
               option, the code will print warnings about entries which,  after
               use  resolution, are more than 1023 (4096) bytes long.  Due to a
               fixed buffer length in older termcap libraries, as well as buggy
-              checking  for  the buffer length (and a documented limit in ter-
-              minfo), these entries may cause core dumps with other  implemen-
-              tations.
+              checking  for  the  buffer  length  (and  a  documented limit in
+              terminfo),  these  entries  may  cause  core  dumps  with  other
+              implementations.
 
-              tic checks string capabilities to ensure that those with parame-
-              ters will be valid expressions.  It does this check only for the
-              predefined string capabilities; those which are defined with the
-              -x option are ignored.
+              tic  checks  string  capabilities  to  ensure  that  those  with
+              parameters will be valid expressions.  It does this  check  only
+              for  the predefined string capabilities; those which are defined
+              with the -x option are ignored.
 
        -D     tells tic to print the database locations that it  knows  about,
               and exit.  The first location shown is the one to which it would
               write compiled terminal descriptions.  If tic  is  not  able  to
-              find  a writable database location according to the rules summa-
-              rized above, it will print a diagnostic and exit with  an  error
-              rather than printing a list of database locations.
+              find  a  writable  database  location  according  to  the  rules
+              summarized above, it will print a diagnostic and  exit  with  an
+              error rather than printing a list of database locations.
 
        -e names
               Limit  writes  and translations to the following comma-separated
@@ -177,8 +175,8 @@
               one  of  the  names  in  the  list, the entry will be written or
               translated as normal.  Otherwise no output will be generated for
               it.   The  option  value is interpreted as a file containing the
-              list if it contains a '/'.  (Note: depending on how tic was com-
-              piled, this option may require -I or -C.)
+              list if it contains a '/'.  (Note:  depending  on  how  tic  was
+              compiled, this option may require -I or -C.)
 
        -f     Display     complex     terminfo     strings    which    contain
               if/then/else/endif expressions indented for readability.
@@ -199,8 +197,8 @@
 
        -N     Disable smart defaults.  Normally, when translating from termcap
               to  terminfo,  the  compiler makes a number of assumptions about
-              the  defaults  of  string   capabilities   reset1_string,   car-
-              riage_return,  cursor_left,  cursor_down,  scroll_forward,  tab,
+              the   defaults    of    string    capabilities    reset1_string,
+              carriage_return,  cursor_left, cursor_down, scroll_forward, tab,
               newline, key_backspace, key_left, and key_down, then attempts to
               use  obsolete termcap capabilities to deduce correct values.  It
               also normally suppresses output of obsolete termcap capabilities
@@ -211,8 +209,8 @@
               the TERMINFO environment variable.
 
        -Qn    Rather  than  show  source  in terminfo (text) format, print the
-              compiled (binary) format in hexadecimal or base64 form,  depend-
-              ing on the option's value:
+              compiled  (binary)  format  in  hexadecimal  or   base64   form,
+              depending on the option's value:
 
                1  hexadecimal
 
@@ -226,18 +224,18 @@
        -Rsubset
               Restrict output to a given subset.  This option is for use  with
               archaic  versions  of  terminfo  like  those on SVr1, Ultrix, or
-              HP/UX that do not support the full set of SVR4/XSI  Curses  ter-
-              minfo;  and  outright  broken ports like AIX 3.x that have their
+              HP/UX that do not  support  the  full  set  of  SVR4/XSI  Curses
+              terminfo; and outright broken ports like AIX 3.x that have their
               own extensions incompatible with  SVr4/XSI.   Available  subsets
               are "SVr1", "Ultrix", "HP", "BSD" and "AIX"; see terminfo(5) for
               details.
 
-       -r     Force entry resolution (so there are no remaining  tc  capabili-
-              ties)  even  when doing translation to termcap format.  This may
-              be needed if you are preparing a  termcap  file  for  a  termcap
-              library  (such as GNU termcap through version 1.3 or BSD termcap
-              through 4.3BSD) that does not handle  multiple  tc  capabilities
-              per entry.
+       -r     Force  entry  resolution  (so  there   are   no   remaining   tc
+              capabilities)  even  when  doing  translation to termcap format.
+              This may be needed if you are preparing a  termcap  file  for  a
+              termcap  library (such as GNU termcap through version 1.3 or BSD
+              termcap  through  4.3BSD)  that  does  not  handle  multiple  tc
+              capabilities per entry.
 
        -s     Summarize  the  compile  by  showing  the database location into
               which entries are written, and the number of entries  which  are
@@ -245,12 +243,12 @@
 
        -T     eliminates  size-restrictions  on  the  generated text.  This is
               mainly useful for  testing  and  analysis,  since  the  compiled
-              descriptions  are limited (e.g., 1023 for termcap, 4096 for ter-
-              minfo).
+              descriptions  are  limited  (e.g.,  1023  for  termcap, 4096 for
+              terminfo).
 
        -t     tells tic to discard commented-out capabilities.  Normally  when
-              translating  from  terminfo to termcap, untranslatable capabili-
-              ties are commented-out.
+              translating    from    terminfo   to   termcap,   untranslatable
+              capabilities are commented-out.
 
        -U   tells tic to not post-process the data after  parsing  the  source
             file.  Normally, it infers data which is commonly missing in older
@@ -265,8 +263,8 @@
             The optional parameter n is a number  from  1  to  10,  inclusive,
             indicating the desired level of detail of information.  If ncurses
             is built  without  tracing  support,  the  optional  parameter  is
-            ignored.  If n is omitted, the default level is 1.  If n is speci-
-            fied and greater than 1, the level of detail is increased.
+            ignored.   If  n  is  omitted,  the  default  level is 1.  If n is
+            specified and greater than 1, the level of detail is increased.
 
             The debug flag levels are as follows:
 
@@ -296,11 +294,11 @@
             it is omitted, it defaults to 60.
 
        -x   Treat  unknown  capabilities  as  user-defined (see user_caps(5)).
-            That is, if you supply a capability name which tic does not recog-
-            nize,  it will infer its type (boolean, number or string) from the
-            syntax and make an extended table entry  for  that.   User-defined
-            capability strings whose name begins with "k" are treated as func-
-            tion keys.
+            That is, if you supply  a  capability  name  which  tic  does  not
+            recognize, it will infer its type (boolean, number or string) from
+            the syntax and make an  extended  table  entry  for  that.   User-
+            defined  capability strings whose name begins with "k" are treated
+            as function keys.

PARAMETERS

@@ -317,11 +315,11 @@
        terminfo(5).  The exception is the use capability.
 
        When a use=entry-name field is discovered in a terminal entry currently
-       being     compiled,     tic     reads     in     the     binary    from
-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo to complete the entry.   (Entries  cre-
-       ated  from file will be used first.  tic duplicates the capabilities in
-       entry-name for the current entry, with the exception of those capabili-
-       ties that explicitly are defined in the current entry.
+       being  compiled,  tic  reads  in the binary from /usr/share/terminfo to
+       complete the entry.  (Entries created from file  will  be  used  first.
+       tic  duplicates  the  capabilities in entry-name for the current entry,
+       with the exception of those capabilities that explicitly are defined in
+       the current entry.
 
        When  an  entry, e.g., entry_name_1, contains a use=entry_name_2 field,
        any  canceled  capabilities  in  entry_name_2  must  also   appear   in
@@ -344,32 +342,33 @@
        System  V  Release 3 provided a different tic utility, written by Pavel
        Curtis, (originally named "compile" in pcurses).  This added an  option
        -c  to check the file for errors, with the caveat that errors in "use="
-       links would not be reported.  System V Release 3 documented a few warn-
-       ing messages which did not appear in pcurses.  While the program itself
-       was changed little as development continued with System  V  Release  4,
-       the table of capabilities grew from 180 (pcurses) to 464 (Solaris).
-
-       In  early  development of ncurses (1993), Zeyd Ben-Halim used the table
-       from mytinfo to extend the  pcurses  table  to  469  capabilities  (456
-       matched  SVr4, 8 were only in SVr4, 13 were not in SVr4).  Of those 13,
-       11 were ultimately discarded (perhaps to  match  the  draft  of  X/Open
-       Curses).   The exceptions were memory_lock_above and memory_unlock (see
+       links would not be reported.  System  V  Release  3  documented  a  few
+       warning  messages  which  did not appear in pcurses.  While the program
+       itself was changed  little  as  development  continued  with  System  V
+       Release  4,  the  table  of capabilities grew from 180 (pcurses) to 464
+       (Solaris).
+
+       In early development of ncurses (1993), Zeyd Ben-Halim used  the  table
+       from  mytinfo  to  extend  the  pcurses  table to 469 capabilities (456
+       matched SVr4, 8 were only in SVr4, 13 were not in SVr4).  Of those  13,
+       11  were  ultimately  discarded  (perhaps  to match the draft of X/Open
+       Curses).  The exceptions were memory_lock_above and memory_unlock  (see
        user_caps(5)).
 
-       Eric Raymond incorporated parts of mytinfo into  ncurses  to  implement
-       the  termcap-to-terminfo  source conversion, and extended that to begin
+       Eric  Raymond  incorporated  parts of mytinfo into ncurses to implement
+       the termcap-to-terminfo source conversion, and extended that  to  begin
        development of the corresponding terminfo-to-termcap source conversion,
-       Thomas  Dickey  completed  that  development over the course of several
+       Thomas Dickey completed that development over  the  course  of  several
        years.
 
-       In 1999, Thomas Dickey added the  -x  option  to  support  user-defined
+       In  1999,  Thomas  Dickey  added  the -x option to support user-defined
        capabilities.
 
-       In  2010,  Roy  Marples provided a tic program and terminfo library for
-       NetBSD.  That implementation  adapts  several  features  from  ncurses,
+       In 2010, Roy Marples provided a tic program and  terminfo  library  for
+       NetBSD.   That  implementation  adapts  several  features from ncurses,
        including tic's -x option.
 
-       The  -c  option  tells tic to check for problems in the terminfo source
+       The -c option tells tic to check for problems in  the  terminfo  source
        file.  Continued development provides additional checks:
 
        o   pcurses had 8 warnings
@@ -384,54 +383,54 @@
 
        The checking done in ncurses' tic helps with the conversion to termcap,
        as well as pointing out errors and inconsistencies.  It is also used to
-       ensure consistency with the user-defined capabilities.  There  are  527
-       distinct  capabilities  in ncurses' terminal database; 128 of those are
+       ensure  consistency  with the user-defined capabilities.  There are 527
+       distinct capabilities in ncurses' terminal database; 128 of  those  are
        user-defined.

PORTABILITY

-       X/Open Curses, Issue 7 (2009) provides a brief description of tic.   It
-       lists  one  option:  -c.  The omission of -v is unexpected.  The change
-       history states that  the  description  is  derived  from  True64  UNIX.
-       According  to  its  manual  pages,  that  system  also supported the -v
+       X/Open  Curses, Issue 7 (2009) provides a brief description of tic.  It
+       lists one option: -c.  The omission of -v is  unexpected.   The  change
+       history  states  that  the  description  is  derived  from True64 UNIX.
+       According to its manual  pages,  that  system  also  supported  the  -v
        option.
 
-       Shortly after Issue 7 was released,  Tru64  was  discontinued.   As  of
-       2019,  the  surviving  implementations  of tic are SVr4 (AIX, HP-UX and
+       Shortly  after  Issue  7  was  released, Tru64 was discontinued.  As of
+       2019, the surviving implementations of tic are  SVr4  (AIX,  HP-UX  and
        Solaris), ncurses and NetBSD curses.  The SVr4 tic programs all support
-       the  -v option.  The NetBSD tic program follows X/Open's documentation,
+       the -v option.  The NetBSD tic program follows X/Open's  documentation,
        omitting the -v option.
 
-       The X/Open rationale states that some implementations of tic read  ter-
-       minal  descriptions  from  the  standard input if the file parameter is
-       omitted.  None of these implementations do that.  Further, it  comments
-       that some may choose to read from "./terminfo.src" but that is obsoles-
-       cent behavior from SVr2, and is not (for example) a documented  feature
-       of SVr3.
+       The  X/Open  rationale  states  that  some  implementations of tic read
+       terminal descriptions from the standard input if the file parameter  is
+       omitted.   None of these implementations do that.  Further, it comments
+       that some  may  choose  to  read  from  "./terminfo.src"  but  that  is
+       obsolescent  behavior  from SVr2, and is not (for example) a documented
+       feature of SVr3.

COMPATIBILITY

-       There  is  some  evidence  that  historic  tic  implementations treated
-       description fields with no whitespace in them as additional aliases  or
-       short names.  This tic does not do that, but it does warn when descrip-
-       tion fields may be treated that way and check them for dangerous  char-
-       acters.
+       There is  some  evidence  that  historic  tic  implementations  treated
+       description  fields with no whitespace in them as additional aliases or
+       short names.  This tic  does  not  do  that,  but  it  does  warn  when
+       description fields may be treated that way and check them for dangerous
+       characters.

EXTENSIONS

-       Unlike  the  SVr4 tic command, this implementation can actually compile
-       termcap sources.  In fact, entries in terminfo and termcap  syntax  can
-       be  mixed  in  a  single  source file.  See terminfo(5) for the list of
+       Unlike the SVr4 tic command, this implementation can  actually  compile
+       termcap  sources.   In fact, entries in terminfo and termcap syntax can
+       be mixed in a single source file.  See  terminfo(5)  for  the  list  of
        termcap names taken to be equivalent to terminfo names.
 
-       The SVr4 manual pages are not clear on the  resolution  rules  for  use
-       capabilities.   This  implementation  of tic will find use targets any-
-       where in the source file, or anywhere in the file tree rooted  at  TER-
-       MINFO  (if TERMINFO is defined), or in the user's $HOME/.terminfo data-
-       base (if it exists), or (finally) anywhere in the system's file tree of
-       compiled entries.
+       The  SVr4  manual  pages  are not clear on the resolution rules for use
+       capabilities.   This  implementation  of  tic  will  find  use  targets
+       anywhere  in  the  source  file, or anywhere in the file tree rooted at
+       TERMINFO (if TERMINFO is defined), or  in  the  user's  $HOME/.terminfo
+       database  (if  it  exists),  or (finally) anywhere in the system's file
+       tree of compiled entries.
 
-       The  error  messages  from this tic have the same format as GNU C error
+       The error messages from this tic have the same format as  GNU  C  error
        messages, and can be parsed by GNU Emacs's compile facility.
 
        Aside from -c and -v, options are not portable:
@@ -444,25 +443,25 @@
 
            -a -o -x
 
-           and adds -S (a feature which does the same thing  as  infocmp's  -e
+           and  adds  -S  (a feature which does the same thing as infocmp's -e
            and -E options).
 
        The SVr4 -c mode does not report bad "use=" links.
 
-       System  V  does  not  compile  entries  to  or  read  entries from your
+       System V does  not  compile  entries  to  or  read  entries  from  your
        $HOME/.terminfo database unless TERMINFO is explicitly set to it.

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/?/*
+       /usr/share/terminfo/?/*
             Compiled terminal description database.

SEE ALSO

-       infocmp(1m),   captoinfo(1m),   infotocap(1m),   toe(1m),   curses(3x),
+       captoinfo(1m),   infocmp(1m),   infotocap(1m),   toe(1m),   curses(3x),
        term(5).  terminfo(5).  user_caps(5).
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).

AUTHOR

diff --git a/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html b/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html
index 30454d6f..212de1cc 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: toe.1m,v 1.32 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: toe.1m,v 1.33 2020/12/19 21:52:09 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -57,17 +57,17 @@

DESCRIPTION

        With no options, toe lists all available terminal types by primary name
        with descriptions.   File  arguments  specify  the  directories  to  be
-       scanned;  if  no such arguments are given, your default terminfo direc-
-       tory is scanned.  If you also specify the -h option, a directory header
-       will be issued as each directory is entered.
+       scanned;  if  no  such  arguments  are  given,  your  default  terminfo
+       directory is scanned.  If you also specify the -h option,  a  directory
+       header will be issued as each directory is entered.
 
        There are other options intended for use by terminfo file maintainers:
 
        -a     report  on  all  of  the  terminal databases which ncurses would
               search, rather than only the first one that it finds.
 
-              If the -s is also given, toe adds a column to the report,  show-
-              ing  (like  conflict(1))  which  entries which belong to a given
+              If the -s is also given,  toe  adds  a  column  to  the  report,
+              showing (like conflict(1)) which entries which belong to a given
               terminal database.  An "*" marks entries which differ,  and  "+"
               marks equivalent entries.
 
@@ -77,22 +77,22 @@
        -s     sort the output by the entry names.
 
        -u file
-              says to write a report to the standard output, listing dependen-
-              cies in the given terminfo/termcap source file.  The report con-
-              denses the "use" relation: each line  consists  of  the  primary
-              name  of  a  terminal  that  has use capabilities, followed by a
-              colon, followed by the whitespace-separated primary names of all
-              terminals  which  occur in those use capabilities, followed by a
-              newline
+              says  to  write  a  report  to  the  standard  output,   listing
+              dependencies  in  the  given  terminfo/termcap source file.  The
+              report condenses the "use" relation: each line consists  of  the
+              primary  name  of a terminal that has use capabilities, followed
+              by a colon, followed by the whitespace-separated  primary  names
+              of all terminals which occur in those use capabilities, followed
+              by a newline
 
        -U file
               says to write a report to the standard output,  listing  reverse
               dependencies  in  the  given  terminfo/termcap source file.  The
               report reverses the "use" relation: each line  consists  of  the
-              primary name of a terminal that occurs in use capabilities, fol-
-              lowed by a colon, followed by the  whitespace-separated  primary
-              names  of  all  terminals which depend on it, followed by a new-
-              line.
+              primary  name  of  a  terminal  that occurs in use capabilities,
+              followed  by  a  colon,  followed  by  the  whitespace-separated
+              primary names of all terminals which depend on it, followed by a
+              newline.
 
        -vn    specifies that (verbose) output be written  to  standard  error,
               showing toe's progress.
@@ -107,8 +107,8 @@

EXAMPLES

        Without sorting, the -a option reports all of the names found in all of
-       the terminal databases found by the TERMINFO and TERMINFO_DIRS environ-
-       ment variables:
+       the   terminal  databases  found  by  the  TERMINFO  and  TERMINFO_DIRS
+       environment variables:
 
            MtxOrb162      16x2 Matrix Orbital LCD display
            MtxOrb204      20x4 Matrix Orbital LCD display
@@ -124,8 +124,8 @@
            qansi-t        QNX ansi without console writes
            . . .
 
-       Use the -a and -s options together to show where each terminal descrip-
-       tion was found:
+       Use the -a  and  -s  options  together  to  show  where  each  terminal
+       description was found:
 
            --> /usr/local/ncurses/share/terminfo
            ----> /usr/share/terminfo
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo/?/*
+       /usr/share/terminfo/?/*
             Compiled terminal description database.
 
 
@@ -168,10 +168,10 @@

SEE ALSO

-       tic(1m), infocmp(1m), captoinfo(1m),  infotocap(1m),  curses(3x),  ter-
-       minfo(5).
+       captoinfo(1m),   infocmp(1m),   infotocap(1m),   tic(1m),   curses(3x),
+       terminfo(5).
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/tput.1.html b/doc/html/man/tput.1.html
index 92ec516d..2378f5ac 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/tput.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/tput.1.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: tput.1,v 1.64 2020/04/25 21:52:49 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: tput.1,v 1.65 2020/12/19 22:17:47 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -62,11 +62,11 @@

DESCRIPTION

-       The  tput utility uses the terminfo database to make the values of ter-
-       minal-dependent capabilities and information  available  to  the  shell
+       The  tput  utility  uses  the  terminfo  database to make the values of
+       terminal-dependent capabilities and information available to the  shell
        (see  sh(1)),  to  initialize or reset the terminal, or return the long
-       name of the requested terminal type.  The result depends upon the capa-
-       bility's type:
+       name of the requested terminal  type.   The  result  depends  upon  the
+       capability's type:
 
           string
                tput  writes  the  string  to the standard output.  No trailing
@@ -90,9 +90,9 @@

Options

        -S     allows more than one capability per  invocation  of  tput.   The
               capabilities  must  be  passed  to  tput from the standard input
-              instead of from the command line (see example).  Only  one  cap-
-              name  is allowed per line.  The -S option changes the meaning of
-              the 0 and 1 boolean and string exit codes (see  the  EXIT  CODES
+              instead of from  the  command  line  (see  example).   Only  one
+              capname  is allowed per line.  The -S option changes the meaning
+              of the 0 and 1 boolean and string exit codes (see the EXIT CODES
               section).
 
               Because  some capabilities may use string parameters rather than
@@ -100,10 +100,10 @@
               input  to  decide whether to use tparm(3x), and how to interpret
               the parameters.
 
-       -Ttype indicates the type of terminal.  Normally this option is  unnec-
-              essary,  because the default is taken from the environment vari-
-              able TERM.  If -T is specified, then the shell  variables  LINES
-              and COLUMNS will also be ignored.
+       -Ttype indicates  the  type  of  terminal.   Normally  this  option  is
+              unnecessary,  because  the default is taken from the environment
+              variable TERM.  If -T is specified,  then  the  shell  variables
+              LINES and COLUMNS will also be ignored.
 
        -V     reports  the  version of ncurses which was used in this program,
               and exits.
@@ -116,15 +116,15 @@
        A few commands (init, reset and longname) are special; they are defined
        by the tput program.  The others are the names of capabilities from the
        terminal  database  (see  terminfo(5)  for  a list).  Although init and
-       reset resemble capability names, tput uses several capabilities to per-
-       form these special functions.
+       reset resemble capability names,  tput  uses  several  capabilities  to
+       perform these special functions.
 
        capname
               indicates the capability from the terminal database.
 
-              If  the  capability is a string that takes parameters, the argu-
-              ments following the capability will be used  as  parameters  for
-              the string.
+              If  the  capability  is  a  string  that  takes  parameters, the
+              arguments following the capability will be  used  as  parameters
+              for the string.
 
               Most  parameters  are numbers.  Only a few terminal capabilities
               require string parameters; tput uses a table to decide which  to
@@ -146,14 +146,14 @@
 
                    o   ultimately "/dev/tty"
 
-                   to  obtain  terminal settings.  Having retrieved these set-
-                   tings, tput remembers which file  descriptor  to  use  when
+                   to   obtain  terminal  settings.   Having  retrieved  these
+                   settings, tput remembers which file descriptor to use  when
                    updating settings.
 
               (2)  if  the  window  size cannot be obtained from the operating
                    system, but the terminal description (or environment, e.g.,
-                   LINES and COLUMNS variables specify this), update the oper-
-                   ating system's notion of the window size.
+                   LINES  and  COLUMNS  variables  specify  this),  update the
+                   operating system's notion of the window size.
 
               (3)  the terminal modes will be updated:
 
@@ -189,11 +189,11 @@
                    o   reset  any  unset  special  characters to their default
                        values
 
-              (2)  Instead of putting out initialization strings,  the  termi-
-                   nal's  reset  strings  will be output if present (rs1, rs2,
-                   rs3, rf).  If the reset strings are not present,  but  ini-
-                   tialization strings are, the initialization strings will be
-                   output.
+              (2)  Instead  of  putting  out   initialization   strings,   the
+                   terminal's  reset  strings  will be output if present (rs1,
+                   rs2, rs3, rf).  If the reset strings are not  present,  but
+                   initialization strings are, the initialization strings will
+                   be output.
 
               Otherwise, reset acts identically to init.
 
@@ -201,8 +201,8 @@
               If the terminal database is present and an entry for the  user's
               terminal  exists  (see  -Ttype above), then the long name of the
               terminal will be put out.  The long name is the last name in the
-              first  line  of the terminal's description in the terminfo data-
-              base [see term(5)].
+              first  line  of  the  terminal's  description  in  the  terminfo
+              database [see term(5)].

Aliases

@@ -210,8 +210,8 @@
        for the possibility that it is invoked by a link with those names.
 
        If  tput  is invoked by a link named reset, this has the same effect as
-       tput reset.  The tset(1) utility also treats a link  named  reset  spe-
-       cially.
+       tput reset.  The  tset(1)  utility  also  treats  a  link  named  reset
+       specially.
 
        Before ncurses 6.1, the two utilities were different from each other:
 
@@ -220,8 +220,8 @@
 
        o   On the other hand, tset's repertoire of terminal  capabilities  for
            resetting  the terminal was more limited, i.e., only reset_1string,
-           reset_2string and reset_file in contrast to the tab-stops and  mar-
-           gins which are set by this utility.
+           reset_2string and reset_file  in  contrast  to  the  tab-stops  and
+           margins which are set by this utility.
 
        o   The  reset  program  is  usually an alias for tset, because of this
            difference with resetting terminal modes and special characters.
@@ -229,17 +229,17 @@
        With the changes made for ncurses 6.1, the reset  feature  of  the  two
        programs is (mostly) the same.  A few differences remain:
 
-       o   The  tset  program waits one second when resetting, in case it hap-
-           pens to be a hardware terminal.
+       o   The  tset  program  waits  one  second  when  resetting, in case it
+           happens to be a hardware terminal.
 
-       o   The two programs write the terminal initialization strings to  dif-
-           ferent  streams (i.e., the standard error for tset and the standard
-           output for tput).
+       o   The two programs  write  the  terminal  initialization  strings  to
+           different  streams  (i.e.,  the  standard  error  for  tset and the
+           standard output for tput).
 
-           Note: although these programs write to different streams, redirect-
-           ing their output to a file will capture only part of their actions.
-           The changes to the terminal modes are not affected  by  redirecting
-           the output.
+           Note:  although  these  programs  write   to   different   streams,
+           redirecting  their output to a file will capture only part of their
+           actions.  The changes to the terminal modes  are  not  affected  by
+           redirecting the output.
 
        If  tput  is  invoked by a link named init, this has the same effect as
        tput init.  Again, you are less likely to use that link because another
@@ -247,9 +247,9 @@

Terminal Size

-       Besides  the  special  commands (e.g., clear), tput treats certain ter-
-       minfo capabilities specially: lines and cols.  tput calls setupterm(3x)
-       to obtain the terminal size:
+       Besides  the  special  commands  (e.g.,  clear),  tput  treats  certain
+       terminfo  capabilities  specially:  lines   and   cols.    tput   calls
+       setupterm(3x) to obtain the terminal size:
 
        o   first, it gets the size from the terminal database (which generally
            is not provided for terminal emulators which do not  have  a  fixed
@@ -294,9 +294,9 @@
 
        bold=`tput smso` offbold=`tput rmso`
             Set the shell variables bold, to begin  stand-out  mode  sequence,
-            and offbold, to end standout mode sequence, for the current termi-
-            nal.  This might be followed by a prompt: echo "${bold}Please type
-            in your name: ${offbold}\c"
+            and  offbold,  to  end  standout  mode  sequence,  for the current
+            terminal.  This might be followed by a prompt: echo "${bold}Please
+            type in your name: ${offbold}\c"
 
        tput hc
             Set  exit  code to indicate if the current terminal is a hard copy
@@ -321,12 +321,12 @@
 
             This example shows tput processing  several  capabilities  in  one
             invocation.   It  clears  the screen, moves the cursor to position
-            10, 10 and turns on bold (extra bright) mode.  The list is  termi-
-            nated by an exclamation mark (!) on a line by itself.
+            10, 10 and turns  on  bold  (extra  bright)  mode.   The  list  is
+            terminated by an exclamation mark (!) on a line by itself.

FILES

-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo
+       /usr/share/terminfo
               compiled terminal description database
 
        /usr/share/tabset/*
@@ -342,16 +342,16 @@
        lines with errors.  If no errors are found, the exit  code  is  0.   No
        indication  of which line failed can be given so exit code 1 will never
        appear.  Exit codes 2, 3, and 4 retain their usual interpretation.   If
-       the  -S  option  is not used, the exit code depends on the type of cap-
-       name:
+       the  -S  option  is  not  used,  the  exit  code depends on the type of
+       capname:
 
           boolean
                  a value of 0 is set for TRUE and 1 for FALSE.
 
-          string a value of 0 is set if the capname is defined for this termi-
-                 nal  type  (the value of capname is returned on standard out-
-                 put); a value of 1 is set if capname is not defined for  this
-                 terminal type (nothing is written to standard output).
+          string a value of 0 is set  if  the  capname  is  defined  for  this
+                 terminal  type  (the value of capname is returned on standard
+                 output); a value of 1 is set if capname is  not  defined  for
+                 this terminal type (nothing is written to standard output).
 
           integer
                  a value of 0 is always set, whether or not capname is defined
@@ -391,28 +391,28 @@
        subcommands  (more  than  half  the program) were incorporated from the
        reset feature of BSD tset written by Eric Allman.
 
-       Keith Bostic replaced the BSD tput command in 1989 with a new implemen-
-       tation based on the AT&T System V program tput.  Like the AT&T program,
-       Bostic's version accepted some parameters named for terminfo  capabili-
-       ties  (clear,  init, longname and reset).  However (because he had only
-       termcap available), it accepted termcap names for  other  capabilities.
-       Also,  Bostic's  BSD  tput did not modify the terminal I/O modes as the
-       earlier BSD tset had done.
+       Keith Bostic  replaced  the  BSD  tput  command  in  1989  with  a  new
+       implementation  based on the AT&T System V program tput.  Like the AT&T
+       program, Bostic's version accepted some parameters named  for  terminfo
+       capabilities  (clear,  init,  longname and reset).  However (because he
+       had only termcap  available),  it  accepted  termcap  names  for  other
+       capabilities.   Also, Bostic's BSD tput did not modify the terminal I/O
+       modes as the earlier BSD tset had done.
 
        At the same time, Bostic added a shell script named "clear", which used
        tput to clear the screen.
 
-       Both of these appeared in 4.4BSD, becoming the "modern" BSD implementa-
-       tion of tput.
+       Both   of   these   appeared  in  4.4BSD,  becoming  the  "modern"  BSD
+       implementation of tput.
 
        This implementation of tput began from a different source than AT&T  or
        BSD:  Ross  Ridge's  mytinfo package, published on comp.sources.unix in
-       December 1992.  Ridge's program made more sophisticated use of the ter-
-       minal  capabilities  than the BSD program.  Eric Raymond used that tput
-       program (and other parts of mytinfo) in ncurses in  June  1995.   Using
-       the  portions dealing with terminal capabilities almost without change,
-       Raymond made improvements to the way the command-line  parameters  were
-       handled.
+       December 1992.  Ridge's program made  more  sophisticated  use  of  the
+       terminal  capabilities  than  the  BSD program.  Eric Raymond used that
+       tput program (and other parts of mytinfo)  in  ncurses  in  June  1995.
+       Using  the  portions  dealing with terminal capabilities almost without
+       change,  Raymond  made  improvements  to  the  way   the   command-line
+       parameters were handled.

PORTABILITY

@@ -420,14 +420,14 @@
        areas:
 
        o   tput capname writes to the standard output.  That  need  not  be  a
-           regular terminal.  However, the subcommands which manipulate termi-
-           nal modes may not use the standard output.
+           regular   terminal.   However,  the  subcommands  which  manipulate
+           terminal modes may not use the standard output.
 
            The AT&T implementation's init  and  reset  commands  use  the  BSD
-           (4.1c)  tset  source, which manipulates terminal modes.  It succes-
-           sively tries standard output, standard error, standard input before
-           falling back to "/dev/tty" and finally just assumes a 1200Bd termi-
-           nal.  When updating terminal modes, it ignores errors.
+           (4.1c)   tset   source,   which  manipulates  terminal  modes.   It
+           successively tries standard output, standard error, standard  input
+           before falling back to "/dev/tty" and finally just assumes a 1200Bd
+           terminal.  When updating terminal modes, it ignores errors.
 
            Until changes made after ncurses 6.0, tput did not modify  terminal
            modes.  tput now uses a similar scheme, using functions shared with
@@ -447,10 +447,10 @@
            for the standard capname operands, and an internal library function
            to analyze nonstandard capname operands.
 
-       This implementation (unlike others) can accept both  termcap  and  ter-
-       minfo names for the capname feature, if termcap support is compiled in.
-       However, the predefined termcap and terminfo names have two ambiguities
-       in this case (and the terminfo name is assumed):
+       This  implementation  (unlike  others)  can  accept  both  termcap  and
+       terminfo  names for the capname feature, if termcap support is compiled
+       in.  However, the  predefined  termcap  and  terminfo  names  have  two
+       ambiguities in this case (and the terminfo name is assumed):
 
        o   The  termcap  name  dl corresponds to the terminfo name dl1 (delete
            one line).
@@ -471,8 +471,8 @@
        There are a few interesting observations to make regarding that:
 
        o   In  this implementation, clear is part of the capname support.  The
-           others (init and longname) do not correspond to terminal  capabili-
-           ties.
+           others  (init  and  longname)  do  not   correspond   to   terminal
+           capabilities.
 
        o   Other  implementations  of  tput  on  SVr4-based  systems  such  as
            Solaris, IRIX64 and HPUX as well as others such as  AIX  and  Tru64
@@ -492,24 +492,24 @@
 
        o   That  is,  there  are  two standards for tput: POSIX (a subset) and
            X/Open Curses (the full implementation).  POSIX documents a  subset
-           to avoid the complication of including X/Open Curses and the termi-
-           nal capabilities database.
+           to  avoid  the  complication  of  including  X/Open  Curses and the
+           terminal capabilities database.
 
        o   While it is certainly possible to  write  a  tput  program  without
-           using  curses,  none of the systems which have a curses implementa-
-           tion provide a tput utility which does not provide the capname fea-
-           ture.
+           using   curses,   none   of   the   systems  which  have  a  curses
+           implementation provide a tput utility which does  not  provide  the
+           capname feature.
 
-       X/Open  Curses  Issue  7 (2009) is the first version to document utili-
-       ties.  However that part of X/Open  Curses  does  not  follow  existing
+       X/Open  Curses  Issue  7  (2009)  is  the  first  version  to  document
+       utilities.  However that part of X/Open Curses does not follow existing
        practice (i.e., Unix features documented in SVID 3):
 
        o   It  assigns exit code 4 to "invalid operand", which may be the same
            as unknown capability.  For instance, the source code for  Solaris'
            xcurses uses the term "invalid" in this case.
 
-       o   It  assigns  exit code 255 to a numeric variable that is not speci-
-           fied in the terminfo database.   That  likely  is  a  documentation
+       o   It  assigns  exit  code  255  to  a  numeric  variable  that is not
+           specified in the terminfo database.  That likely is a documentation
            error,  confusing  the  -1  written  to  the standard output for an
            absent or cancelled numeric value versus an (unsigned) exit code.
 
@@ -521,9 +521,9 @@

SEE ALSO

-       clear(1), stty(1), tabs(1), tset(1), terminfo(5), curs_termcap(3x).
+       clear(1), stty(1), tabs(1), tset(1), curs_termcap(3x), terminfo(5).
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/tset.1.html b/doc/html/man/tset.1.html
index f60f0a22..16c14009 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/tset.1.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/tset.1.html
@@ -60,8 +60,8 @@

tset - initialization

        This program initializes terminals.
 
-       First,  tset retrieves the current terminal mode settings for your ter-
-       minal.  It does this by successively testing
+       First,  tset  retrieves  the  current  terminal  mode settings for your
+       terminal.  It does this by successively testing
 
        o   the standard error,
 
@@ -90,30 +90,30 @@
 
        If  the  terminal  type  was  not specified on the command-line, the -m
        option mappings are then applied (see the section TERMINAL TYPE MAPPING
-       for  more information).  Then, if the terminal type begins with a ques-
-       tion mark ("?"), the user is prompted for confirmation of the  terminal
-       type.   An  empty  response  confirms the type, or, another type can be
-       entered to specify a new type.  Once the terminal type has been  deter-
-       mined,  the  terminal description for the terminal is retrieved.  If no
-       terminal description is found for the type, the user  is  prompted  for
+       for  more  information).   Then,  if  the  terminal  type begins with a
+       question mark ("?"), the user  is  prompted  for  confirmation  of  the
+       terminal  type.   An empty response confirms the type, or, another type
+       can be entered to specify a new type.  Once the terminal type has  been
+       determined, the terminal description for the terminal is retrieved.  If
+       no terminal description is found for the type, the user is prompted for
        another terminal type.
 
        Once the terminal description is retrieved,
 
-       o   if  the "-w" option is enabled, tset may update the terminal's win-
-           dow size.
+       o   if  the  "-w"  option  is  enabled,  tset may update the terminal's
+           window size.
 
            If the window size cannot be obtained from  the  operating  system,
-           but  the terminal description (or environment, e.g., LINES and COL-
-           UMNS variables specify this), use this to set  the  operating  sys-
-           tem's notion of the window size.
+           but  the  terminal  description  (or  environment,  e.g., LINES and
+           COLUMNS variables specify this), use  this  to  set  the  operating
+           system's notion of the window size.
 
        o   if  the  "-c"  option is enabled, the backspace, interrupt and line
            kill characters (among many other things) are set
 
-       o   unless the "-I" option is enabled, the terminal and tab initializa-
-           tion  strings are sent to the standard error output, and tset waits
-           one second (in case a hardware reset was issued).
+       o   unless  the  "-I"  option  is  enabled,  the   terminal   and   tab
+           initialization  strings  are sent to the standard error output, and
+           tset waits one second (in case a hardware reset was issued).
 
        o   Finally, if the erase, interrupt  and  line  kill  characters  have
            changed,  or  are not set to their default values, their values are
@@ -156,8 +156,8 @@
 
        -e   Set the erase character to ch.
 
-       -I   Do not send the terminal or tab initialization strings to the ter-
-            minal.
+       -I   Do  not  send  the  terminal  or tab initialization strings to the
+            terminal.
 
        -i   Set the interrupt character to ch.
 
@@ -167,8 +167,8 @@
             TERMINAL TYPE MAPPING for more information.
 
        -Q   Do  not  display any values for the erase, interrupt and line kill
-            characters.  Normally tset displays the values for control charac-
-            ters which differ from the system's default values.
+            characters.   Normally  tset  displays  the  values  for   control
+            characters which differ from the system's default values.
 
        -q   The  terminal  type  is  displayed to the standard output, and the
             terminal is not initialized in any way.  The option "-" by  itself
@@ -210,8 +210,8 @@

TERMINAL TYPE MAPPING

-       When the terminal is not hardwired into the system (or the current sys-
-       tem information is  incorrect)  the  terminal  type  derived  from  the
+       When  the  terminal  is  not  hardwired into the system (or the current
+       system information is incorrect) the terminal  type  derived  from  the
        /etc/ttys  file  or  the TERM environmental variable is often something
        generic like network, dialup, or unknown.   When  tset  is  used  in  a
        startup  script  it is often desirable to provide information about the
@@ -224,18 +224,18 @@
        The argument to the -m option consists of an  optional  port  type,  an
        optional  operator,  an  optional  baud rate specification, an optional
        colon (":") character and a terminal type.  The port type is  a  string
-       (delimited  by either the operator or the colon character).  The opera-
-       tor may be any combination of ">", "<", "@", and "!"; ">" means greater
-       than, "<" means less than, "@" means equal to and "!" inverts the sense
-       of the test.  The baud rate is specified as a number  and  is  compared
-       with  the  speed of the standard error output (which should be the con-
-       trol terminal).  The terminal type is a string.
-
-       If the terminal type is not specified on the command line, the -m  map-
-       pings are applied to the terminal type.  If the port type and baud rate
-       match the mapping, the terminal type specified in the mapping  replaces
-       the  current  type.   If  more than one mapping is specified, the first
-       applicable mapping is used.
+       (delimited  by  either  the  operator  or  the  colon  character).  The
+       operator may be any combination of ">", "<", "@", and  "!";  ">"  means
+       greater  than,  "<" means less than, "@" means equal to and "!" inverts
+       the sense of the test.  The baud rate is specified as a number  and  is
+       compared  with  the speed of the standard error output (which should be
+       the control terminal).  The terminal type is a string.
+
+       If the terminal type is not specified  on  the  command  line,  the  -m
+       mappings  are  applied to the terminal type.  If the port type and baud
+       rate match the mapping, the terminal  type  specified  in  the  mapping
+       replaces  the current type.  If more than one mapping is specified, the
+       first applicable mapping is used.
 
        For example, consider the following  mapping:  dialup>9600:vt100.   The
        port type is dialup , the operator is >, the baud rate specification is
@@ -254,16 +254,16 @@
        No whitespace characters are  permitted  in  the  -m  option  argument.
        Also,  to avoid problems with meta-characters, it is suggested that the
        entire -m option argument be placed within single quote characters, and
-       that  csh  users insert a backslash character ("\") before any exclama-
-       tion marks ("!").
+       that   csh   users  insert  a  backslash  character  ("\")  before  any
+       exclamation marks ("!").

HISTORY

        A reset command appeared in 2BSD (April 1979), written by Kurt  Shoens.
        This  program set the erase and kill characters to ^H (backspace) and @
        respectively.  Mark Horton improved that in 3BSD (October 1979), adding
-       intr,  quit, start/stop and eof characters as well as changing the pro-
-       gram to avoid modifying any user settings.
+       intr,  quit,  start/stop  and  eof  characters  as well as changing the
+       program to avoid modifying any user settings.
 
        Later in 4.1BSD (December 1980), Mark Horton added a call to  the  tset
        program  using  the  -I and -Q options, i.e., using that to improve the
@@ -271,15 +271,15 @@
        the termcap database.
 
        A separate tset command was provided in 2BSD by Eric Allman.  While the
-       oldest published source (from 1979) provides both tset and reset,  All-
-       man's  comments  in the 2BSD source code indicate that he began work in
-       October 1977, continuing development over the next few years.
+       oldest published source (from  1979)  provides  both  tset  and  reset,
+       Allman's  comments  in the 2BSD source code indicate that he began work
+       in October 1977, continuing development over the next few years.
 
        In September 1980, Eric Allman modified tset, adding the code from  the
        existing  "reset"  feature when tset was invoked as reset.  Rather than
        simply copying the existing program, in this merged version, tset  used
-       the  termcap database to do additional (re)initialization of the termi-
-       nal.  This version appeared in 4.1cBSD, late in 1982.
+       the  termcap  database  to  do  additional  (re)initialization  of  the
+       terminal.  This version appeared in 4.1cBSD, late in 1982.
 
        Other developers (e.g., Keith Bostic and Jim Bloom) continued to modify
        tset until 4.4BSD was released in 1993.
@@ -294,71 +294,72 @@
 
        The  AT&T  tput utility (AIX, HPUX, Solaris) incorporated the terminal-
        mode manipulation as well as termcap-based features such  as  resetting
-       tabstops from tset in BSD (4.1c), presumably with the intention of mak-
-       ing tset obsolete.  However, each of those systems still provides tset.
-       In fact, the commonly-used reset utility is always an alias for tset.
-
-       The  tset utility provides for backward-compatibility with BSD environ-
-       ments (under most modern UNIXes, /etc/inittab and getty(1) can set TERM
-       appropriately for each dial-up line; this obviates what was tset's most
-       important use).  This implementation behaves like 4.4BSD tset,  with  a
-       few exceptions specified here.
-
-       A  few  options are different because the TERMCAP variable is no longer
+       tabstops  from  tset  in  BSD  (4.1c), presumably with the intention of
+       making tset obsolete.  However, each of those  systems  still  provides
+       tset.   In fact, the commonly-used reset utility is always an alias for
+       tset.
+
+       The  tset  utility  provides  for   backward-compatibility   with   BSD
+       environments  (under  most modern UNIXes, /etc/inittab and getty(1) can
+       set TERM appropriately for each dial-up line; this  obviates  what  was
+       tset's  most  important  use).  This implementation behaves like 4.4BSD
+       tset, with a few exceptions specified here.
+
+       A few options are different because the TERMCAP variable is  no  longer
        supported under terminfo-based ncurses:
 
-       o   The -S option of BSD tset no longer works; it prints an error  mes-
-           sage to the standard error and dies.
+       o   The  -S  option  of  BSD  tset  no longer works; it prints an error
+           message to the standard error and dies.
 
        o   The -s option only sets TERM, not TERMCAP.
 
-       There  was an undocumented 4.4BSD feature that invoking tset via a link
-       named "TSET" (or via any other name beginning with an  upper-case  let-
-       ter)  set  the  terminal to use upper-case only.  This feature has been
+       There was an undocumented 4.4BSD feature that invoking tset via a  link
+       named  "TSET"  (or  via  any  other  name  beginning with an upper-case
+       letter) set the terminal to use upper-case only.  This feature has been
        omitted.
 
        The -A, -E, -h, -u and -v options were deleted from the tset utility in
-       4.4BSD.   None of them were documented in 4.3BSD and all are of limited
-       utility at best.  The -a, -d, and -p options are  similarly  not  docu-
-       mented  or useful, but were retained as they appear to be in widespread
-       use.  It is strongly recommended that any usage of these three  options
-       be  changed  to  use the -m option instead.  The -a, -d, and -p options
-       are therefore omitted from the usage summary above.
-
-       Very old systems, e.g., 3BSD, used a different  terminal  driver  which
-       was  replaced  in  4BSD in the early 1980s.  To accommodate these older
-       systems, the 4BSD tset provided a -n option to  specify  that  the  new
-       terminal  driver  should be used.  This implementation does not provide
+       4.4BSD.  None of them were documented in 4.3BSD and all are of  limited
+       utility  at  best.   The  -a,  -d,  and  -p  options  are similarly not
+       documented or useful, but  were  retained  as  they  appear  to  be  in
+       widespread  use.   It  is  strongly recommended that any usage of these
+       three options be changed to use the -m option instead.  The -a, -d, and
+       -p options are therefore omitted from the usage summary above.
+
+       Very  old  systems,  e.g., 3BSD, used a different terminal driver which
+       was replaced in 4BSD in the early 1980s.  To  accommodate  these  older
+       systems,  the  4BSD  tset  provided a -n option to specify that the new
+       terminal driver should be used.  This implementation does  not  provide
        that choice.
 
-       It is still permissible to specify the -e, -i, and -k  options  without
+       It  is  still permissible to specify the -e, -i, and -k options without
        arguments, although it is strongly recommended that such usage be fixed
        to explicitly specify the character.
 
-       As of 4.4BSD, executing tset as reset no longer implies the -Q  option.
+       As  of 4.4BSD, executing tset as reset no longer implies the -Q option.
        Also, the interaction between the - option and the terminal argument in
        some historic implementations of tset has been removed.
 
-       The -c and -w options are not found in earlier  implementations.   How-
-       ever, a different window size-change feature was provided in 4.4BSD.
+       The  -c  and  -w  options  are  not  found  in earlier implementations.
+       However, a different window size-change feature was provided in 4.4BSD.
 
-       o   In  4.4BSD,  tset uses the window size from the termcap description
-           to set the window size if tset is not able  to  obtain  the  window
+       o   In 4.4BSD, tset uses the window size from the  termcap  description
+           to  set  the  window  size if tset is not able to obtain the window
            size from the operating system.
 
        o   In ncurses, tset obtains the window size using setupterm, which may
-           be from the operating system, the  LINES  and  COLUMNS  environment
+           be  from  the  operating  system, the LINES and COLUMNS environment
            variables or the terminal description.
 
-       Obtaining  the  window  size from the terminal description is common to
-       both implementations, but considered obsolescent.  Its  only  practical
+       Obtaining the window size from the terminal description  is  common  to
+       both  implementations,  but considered obsolescent.  Its only practical
        use is for hardware terminals.  Generally speaking, a window size would
-       be unset only if there were some problem obtaining the value  from  the
-       operating  system  (and  setupterm would still fail).  For that reason,
-       the LINES and COLUMNS environment variables may be useful  for  working
-       around  window-size problems.  Those have the drawback that if the win-
-       dow is resized, those variables must be recomputed and reassigned.   To
-       do this more easily, use the resize(1) program.
+       be  unset  only if there were some problem obtaining the value from the
+       operating system (and setupterm would still fail).   For  that  reason,
+       the  LINES  and COLUMNS environment variables may be useful for working
+       around window-size problems.  Those  have  the  drawback  that  if  the
+       window  is  resized, those variables must be recomputed and reassigned.
+       To do this more easily, use the resize(1) program.

ENVIRONMENT

@@ -367,30 +368,30 @@
        SHELL
             tells tset whether to initialize TERM using sh or csh syntax.
 
-       TERM Denotes  your  terminal  type.   Each  terminal  type is distinct,
+       TERM Denotes your terminal  type.   Each  terminal  type  is  distinct,
             though many are similar.
 
        TERMCAP
-            may denote the location of a termcap database.  If it  is  not  an
-            absolute pathname, e.g., begins with a "/", tset removes the vari-
-            able from the environment before looking for the terminal descrip-
-            tion.
+            may  denote  the  location of a termcap database.  If it is not an
+            absolute pathname, e.g., begins  with  a  "/",  tset  removes  the
+            variable  from  the  environment  before  looking for the terminal
+            description.

FILES

        /etc/ttys
-            system  port  name to terminal type mapping database (BSD versions
+            system port name to terminal type mapping database  (BSD  versions
             only).
 
-       /usr/local/ncurses/lib/terminfo
+       /usr/share/terminfo
             terminal capability database

SEE ALSO

-       csh(1),  sh(1),  stty(1),   curs_terminfo(3x),   tty(4),   terminfo(5),
+       csh(1),   sh(1),   stty(1),   curs_terminfo(3x),  tty(4),  terminfo(5),
        ttys(5), environ(7)
 
-       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201212).
+       This describes ncurses version 6.2 (patch 20201219).
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/man/user_caps.5.html b/doc/html/man/user_caps.5.html
index 8626b0b4..ce284d30 100644
--- a/doc/html/man/user_caps.5.html
+++ b/doc/html/man/user_caps.5.html
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
   * sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written       *
   * authorization.                                                           *
   ****************************************************************************
-  * @Id: user_caps.5,v 1.15 2020/04/18 10:29:43 tom Exp @
+  * @Id: user_caps.5,v 1.16 2020/12/19 21:26:11 tom Exp @
 -->
 
 
@@ -57,20 +57,20 @@

DESCRIPTION

Background

-       Before  ncurses 5.0, terminfo databases used a fixed repertoire of ter-
-       minal capabilities designed for the SVr2 terminal database in 1984, and
-       extended  in stages through SVr4 (1989), and standardized in the Single
-       Unix Specification beginning in 1995.
+       Before  ncurses  5.0,  terminfo  databases  used  a fixed repertoire of
+       terminal capabilities designed for the SVr2 terminal database in  1984,
+       and  extended  in  stages  through SVr4 (1989), and standardized in the
+       Single Unix Specification beginning in 1995.
 
        Most of the extensions in this fixed repertoire were additions  to  the
        tables of boolean, numeric and string capabilities.  Rather than change
-       the meaning of an existing capability, a new name was added.  The  ter-
-       minfo  database  uses a binary format; binary compatibility was ensured
-       by using a header which gave the number of items in the tables for each
-       type of capability.  The standardization was incomplete:
+       the meaning of an existing capability,  a  new  name  was  added.   The
+       terminfo  database  uses  a  binary  format;  binary  compatibility was
+       ensured by using a header which gave the number of items in the  tables
+       for each type of capability.  The standardization was incomplete:
 
-       o   The binary format itself is not described in the X/Open Curses doc-
-           umentation.  Only the source format is described.
+       o   The  binary  format  itself  is  not described in the X/Open Curses
+           documentation.  Only the source format is described.
 
            Library developers rely upon the SVr4 documentation,  and  reverse-
            engineering the compiled terminfo files to match the binary format.
@@ -91,9 +91,9 @@
 
            While  ncurses' repertoire of predefined capabilities is closest to
            Solaris, Solaris's terminfo database has a few differences from the
-           list  published by X/Open Curses.  For example, ncurses can be con-
-           figured with tables which match the terminal databases for AIX, HP-
-           UX or OSF/1, rather than the default Solaris-like configuration.
+           list  published  by  X/Open  Curses.   For  example, ncurses can be
+           configured with tables which match the terminal databases for  AIX,
+           HP-UX or OSF/1, rather than the default Solaris-like configuration.
 
        o   In  SVr4  curses  and  ncurses, the terminal database is defined at
            compile-time using a text file which lists the  different  terminal
@@ -101,9 +101,9 @@
 
            In  principle,  the  text-file  can  be  extended,  but  doing this
            requires recompiling and reinstalling the library.   The  text-file
-           used in ncurses for terminal capabilities includes details for var-
-           ious systems past the documented X/Open Curses features.  For exam-
-           ple, ncurses supports these capabilities in each configuration:
+           used  in  ncurses  for  terminal  capabilities includes details for
+           various systems past the documented X/Open  Curses  features.   For
+           example, ncurses supports these capabilities in each configuration:
 
                memory_lock
                     (meml) lock memory above cursor
@@ -115,16 +115,16 @@
                     (box1) box characters primary set
 
            The memory lock/unlock capabilities were included because they were
-           used in the X11R6 terminal description for xterm.  The  box1  capa-
-           bility  is  used  in tic to help with terminal descriptions written
-           for AIX.
+           used in  the  X11R6  terminal  description  for  xterm.   The  box1
+           capability  is  used  in  tic  to  help  with terminal descriptions
+           written for AIX.
 
        During the 1990s, some users were reluctant to use terminfo in spite of
        its performance advantages over termcap:
 
-       o   The fixed repertoire prevented users from adding features for unan-
-           ticipated terminal improvements (or required them to reuse existing
-           capabilities as a workaround).
+       o   The  fixed  repertoire  prevented  users  from  adding features for
+           unanticipated terminal improvements  (or  required  them  to  reuse
+           existing capabilities as a workaround).
 
        o   The  limitation  to  16-bit  signed  integers  was  also mentioned.
            Because termcap stores everything as a string, it  could  represent
@@ -132,10 +132,10 @@
 
        Although  termcap's  extensibility  was  rarely  used (it was never the
        speaker who had actually used the feature), the criticism had a  point.
-       ncurses  5.0  provided a way to detect nonstandard capabilities, deter-
-       mine their type and optionally store and retrieve them in a  way  which
-       did  not  interfere  with other applications.  These are referred to as
-       user-defined capabilities because no  modifications  to  the  toolset's
+       ncurses   5.0  provided  a  way  to  detect  nonstandard  capabilities,
+       determine their type and optionally store and retrieve them  in  a  way
+       which did not interfere with other applications.  These are referred to
+       as user-defined capabilities because no modifications to the  toolset's
        predefined capability names are needed.
 
        The  ncurses  utilities tic and infocmp have a command-line option "-x"
@@ -144,8 +144,8 @@
        same purpose.
 
        When compiling a terminal database, if "-x" is set, tic  will  store  a
-       user-defined capability if the capability name is not one of the prede-
-       fined names.
+       user-defined  capability  if  the  capability  name  is  not one of the
+       predefined names.
 
        Because ncurses provides  a  termcap  library  interface,  these  user-
        defined capabilities may be visible to termcap applications:
@@ -153,8 +153,8 @@
        o   The   termcap  interface  (like  all  implementations  of  termcap)
            requires that the capability names are 2-characters.
 
-           When the capability is simple enough for use in a termcap  applica-
-           tion, it is provided as a 2-character name.
+           When  the  capability  is  simple  enough  for  use  in  a  termcap
+           application, it is provided as a 2-character name.
 
        o   There  are  other user-defined capabilities which refer to features
            not usable in termcap, e.g., parameterized strings  that  use  more
@@ -163,17 +163,17 @@
            only capability names with 3 or more characters.
 
        o   Some terminals can send distinct strings for special keys (cursor-,
-           keypad- or function-keys) depending on modifier keys  (shift,  con-
-           trol,  etc.).   While  terminfo and termcap have a set of 60 prede-
-           fined function-key  names,  to  which  a  series  of  keys  can  be
-           assigned,  that  is  insufficient for more than a dozen keys multi-
-           plied by more than a couple of modifier combinations.  The  ncurses
-           database  uses a convention based on xterm to provide extended spe-
-           cial-key names.
+           keypad-  or  function-keys)  depending  on  modifier  keys  (shift,
+           control,  etc.).   While  terminfo  and  termcap  have  a set of 60
+           predefined function-key names, to which a series  of  keys  can  be
+           assigned,   that  is  insufficient  for  more  than  a  dozen  keys
+           multiplied by more than a couple  of  modifier  combinations.   The
+           ncurses  database  uses  a  convention  based  on  xterm to provide
+           extended special-key names.
 
            Fitting that into termcap's limitation of 2-character  names  would
-           be  pointless.   These  extended  keys are available only with ter-
-           minfo.
+           be   pointless.   These  extended  keys  are  available  only  with
+           terminfo.

Recognized capabilities

@@ -228,10 +228,10 @@
              i.e., one bit per color.
 
           U8 number, asserts that ncurses must use Unicode  values  for  line-
-             drawing characters, and that it should ignore the alternate char-
-             acter set capabilities when the locale uses UTF-8 encoding.   For
-             more  information,  see  the discussion of NCURSES_NO_UTF8_ACS in
-             ncurses(3x).
+             drawing  characters,  and  that  it  should  ignore the alternate
+             character set capabilities when the locale uses  UTF-8  encoding.
+             For  more  information, see the discussion of NCURSES_NO_UTF8_ACS
+             in ncurses(3x).
 
              Set this capability to a nonzero value to enable it.
 
@@ -243,13 +243,13 @@
              certain  modes) moves the mouse, handles the characters sent back
              by the terminal to tell it what was done with the mouse.
 
-             The mouse protocol is enabled when the mask passed in the  mouse-
-             mask  function  is  nonzero.   By  default,  ncurses  handles the
+             The mouse protocol  is  enabled  when  the  mask  passed  in  the
+             mousemask  function  is nonzero.  By default, ncurses handles the
              responses for the X11 xterm mouse protocol.  It also knows  about
              the  SGR  1006  xterm mouse protocol, but must to be told to look
              for this specifically.  It will not be able to guess  which  mode
-             is  used, because the responses are enough alike that only confu-
-             sion would result.
+             is  used,  because  the  responses  are  enough  alike  that only
+             confusion would result.
 
              The XM capability has a single parameter.  If nonzero, the  mouse
              protocol  should  be enabled.  If zero, the mouse protocol should
@@ -259,14 +259,14 @@
 
              The xterm mouse protocol is used  by  other  terminal  emulators.
              The  terminal database uses building-blocks for the various xterm
-             mouse protocols which can be used in customized terminal descrip-
-             tions.
+             mouse  protocols  which  can  be  used  in  customized   terminal
+             descriptions.
 
              The terminal database building blocks for this mouse feature also
              have  an  experimental  capability  xm.   The   "xm"   capability
              describes  the mouse response.  Currently there is no interpreter
-             which would use this information to make the mouse  support  com-
-             pletely data-driven.
+             which would use  this  information  to  make  the  mouse  support
+             completely data-driven.
 
              xm shows the format of the mouse responses.  In this experimental
              capability, the parameters are
@@ -287,8 +287,8 @@
 
                p8   x-ordinate ending region
 
-             Here are examples from the terminal database for  the  most  com-
-             monly used xterm mouse protocols:
+             Here are  examples  from  the  terminal  database  for  the  most
+             commonly used xterm mouse protocols:
 
                xterm+x11mouse|X11 xterm mouse protocol,
                        kmous=\E[M, XM=\E[?1000%?%p1%{1}%=%th%el%;,
@@ -306,15 +306,15 @@

Extended key-definitions

-       Several terminals provide the ability to send distinct strings for com-
-       binations of modified special keys.  There  is  no  standard  for  what
+       Several  terminals  provide  the  ability  to send distinct strings for
+       combinations of modified special keys.  There is no standard  for  what
        those keys can send.
 
        Since 1999, xterm has supported shift, control, alt, and meta modifiers
        which produce distinct special-key strings.  In a terminal description,
        ncurses  has  no special knowledge of the modifiers used.  Applications
-       can use the naming convention established for xterm to find these  spe-
-       cial keys in the terminal description.
+       can use the naming convention  established  for  xterm  to  find  these
+       special keys in the terminal description.
 
        Starting  with  the curses convention that key names begin with "k" and
        that shifted special keys are  an  uppercase  name,  ncurses'  terminal
@@ -356,29 +356,29 @@
        which ncurses will allocate at runtime to key-codes.  To use these keys
        in an ncurses program, an application could do this:
 
-       o   using a list of extended key names, ask tigetstr(3x) for their val-
-           ues, and
+       o   using  a  list  of  extended  key names, ask tigetstr(3x) for their
+           values, and
 
        o   given the list of values,  ask  key_defined(3x)  for  the  key-code
            which would be returned for those keys by wgetch(3x).

PORTABILITY

-       The  "-x" extension feature of tic and infocmp has been adopted in Net-
-       BSD curses.  That implementation stores user-defined capabilities,  but
-       makes no use of these capabilities itself.
+       The  "-x"  extension  feature  of  tic  and infocmp has been adopted in
+       NetBSD curses.  That implementation stores  user-defined  capabilities,
+       but makes no use of these capabilities itself.

SEE ALSO

-       tic(1m), infocmp(1m).
+       infocmp(1m), tic(1m).
 
-       The  terminal database section NCURSES USER-DEFINABLE CAPABILITIES sum-
-       marizes commonly-used user-defined capabilities which are used  in  the
-       terminal  descriptions.   Some  of  those  features  are  mentioned  in
+       The  terminal  database  section  NCURSES  USER-DEFINABLE  CAPABILITIES
+       summarizes commonly-used user-defined capabilities which  are  used  in
+       the  terminal  descriptions.   Some  of those features are mentioned in
        screen(1) or tmux(1).
 
-       XTerm Control Sequences provides further information on the xterm  fea-
-       tures which are used in these extended capabilities.
+       XTerm Control Sequences  provides  further  information  on  the  xterm
+       features which are used in these extended capabilities.

AUTHORS

diff --git a/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x b/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x
index 494ce51e..c037be63 100644
--- a/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x
+++ b/man/curs_add_wchstr.3x
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: curs_add_wchstr.3x,v 1.14 2020/10/17 23:11:38 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_add_wchstr.3x,v 1.15 2020/12/19 21:39:06 tom Exp $
 .TH curs_add_wchstr 3X ""
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
 .el       .ds `` ``
@@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ All functions except \fBwadd_wchnstr\fR may be macros.
 .SH PORTABILITY
 These entry points are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
 .SH SEE ALSO
-\fBcurs_addwstr\fR(3X),
-\fBcurses\fR(3X).
+\fBcurses\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_addwstr\fR(3X).
 .PP
 Comparable functions in the narrow-character (ncurses) library are
 described in
diff --git a/man/curs_addchstr.3x b/man/curs_addchstr.3x
index 03f6debf..09d70d6e 100644
--- a/man/curs_addchstr.3x
+++ b/man/curs_addchstr.3x
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: curs_addchstr.3x,v 1.21 2020/10/18 00:35:20 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_addchstr.3x,v 1.22 2020/12/19 21:39:20 tom Exp $
 .TH curs_addchstr 3X ""
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
 .el       .ds `` ``
@@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ All functions except \fBwaddchnstr\fR may be macros.
 .SH PORTABILITY
 These entry points are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
 .SH SEE ALSO
-\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X),
-\fBcurses\fR(3X).
+\fBcurses\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X).
 .PP
 Comparable functions in the wide-character (ncursesw) library are
 described in
diff --git a/man/curs_getch.3x b/man/curs_getch.3x
index 1cf9d18b..a8c4bc1f 100644
--- a/man/curs_getch.3x
+++ b/man/curs_getch.3x
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: curs_getch.3x,v 1.56 2020/10/17 23:18:32 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_getch.3x,v 1.57 2020/12/19 21:38:20 tom Exp $
 .TH curs_getch 3X ""
 .na
 .hy 0
@@ -406,9 +406,9 @@ any code using it be conditionalized on the \fBNCURSES_VERSION\fR feature macro.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X),
-\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_move\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_variables\fR(3X),
 \fBresizeterm\fR(3X).
diff --git a/man/curs_termcap.3x b/man/curs_termcap.3x
index daadfe6f..15385780 100644
--- a/man/curs_termcap.3x
+++ b/man/curs_termcap.3x
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.46 2020/11/07 23:39:47 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.47 2020/12/19 21:47:36 tom Exp $
 .TH curs_termcap 3X ""
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
 .el       .ds `` ``
@@ -331,8 +331,8 @@ which must be taken into account by programs which can work with all
 termcap library interfaces.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
-\fBterminfo\fR(\*n),
+\fBputc\fR(3),
 \fBterm_variables\fR(3X),
-\fBputc\fR(3).
+\fBterminfo\fR(\*n).
 .sp
 https://invisible-island.net/ncurses/tctest.html
diff --git a/man/curs_util.3x b/man/curs_util.3x
index afb09286..f833803a 100644
--- a/man/curs_util.3x
+++ b/man/curs_util.3x
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.59 2020/10/24 09:15:57 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.60 2020/12/19 22:44:46 tom Exp $
 .TH curs_util 3X ""
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
 .el       .ds `` ``
@@ -397,7 +397,6 @@ creating each \fIscreen\fP rather than once only
 This feature of \fBuse_env\fP
 is not provided by other implementation of curses.
 .SH SEE ALSO
-\fBlegacy_coding\fR(3X),
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X),
diff --git a/man/default_colors.3x b/man/default_colors.3x
index 194abb1c..c1d1bf70 100644
--- a/man/default_colors.3x
+++ b/man/default_colors.3x
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" Author: Thomas E. Dickey 1997,1999,2000,2005
 .\"
-.\" $Id: default_colors.3x,v 1.30 2020/10/24 09:52:16 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: default_colors.3x,v 1.31 2020/12/19 21:38:37 tom Exp $
 .TH default_colors 3X ""
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
 .el       .ds `` ``
@@ -137,8 +137,8 @@ Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
 It is recommended that
 any code depending on them be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
 .SH SEE ALSO
-\fBcurs_color\fR(3X),
-\fBded\fP(1).
+\fBded\fP(1),
+\fBcurs_color\fR(3X).
 .SH AUTHOR
 Thomas Dickey (from an analysis of the requirements for color xterm
 for XFree86 3.1.2C, February 1996).
diff --git a/man/form_driver.3x b/man/form_driver.3x
index 9b564f94..9c096f90 100644
--- a/man/form_driver.3x
+++ b/man/form_driver.3x
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: form_driver.3x,v 1.34 2020/10/17 23:28:04 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: form_driver.3x,v 1.35 2020/12/19 21:34:15 tom Exp $
 .TH form_driver 3X ""
 .de bP
 .ie n  .IP \(bu 4
@@ -254,9 +254,9 @@ The form driver code saw an unknown request code.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
 \fBform\fR(3X),
+\fBform_fieldtype\fR(3X),
 \fBform_field_buffer\fR(3X),
 \fBform_field_validation\fR(3X),
-\fBform_fieldtype\fR(3X),
 \fBform_variables\fR(3X),
 \fBgetch\fR(3X).
 .SH NOTES
diff --git a/man/infotocap.1m b/man/infotocap.1m
index 10c95ea9..2740b559 100644
--- a/man/infotocap.1m
+++ b/man/infotocap.1m
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: infotocap.1m,v 1.16 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: infotocap.1m,v 1.17 2020/12/19 21:49:52 tom Exp $
 .TH @INFOTOCAP@ 1M ""
 .ds n 5
 .ds d @TERMINFO@
@@ -67,9 +67,9 @@ You can use other \fB@TIC@\fR options such as \fB\-f\fR and  \fB\-x\fR.
 .SH PORTABILITY
 None of X/Open Curses, Issue 7 (2009), SVr4 or NetBSD document this application.
 .SH SEE ALSO
-\fBcurses\fR(3X),
-\fB@TIC@\fR(1M),
 \fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
+\fB@TIC@\fR(1M),
+\fBcurses\fR(3X),
 \fBterminfo\fR(\*n)
 .PP
 This describes \fBncurses\fR
diff --git a/man/menu_driver.3x b/man/menu_driver.3x
index a5c5c83d..e3953582 100644
--- a/man/menu_driver.3x
+++ b/man/menu_driver.3x
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.27 2020/10/17 23:42:13 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.28 2020/12/19 21:33:37 tom Exp $
 .TH menu_driver 3X ""
 .de bP
 .ie n  .IP \(bu 4
@@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ Character failed to match.
 The menu driver could not process the request.
 .SH SEE ALSO
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
-\fBmenu\fR(3X),
-\fBgetch\fR(3X).
+\fBgetch\fR(3X),
+\fBmenu\fR(3X).
 .SH NOTES
 The header file \fB\fR automatically includes the header files
 \fB\fR.
diff --git a/man/tabs.1 b/man/tabs.1
index 9c891f1b..eb7e6597 100644
--- a/man/tabs.1
+++ b/man/tabs.1
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: tabs.1,v 1.27 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: tabs.1,v 1.28 2020/12/19 21:50:22 tom Exp $
 .TH @TABS@ 1 ""
 .ds n 5
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
@@ -229,8 +229,8 @@ However, the \fIExplicit Lists\fP described in this manual page
 were implemented in PWB/Unix.
 Those provide the capability of setting abitrary tab stops.
 .SH SEE ALSO
-\fB@TSET@\fR(1),
 \fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
+\fB@TSET@\fR(1),
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
 \fBterminfo\fR(\*n).
 .PP
diff --git a/man/terminfo.tail b/man/terminfo.tail
index f6ccf6b0..da154ecf 100644
--- a/man/terminfo.tail
+++ b/man/terminfo.tail
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.99 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.100 2020/12/19 21:51:22 tom Exp $
 .ps +1
 .SS User-Defined Capabilities
 .
@@ -1905,15 +1905,15 @@ Supports both the SVr4 set and the AIX extensions.
 \*d/?/*
 files containing terminal descriptions
 .SH SEE ALSO
+\fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
 \fB@TABS@\fR(1),
 \fB@TIC@\fR(1M),
-\fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_color\fR(3X),
 \fBcurs_variables\fR(3X),
 \fBprintf\fR(3),
-\fBterm\fR(\*n).
 \fBterm_variables\fR(3X).
+\fBterm\fR(\*n).
 \fBuser_caps\fR(5).
 .SH AUTHORS
 Zeyd M. Ben-Halim, Eric S. Raymond, Thomas E. Dickey.
diff --git a/man/tic.1m b/man/tic.1m
index f7fe26b6..f0a627d9 100644
--- a/man/tic.1m
+++ b/man/tic.1m
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: tic.1m,v 1.77 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: tic.1m,v 1.78 2020/12/19 21:32:45 tom Exp $
 .TH @TIC@ 1M ""
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
 .el       .ds `` ``
@@ -573,8 +573,8 @@ System V does not compile entries to or read entries from your
 \fB\*d/?/*\fR
 Compiled terminal description database.
 .SH SEE ALSO
-\fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
 \fB@CAPTOINFO@\fR(1M),
+\fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
 \fB@INFOTOCAP@\fR(1M),
 \fB@TOE@\fR(1M),
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
diff --git a/man/toe.1m b/man/toe.1m
index e5fa1c6f..9a83821b 100644
--- a/man/toe.1m
+++ b/man/toe.1m
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: toe.1m,v 1.32 2020/02/02 23:34:34 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: toe.1m,v 1.33 2020/12/19 21:52:09 tom Exp $
 .TH @TOE@ 1M ""
 .de bP
 .ie n  .IP \(bu 4
@@ -183,10 +183,10 @@ the ncurses \fBinfocmp\fP utility in 1995.
 The \fB\-a\fP and \fB\-s\fP options were added to 
 \fB@TOE@\fR several years later (2006 and 2011, respectively).
 .SH SEE ALSO
-\fB@TIC@\fR(1M),
-\fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
 \fB@CAPTOINFO@\fR(1M),
+\fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
 \fB@INFOTOCAP@\fR(1M),
+\fB@TIC@\fR(1M),
 \fBcurses\fR(3X),
 \fBterminfo\fR(\*n).
 .PP
diff --git a/man/tput.1 b/man/tput.1
index 7e20fbed..64fb4530 100644
--- a/man/tput.1
+++ b/man/tput.1
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: tput.1,v 1.64 2020/04/25 21:52:49 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: tput.1,v 1.65 2020/12/19 22:17:47 tom Exp $
 .TH @TPUT@ 1 ""
 .ds d @TERMINFO@
 .ds n 1
@@ -590,8 +590,8 @@ to either ncurses or X/Open.
 \fBstty\fR(1),
 \fB@TABS@\fR(\*n),
 \fB@TSET@\fR(\*n),
-\fBterminfo\fR(5),
-\fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X).
+\fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X),
+\fBterminfo\fR(5).
 .PP
 This describes \fBncurses\fR
 version @NCURSES_MAJOR@.@NCURSES_MINOR@ (patch @NCURSES_PATCH@).
diff --git a/man/user_caps.5 b/man/user_caps.5
index 8f29cbdf..43dd000c 100644
--- a/man/user_caps.5
+++ b/man/user_caps.5
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" authorization.                                                           *
 .\"***************************************************************************
 .\"
-.\" $Id: user_caps.5,v 1.15 2020/04/18 10:29:43 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: user_caps.5,v 1.16 2020/12/19 21:26:11 tom Exp $
 .TH user_caps 5
 .ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
 .el       .ds `` ``
@@ -419,8 +419,8 @@ but makes no use of these capabilities itself.
 .\"
 .SH SEE ALSO
 .PP
-\fB@TIC@\fR(1M),
-\fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M).
+\fB@INFOCMP@\fR(1M),
+\fB@TIC@\fR(1M).
 .PP
 The terminal database section
 .I "NCURSES USER-DEFINABLE CAPABILITIES"
diff --git a/package/debian-mingw/changelog b/package/debian-mingw/changelog
index cbdc6076..c51335f3 100644
--- a/package/debian-mingw/changelog
+++ b/package/debian-mingw/changelog
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.2+20201212) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.2+20201219) unstable; urgency=low
 
   * latest weekly patch
 
- -- Thomas E. Dickey   Fri, 11 Dec 2020 16:43:33 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 19 Dec 2020 05:58:49 -0500
 
 ncurses6 (5.9-20131005) unstable; urgency=low
 
diff --git a/package/debian-mingw64/changelog b/package/debian-mingw64/changelog
index cbdc6076..c51335f3 100644
--- a/package/debian-mingw64/changelog
+++ b/package/debian-mingw64/changelog
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.2+20201212) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.2+20201219) unstable; urgency=low
 
   * latest weekly patch
 
- -- Thomas E. Dickey   Fri, 11 Dec 2020 16:43:33 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 19 Dec 2020 05:58:49 -0500
 
 ncurses6 (5.9-20131005) unstable; urgency=low
 
diff --git a/package/debian/changelog b/package/debian/changelog
index 2388b5dd..41e7ebef 100644
--- a/package/debian/changelog
+++ b/package/debian/changelog
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.2+20201212) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.2+20201219) unstable; urgency=low
 
   * latest weekly patch
 
- -- Thomas E. Dickey   Fri, 11 Dec 2020 16:43:33 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey   Sat, 19 Dec 2020 05:58:49 -0500
 
 ncurses6 (5.9-20120608) unstable; urgency=low
 
diff --git a/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi b/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi
index 3cb89dcd..af6d9d1e 100644
--- a/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi
+++ b/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-; $Id: mingw-ncurses.nsi,v 1.433 2020/12/12 11:43:33 tom Exp $
+; $Id: mingw-ncurses.nsi,v 1.434 2020/12/19 10:58:49 tom Exp $
 
 ; TODO add examples
 ; TODO bump ABI to 6
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 !define VERSION_MAJOR "6"
 !define VERSION_MINOR "2"
 !define VERSION_YYYY  "2020"
-!define VERSION_MMDD  "1212"
+!define VERSION_MMDD  "1219"
 !define VERSION_PATCH ${VERSION_YYYY}${VERSION_MMDD}
 
 !define MY_ABI   "5"
diff --git a/package/mingw-ncurses.spec b/package/mingw-ncurses.spec
index c82a77f9..1daa90bf 100644
--- a/package/mingw-ncurses.spec
+++ b/package/mingw-ncurses.spec
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 Summary: shared libraries for terminal handling
 Name: mingw32-ncurses6
 Version: 6.2
-Release: 20201212
+Release: 20201219
 License: X11
 Group: Development/Libraries
 Source: ncurses-%{version}-%{release}.tgz
diff --git a/package/ncurses.spec b/package/ncurses.spec
index 8c29ab17..7f858b0a 100644
--- a/package/ncurses.spec
+++ b/package/ncurses.spec
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Summary: shared libraries for terminal handling
 Name: ncurses6
 Version: 6.2
-Release: 20201212
+Release: 20201219
 License: X11
 Group: Development/Libraries
 Source: ncurses-%{version}-%{release}.tgz
diff --git a/package/ncursest.spec b/package/ncursest.spec
index 45482f26..b2d1334e 100644
--- a/package/ncursest.spec
+++ b/package/ncursest.spec
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Summary: Curses library with POSIX thread support.
 Name: ncursest6
 Version: 6.2
-Release: 20201212
+Release: 20201219
 License: X11
 Group: Development/Libraries
 Source: ncurses-%{version}-%{release}.tgz
diff --git a/test/README b/test/README
index 1d71e570..f7618fc5 100644
--- a/test/README
+++ b/test/README
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 -- sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written        --
 -- authorization.                                                            --
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- $Id: README,v 1.70 2020/03/21 22:25:28 tom Exp $
+-- $Id: README,v 1.71 2020/12/19 16:56:00 tom Exp $
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 The programs in this directory are used to test and demonstrate ncurses.
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ color_content			test: color_content ncurses picsmap
 color_content_sp		-
 color_set			test: color_set dots_xcurses extended_color ncurses
 copywin				test: ncurses testcurs
-cur_term			test: demo_termcap demo_terminfo dots dots_mvcur filter list_keys lrtest sp_tinfo test_sgr test_vid_puts test_vidputs progs: clear_cmd reset_cmd tabs tput tset
+cur_term			test: demo_termcap demo_terminfo dots dots_mvcur filter list_keys lrtest sp_tinfo test_sgr test_tparm test_vid_puts test_vidputs progs: clear_cmd reset_cmd tabs tput tset
 curs_set			test: demo_new_pair echochar firework gdc hanoi lrtest ncurses newdemo picsmap rain savescreen tclock testcurs worm xmas
 curs_set_sp			test: sp_tinfo
 curscr				test: demo_panels knight lrtest ncurses popup_msg savescreen tclock
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ def_shell_mode			-
 def_shell_mode_sp		test: sp_tinfo
 define_key			test: demo_altkeys demo_defkey foldkeys
 define_key_sp			test: sp_tinfo
-del_curterm			test: demo_terminfo sp_tinfo test_sgr
+del_curterm			test: demo_terminfo sp_tinfo test_sgr test_tparm
 del_curterm_sp			lib: ncurses
 delay_output			test: newdemo
 delay_output_sp			test: sp_tinfo
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ erasechar			test: ncurses
 erasechar_sp			test: sp_tinfo
 erasewchar			test: ncurses
 exit_curses			-
-exit_terminfo			lib: ncurses
+exit_terminfo			test: demo_tabs demo_termcap demo_terminfo dots dots_mvcur dots_termcap list_keys railroad sp_tinfo test_arrays test_sgr test_termattrs test_tparm test_vid_puts test_vidputs
 extended_color_content		test: color_content extended_color
 extended_color_content_sp	test: extended_color
 extended_pair_content		test: extended_color pair_content
@@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ set_tabsize_sp			test: sp_tinfo
 set_term			lib: ncurses
 setcchar			test: demo_new_pair demo_panels ins_wide ncurses picsmap savescreen test_add_wchstr test_addwstr
 setscrreg			test: view
-setupterm			test: demo_terminfo dots list_keys sp_tinfo test_setupterm test_sgr test_termattrs test_vid_puts test_vidputs progs: clear tabs tput tset
+setupterm			test: demo_terminfo dots list_keys sp_tinfo test_setupterm test_sgr test_termattrs test_tparm test_vid_puts test_vidputs progs: clear tabs tput tset
 slk_attr			-
 slk_attr_off			-
 slk_attr_on			-
@@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ start_color_sp			-
 stdscr				test: background bs chgat clip_printw color_content demo_altkeys demo_forms demo_menus demo_new_pair demo_panels ditto dup_field edit_field extended_color filter firework foldkeys form_driver_w gdc hanoi hashtest inch_wide inchs ins_wide insdelln inserts key_names keynames knight lrtest move_field movewindow ncurses padview pair_content picsmap rain redraw savescreen tclock test_add_wchstr test_addchstr test_addstr test_addwstr test_get_wstr test_getstr test_instr test_inwstr test_opaque testcurs testscanw view worm xmas
 strcodes			test: demo_termcap test_arrays progs: dump_entry
 strfnames			test: demo_terminfo list_keys test_arrays progs: dump_entry
-strnames			test: demo_terminfo foldkeys list_keys test_arrays progs: dump_entry infocmp tic
+strnames			test: demo_terminfo foldkeys list_keys test_arrays test_tparm progs: dump_entry infocmp tic
 subpad				test: testcurs
 subwin				test: movewindow ncurses newdemo testcurs
 syncok				test: test_opaque
@@ -689,13 +689,13 @@ tigetflag			test: demo_terminfo savescreen progs: tic tput
 tigetflag_sp			test: sp_tinfo
 tigetnum			test: demo_tabs demo_terminfo dots dots_mvcur ncurses savescreen progs: tput
 tigetnum_sp			test: sp_tinfo
-tigetstr			test: blue demo_defkey demo_new_pair demo_terminfo foldkeys list_keys savescreen test_sgr testcurs progs: clear_cmd tic tput
+tigetstr			test: blue demo_defkey demo_new_pair demo_terminfo foldkeys list_keys savescreen test_sgr test_tparm testcurs progs: clear_cmd tic tput
 tigetstr_sp			test: sp_tinfo
 timeout				test: filter rain savescreen
 tiparm				-
 touchline			test: chgat clip_printw insdelln
 touchwin			test: chgat clip_printw demo_menus filter firstlast inch_wide inchs ins_wide insdelln inserts movewindow ncurses popup_msg redraw test_add_wchstr test_addchstr test_addstr test_addwstr test_get_wstr test_getstr test_instr test_inwstr test_opaque xmas
-tparm				test: dots dots_mvcur test_sgr progs: reset_cmd tabs tic tput
+tparm				test: dots dots_mvcur test_sgr test_tparm progs: tic tput
 tputs				test: dots dots_mvcur dots_termcap railroad test_vid_puts test_vidputs progs: clear_cmd reset_cmd tabs
 tputs_sp			test: sp_tinfo
 trace				-
-- 
2.44.0